White Paper. Cabling for Success with DXLink TM Author: Curry Kinyon Co-Author: Jeff Howes Co-Author: Ann Yanecek

Transcription

1 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM Author: Curry Kinyon Co-Author: Jeff Howes Co-Author: Ann Yanecek Page 1 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

2 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper Table of Contents EXECUTIVE SUMMARY... 3 INTRODUCTION... 4 Overview... 4 DXLINK PERFORMANCE... 5 Basic Cable Information... 5 Installed Cable Channel Performance... 6 Enova DGX Link Quality Reporting... 6 CABLE QUALITY... 6 Cable Type... 6 Internal Channel Parameters... 7 External Channel Parameters... 7 Bandwidth Performance... 8 Cable Shielding... 8 CABLE TOPOLOGY Cable Length Bundled Cabling (Unshielded) Bundled Cabling (Shielded) Conduit Density Cable Loops Bends and Kinks Patch section ENVIRONMENT Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Electrical Motors Proximity ESD Events AC Power, Grounding Ambient Operating Conditions CONCLUSION Appendix A Appendix B Page 2 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

3 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Cabling For Success with DXLink TM DXLink delivers 10.2 Gb/s throughput over standard category cable. It accomplishes this by leveraging the transport layer of HDBaseT technology. DXLink is state of the art technology capable of delivering audio / video content at distances up to 100 meters when properly deployed and configured. The following white paper provides detailed information on how cable quality, cable topology and the environment affect the performance of DXLink systems. In summary, suffice it to say that bending, looping, bundling, using patch blocks and running cables near noisy devices will negatively affect the quality of the signal path and shorten the working distance below 100 meters. Below are some helpful guidelines to consider when deploying your DXLink system. Best Practices For best it just works results Cat6A cable is recommended In noisy environments (big motors, transformers, elevators) run shielded cable If you have a cable deployment scheme running many cables in a bundled structure through conduit or cable trays and have runs that traverse near large EMI or ESD generators you should use shielded cable Cat6A U/FTP or Cat6A F/UTP (or better) to achieve 100 meter performance For simple cable runs from an Enova DXLink enabled unit to a projector / LCD that are not bundled (minimum 2.54cm separation) with other cables like you would see in a typical large meeting room space, you can achieve 100 meter performance with Cat5e (250 MHz) cable If you choose to use Cat5e UTP (250 MHz) cable consider the following: o Tightly bundling the cables significantly impacts the length of cable that an input or output port can support. The tighter the bundles the worse the performance o Once you move into a cable routing scheme that bundles 2-3 cables together in a conduit or other close space your acceptable performance distance is up to 70 meters o If you route >=6 Cat 5e UTP cables bundled together the maximum length of cable run is up to 30 meters For optimal performance: Keep the cable runs as short as possible Keep the DXLink cables as isolated as possible from other cables (especially noisy power cables) Avoid running cables in parallel with power runs Try to cross power cable runs at 90 degree angles Avoid running near noisy devices (motors) or inductive loads Minimize bundling/grooming (especially near the end points) Avoid tie wrapping and/or tightly bundling DXLink cables together Avoid making sharp corners/bends in cable runs Minimize coiling of the cables Minimize patch blocks & patch cables (every connection introduces losses) Make sure connectors are properly terminated. The higher quality shielded cables require more intricate terminations When it is impractical to avoid bundling cables or running them near noisy devices, using shielded cable can help minimize the impact on picture quality Page 3 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

4 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper INTRODUCTION A multitude of aspects contribute to the overall system performance of DXLink products when installing structured cabling solutions. The capabilities of this solution to pass Uncompressed HDMI Video, Uncompressed HD Audio, Ethernet, Serial, IR and Power require a cable bandwidth of 250 MHz or greater and cabling infrastructure performance that supports throughput of up to 10 Gb/s. Based on the bandwidth required to transmit this amount of information we recommend following industry standard practices designed for 10 Gigabit Ethernet. In order to perform at its best, the HDBaseT transport layer utilized in DXLink require specific rules which include management of not only to the cabling system back-bone but also the patch locations and end-point runs. The primary focus of this paper is to review the key challenges and solutions facing the structured copper cabling media required to support this new DXLink technology. OVERVIEW To achieve a high performing and reliable installation, several key factors need to be considered and managed which all have a combined impact. When any one of these factors is not adhered to the likelihood of inconsistent performance or sporadic video and audio drop-outs increase, to the point where the products can fail to function at all if faced with several conditions not being met. Three main areas need to be addressed in order to optimize the performance of DXLink installations. They all have a direct impact on the performance of the overall DXLink system and also have relational impact on each other, such that improving in one area can often provide ability to overcome shortcomings in one of the other areas. A balancing of these three roles will allow for a successful and robust DXLink system. Page 4 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

5 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper DXLINK PERFORMANCE Depending on the link quality between DXLink over the structured cabling, the product performance can vary from a solid and reliable system to a system which may have intermittent problems or links that fail to function altogether. The most common symptom of poor link quality due to deficiencies in the structured cabling is intermittent momentary dropping of video and audio but can also degrade to the point that end points fall off-line and can even cause a link not to function at all, incurring a failure to link. This section touches on specific guidelines which can be referenced to ensure success from the beginning of the project all the way through installation providing validation of link quality after the job has been completed. BASIC CABLE INFORMATION Pre-installation cable selection should be the first order of business when designing the overall installation. The cable selection should be determined by the combination of these factors: the environment, length of DXLink cable runs and the planned cable topology. As shown in this document they all play a role in overall system performance. If the goal is to negate any of the external factors that can impact performance, then a screened or shielded cable is recommended. Screened cable such as F/UTP of Cat5e and Cat6 as well as higher performing Cat6A and Cat7 will minimize the need to manage the other portions of the structured wiring environment and topology. While 100m can be reached in a wide variety of scenarios the ability to achieve this is not a simple cable type vs. distance relationship as the environment and topology contribute to the link quality. Please reference the cable topology diagram shown in Figure 2 & 3. For the best performance a Cat6A cable is suggested, we recommend the following (or equivalent) which provides a good price vs. performance and will minimize the need to manage topology and environmental issues. Cat6A UTP Belden 10GX 10GX12 (Riser) Belden 10GX 10GX13 (Plenum) Cat6A F/UTP (shielded cable) Belden 10GX 10GX52F (Riser) Belden 10GX 10GX53F (Plenum) When using a Cat6 UTP or Cat6 F/UTP cable we recommend the following (or equivalent), although the UTP version will require some management of the environment and topology. Cat6 UTP Belden DataTwist 2412 (Riser) Belden DataTwist 2413 (Plenum) Cat6 F/UTP (shielded cable) Belden 2412F DataTwist (Riser) Belden 2413F DataTwist (Plenum) If you are looking to get by with a Cat5e UTP or Cat5e F/UTP cable we recommend the following (or equivalent), although the UTP version will require the most management of the environment and topology. Cat5e UTP Belden DataTwist 1212 (Riser) Belden DataTwist 1213 (Plenum) Cat5e F/UTP (shielded cable) Belden 1212F DataTwist (Riser) Belden 1213F DataTwist (Plenum) Page 5 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

6 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper INSTALLED CABLE CHANNEL PERFORMANCE Once cable is installed there are generally several factors that can affect link quality such as cable quality, cable length, cable topology, service loops, patch panel quality and quantity, cable kinks, grounding techniques, etc In order to understand how the overall cable paths perform from one end of the DXLink to the other end of the DXLink, you can utilize tools such as the Fluke DTX 1800 to characterize a number of specifications defined by TIA-568-C.2. In order to have any level of reliability in DXLink performance the Cat5e Channel specifications defined in TIA-568-C.2 are required; although to improve performance when environmental and topology issues are identified, then Cat6 and ultimately Cat6A channel requirements will provide performance improvements. ENOVA DGX LINK QUALITY REPORTING Another method for determining the link integrity for a given DXLink path is provided if it is installed in conjunction with an Enova DGX populated with DXLink Input/Output boards. The Enova DGX 32 and 16 enclosures can report measured link integrity values which are useful in qualifying the overall system or troubleshooting paths that are presenting problems. When connected to the Enova DGX Enclosure, reporting of each DXLink Input/Output port can be captured which presents a decibel value for each of the four twisted pairs on a given port. If any of these MSE values reports >= -15dB (i.e. -13dB) the link quality is in a range that can affect performance. See Appendix B for instructions and examples of how link quality reporting through the Enova DGX Enclosure can be acquired. CABLE QUALITY CABLE TYPE As you might expect, the higher the quality of the category cable the more robust the DXLink system will perform. The gains to be made in this area are improved bandwidth, improved internal channel parameters, improved external channel parameters and reduced susceptibility to environmental EMI and environmental ESD events. While the product does support up to 100m of Cat5e and Cat6, there are requirements that must be met regarding cable performance and cable topology to provide reliable operation. If these cannot be met then utilization of a higher grade cable may be required. Specifically, the items that need to be adhered to for the use of UTP Cat5e and Cat6 are: The bandwidth rating of the Cat5e and Cat6 must meet the 250 MHz specifications provided under appendix A of this document. Depending on the number of cables bundled with and the length of runs for the Cat5e and Cat6,it s topology will likely need some sections to maintain a 2.5cm (or 3 cable diameters) separation from all other DXLink category cables. The Topology section of this document defines these parameters in detail. Proximity to large EMI disturbances and local ESD and EMI events should be managed. The Environment section of this document defines these parameters in detail. If Foiled or Shielded versions of Cat5e and Cat6 are used (F/UTP, S/FTP or U/FTP) then improvements can be made regarding the limitations to the above specified bundling and local EMI management. When using Cat6A UTP or F/UTP and Cat7 or shielded versions of Cat6 which meet performance requirements the DXLink runs can fully reach the 100m specification when bundled up to groups of 6+1 Page 6 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

7 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper cables (TIA-568 Alien Crosstalk Bundle), with shielded versions of them providing improved resistance to environmental EMI and ESD events. The benefits of these increasing grades of cable type provide significant improvement in both internal and external channel parameters. Specifically of note are: INTERNAL CHANNEL PARAMETERS Insertion Loss / Max Attenuation: The measure of signal loss that occurs from transmitter to receiver. o Often referred to as the cable bandwidth, typical factors that affect insertion loss include conductor size, insulation and jacket material type, frequency bandwidth, number of patch connections and cable length. Return Loss: The measure of how much signal gets reflected back to the source due to impedance variations in the Channel. o Typical factors that affect Return Loss include variations in twist rates and discontinuities in impedance. Near End Crosstalk (NEXT): The measure of unwanted signal coupling between pairs in the same cable. o Power Sum NEXT (PSNEXT) is the sum of unwanted signal coupling between multiple pairs in the same cable. Equal Level Far End Crosstalk / Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio, Far End (ELFEXT/ACRF): The measurement of unwanted signal coupling between pairs in the same cable when a disturbing signal is sent from one end and received by the transceiver on the opposite end, including attenuation loss due to insertion loss. o Power Sum ELFEXT / Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio, Far End (PSELFEXT/PSACRF) is the sum of unwanted signal coupling between multiple pairs in the same cable when the disturbing signals are sent from one end and received by the transceiver on the opposite end.. o Typical factors in the severity of these internal crosstalk measurements are the cable internal insulation and pair to pair separation. EXTERNAL CHANNEL PARAMETERS Alien Crosstalk is the most significant external parameter that affects signal and channel performance. Both near end and far end crosstalk can detract from robust functionality and specifically includes the Power Sum scenarios described above where multiple cables contribute crosstalk to the channel under evaluation. o Power Sum Alien NEXT (PSANEXT) is the effect of multiple Alien/External cable channels o injecting NEXT on a given cable. Power Sum Alien ELFEXT / Power Sum Alien ACRF (PSAELFEXT/PSAACRF) is the effect of multiple Alien/External cable channels injecting ELFEXT/ACRF on a given cable. Alien Crosstalk can significantly be reduced or mitigated by: o The use of higher grade cables such as Cat6A (UTP and F/UTP) and Cat7 cabling, while some improvements can still be achieved through the use of shielded or foiled Cat5e (F/UTP) and shielded or foiled Cat6 (F/UTP). o Separating the cables from each other for portions or the entire cable run. Page 7 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

8 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper BANDWIDTH PERFORMANCE The published specification minimum requirement for supporting proper functionality is based on a controlled environment with quality cable and meets the horizontal cable specifications at 250 MHz provided in appendix A. The indicator of a cables bandwidth performance is the Insertion Loss specification, also referred to as Max Attenuation. We recommend a cable rating of no more than 35dB of attenuation at 250 MHz over 100m. Source: Note: The bandwidth of the cable alone will not guarantee robust performance in any installation as the overall performance is a factor of the three main categories referenced in this document as Cable Quality, Cable Topology and Environmental Factors. CABLE SHIELDING Utilization of shielded cable can provide improvements in many areas and help insure that the DXLink installation will perform robustly. The use of shielded cable will provide significant improvements in the following areas: It will provide shielding from Alien forms of crosstalk, as covered in the cable type section, which reduce or eliminate noise from adjacent or bundled cables. o This will allow more cables to be bundled together for longer lengths while maintaining robust performance. It will provide a significant improvement in immunity to environmental EMI and ESD events that might be occurring in the area of the DXLink TX, DXLink cable runs, DXLink Enclosure or DXLink RX. o This added immunity will generally eliminate possible video drops due to events of this nature by the virtue of keeping the large area events that are radiated through the air from coupling onto the high-speed DXLink signals and circuitry. Cable end termination techniques for using shielded cable need to be managed correctly for shielded cable benefits to be realized and keep from introducing negative effects. Bonding to ground at both ends of the cable is required. o Bonding throughout the run, including patch panels and patch cables to achieve a true end to end ground connection is necessary. o Providing a low impedance connection at each interconnect is required. This can be achieved by ensuring the entire foil/ground that encompasses the cable makes contact with the shielded connector ends. A 360 degree shielding termination is required, not just grounding the drain wire. o Providing a low impedance connection at the equipment rack ensuring a solid tie between equipment and the rack as well as between rack and the buildings main ground buss bar is needed. Page 8 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

9 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper Shielded or screened cable can reduce the effects of EMI and ESD on DXLink transmission, but they require equal grounding of the screen at both ends of the cable. A difference in ground potential between the termination points of the cable could cause the cable to act as an antenna, virtually negating all benefits hoped to be gained. But with good grounding techniques applied to all components of the DXLink system, including the cable drain wires, lost packets and dropped video can be kept to a minimum. Typical shielded cabling includes: F/UTP: Foil shielding or screening that encompasses the cable while leaving individual pairs unshielded. Previously referred to by TIA as ScTP, Screened or FTP. S/FTP: Foil shielding or screening that encompasses the cable while including additional shielding around each of the four differential pairs. U/FTP: No shielding or screening around the cable, but including individual shielded pairs inside the cable. Source: Page 9 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

10 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper CABLE TOPOLOGY Definitions Bonded: The two wires in each pair of the category cable are joined together. This dramatically improves impedance variations, especially after installation, where bending and twisting the cable tend to make a pair open. Near-end: Cabling at the transmit side (DXLink Tx/MFTx/Wallplate Tx or the DXLink Output Board.) Far-end: Cabling at the receiver side (DXLink Rx or the DXLink Input Board.) CABLE LENGTH DXLink maximum cable length is specified at 100m. Many contributing factors can impact the DXLink signal performance over that length of category cable. Bundled unshielded/shielded cables, conduit density, loops, bends and kinks, and patch cables/couplers are the areas addressed in the following section. These performance related items mainly pertain to unshielded category cables. A standard Ethernet cabling topology of 5m (patch) 90m (Horizontal cabling) 5m (patch) is recommended. Better signal performance can be achieved if the DXLink system cabling does not include patch cords, panels, or couplers which will degrade the signal. BUNDLED CABLING (UNSHIELDED) - Specifications for unshielded category cables Bundling DXLink system cables together has a significant effect on the cable s performance. Figure 1 shows the worst case bundle configuration. The 6 outside cables all radiate noise which is coupled to the inside cable. The longer the distance these outside cables remain adjacent to the inside cable, the larger the noise level will be that is coupled to the inside cable. So the distance for adjacent cables must be controlled. Refer to Figure 2 and 3 for the recommended cable lengths per cables in a bundle. Specifications that apply to UTP category cable bundles: Do not comb out any of the DXLink system cabling run. For improved performance on troublesome runs we recommend providing cable separation of the category cables. Separation is specified at 2.54cm (or 3 cable diameters). Loosely Bundled cables are specified as 2 or more cables deployed in a cable tray with naturally occurring separation and no tie wraps or zip ties used to create tight bundles that contribute to cable cross talk. Avoid tie wraps. If tie wrap use is absolutely necessary, then they should only loosely surround the cables. Cinching the tie wraps around a bundle will deform the cable(s) as well as significantly increase the alien crosstalk negatively affecting performance. Use loose Velcro wraps to bundle cable, only if it is necessary. Maximum conduit fill density will be no more than 40%. Use horizontal wire management techniques. When feasible, leave an unused port between each port containing an DXLink system cable in a large patch panel. This allows more separation between cables. The use of bonded-pair UTP cable is advantageous over non-boned cables, particularly in patch cables that will be occasionally flexed, or stepped on. Page 10 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

11 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper Due to some of the cumbersome installation restrictions required for UTP cables, which will have a significant impact on the signal s performance; we recommend installing shielded category cables. Figure 1 Worst case bundling configuration for alien crosstalk. Source: Figure 2, in conjunction with its table depict the worst case cabling requirements when properly rated Cat5e or Cat6 UTP is used. The distance of the overall cable run is reduced as quantity of cables that are loosely bundled together is increased. Tightly bundled cabling or combing of the cables is not supported in UTP installations. Figure 3, in conjunction with its table depict the ability to achieve a full 100m distance run when using Shielded cables as well as Cat6A Unshielded. In this case, there are no restrictions on the distance or number of cables bundled together up to 100m. Figures 2 and 3 are defined in reference to installations in which the environment has moderate amounts of EMI and ESD. Page 11 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

12 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper Figure 2 - Bundling topology, unshielded cabling Unshielded Cat5e and Cat6 # of Cables bundled together Total length of cable run supported 1 100m 2,3 70m 4,5 50m >=6 30m Figure 2 Table Bundling lengths for unshielded category cables without separation accommodations. Page 12 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

13 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper Figure 3 - Bundling topology, shielded cabling Shielded Cat6, Cat6A* or Cat7 # of Cables bundled together Total length of cable run supported >=1 100m Figure 3 Table Bundling lengths for shielded Cat6, Cat6A* or Cat7 category cables. *Cat6A unshielded cables also follow requirements of Table 3 with no bundling restrictions. BUNDLED CABLING (SHIELDED) - Specifications for shielded category cables Definition: Shield A metallic layer placed around a conductor or group of conductors. These specifications apply to F/UTP, U/FTP, S/FTP category cable bundles: Maximum conduit fill density will be no more than 60%. At all termination points along the shielded cable s path, the foil must make 360 degree contact with the shielded connector s housing (e.g., RJ-45 conductive housing). All patch cords, panels, and couplers must be shielded if used in a shielded cable run. o A low impedance connection must be maintained over the full length of the shielded cable run. Additional care must be taken during installation not to kink the cable which can deform the screen/foil, thereby degrading the cable s performance. Shielded category cables will help reject noise, such as alien crosstalk and in installations where the cable is placed in a high EMI environment. CONDUIT DENSITY Performance will decrease when the conduit is filled beyond the recommended values: Shielded category cable Max conduit fill = 60% Unshielded category cable Max conduit fill = 40% Running DXLink system cabling through conduit is equivalent to the cables being bundled. Conduit sections need to be treated as bundled sections of cabling. Page 13 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

14 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper CABLE LOOPS Service loops are sometimes required as a means to store excess cabling. We do not recommend service loops as they increase the total length of the cable run, and the loop will wrap the cable back on itself which will increase crosstalk. If you must store excess DXLink system cabling do not use a loop, but instead use an S pattern. An S pattern with at least 2.54 cm separation will insure the cabling meets the bundling specifications. BENDS AND KINKS Bend radiuses tighter than the manufacturer s recommendations and kinks (even straightened out kinks) created during installation will have an impact on the cable s performance. Excessive bends or kinks can deform the cable s screen/foil, which will degrade the cable s performance. Excessive bends or kinks can deform the cable, which can alter the cable s pair balance leading to noise immunity performance losses. Kinked cable (even straightened out kinks) might perform adequately for Ethernet applications, but will have a much larger effect on DXLink system cabling. It is our recommendation that any category cables with an excessive bend radius or kinks are treated as a damage cable. Deformed category cables will limit the cable s ability to properly pass a 10 Gb/s signal. Extra care must be taken during the installation of the DXLink system cabling. PATCH SECTION Recommended installation practices: Replace all Cat-5e and Cat-6 patch cords, panels, couplers, and connectors with a Cat6A version. 5 Meters is the maximum recommended length for the patch cables. ENVIRONMENT Environmental factors play an important role in determining the success of a DXLink installation, especially when the cable runs are over 30 meters. Some factors could result in an installation being inoperable if not carefully considered during the project development phase and before the installation. Factors could include: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) of excess static in the category cable jacket or when excess static electricity is discharged by a human hand through one of the DXLink components. Electromagnetic interference (EMI) generated by proximity electrostatic discharges, or by operating electrical motors. AC Power and grounding techniques. Ambient operating conditions surrounding the system installation. Note: The first 2 factors, EMI and ESD, can be greatly reduced through the use of well balanced, shielded cables with grounded connectors, and keeping the cable runs as short as possible. Page 14 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

15 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) ESD is a type of EMI, but in this paper we are treating indirect ESD and direct ESD events separately. Direct ESD events refer to any electrostatic discharge that takes place directly to the DXLink system, where the system includes all components: DXLink receivers and transmitters, cables, and racks. ESD is defined as the transfer of excess electrons (charge) from one surface at some electrical potential to another surface at a different potential. The most common method of generating a charge is when different materials are rubbed against each other, transferring electrons; this is known as triboelectric generation. An example of triboelectric generation occurs when a person walks across a carpeted floor wearing shoes with soles made of a different material than the carpet. An example of the voltage potential created by various activities under two ranges of relative humidity is provided in the following table by the Electrostatic Discharge Association, North Central Regional Tutorial Program ( Examples of Static Generation Typical Voltage Levels Means of Generation 10-25% RH 65-90% RH Walking across carpet 35,000V 1,500V Walking across vinyl tile 12,000V 250V Worker at bench 6,000V 100V Poly bag picked up from bench 20,000V 1,200V Chair with urethane foam 18,000V 1,500V As this table indicates, the relative humidity of the air surrounding the activity can affect the amount of potential; the drier the air the greater the potential. Note that the materials indicated in this table have insulative properties, meaning they do not permit the flow of electrons. The potential on insulative materials can exist for a long time if not placed in contact with a material having a different potential. When a material with high potential created during these activities contacts a material that has very low potential, such as when a person walking across a carpeted floor touches a metal door knob, the potential is rapidly dissipated causing an electromagnetic pulse and possibly the familiar spark (shock!). This occurs regularly during the installation of a DXLink system: Triboelectric generation of potential on cable outer jackets when they are installed may be dissipated when the jacket comes in contact with a metal surface, such as a cable raceway. Potential on the cable jackets may also be dissipated when the cable s terminated ends are connected to the DXLink receivers/transmitters. An installer touches the metal frame of an DXLink system component, dissipating any charge built up while walking across the floor. When a potential is dissipated directly to the system, the path it takes varies so it is difficult to predict exactly what effect it will have on the DXLink transmission. AMX has conducted experiments which show static discharges with voltage potential of ±3.5kV and greater applied directly to system components cause sufficient disruption to the transmission that result in momentary lost video. This is probably due in part to EMI (discussed below) and to propagation of the voltage throughout the component being discharged to. Note: AMX equipment used in DXLink installations is protected against damage from ESD events. Page 15 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

16 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) Of the many forms of EMI, the greatest disruption to a DXLink installation is generated by 1) Electrical motors 2) Proximity ESD events and 3) Alien crosstalk from adjacent cables. The third form is covered in another section of this paper and will not be discussed here. ELECTRICAL MOTORS The second form, EMI generated by electrical motors operating in proximity to a DXLink system cable run, is greatly reduced by the use of twisted wire pairs provided the twisted pairs are well balanced. However, EMI transients generated when cycling power to the motor could propagate quickly through unshielded cable located nearby causing momentary loss of data, ultimately resulting in loss of video and/or audio. The good news here is these EMI sources have fixed locations and their operation is well understood; avoid placement of DXLink system cable runs close to large motors (e.g. heat pumps) and keep the runs perpendicular to power line cables. PROXIMITY ESD EVENTS Proximity ESD events are severe EMI occurrences produced when static electricity is discharged close to an DXLink system cable run no direct contact with the cable is made, but the resulting electrostatic field can induce voltages in the category cable and cause momentary interference with transmission of the DXLink stream. In a typical Ethernet installation lost packets are simply retransmitted, but in an DXLink installation the lost packets are perceived by the user as dropped video or audio. In the real world, certain DXLink installations can be prone to the effects of proximity ESD events; examples are casinos where electrostatic air cleaners are used, and carpeted conference centers. AMX has conducted testing to empirically quantify the effect of real-world ESD events on transmission of DXLink data: the test configuration is shown in Figure 4. In this testing a Schaffner ESD generator was used to apply controlled static discharges to various locations around the DXLink switcher, and to locations connected to ground along the length of the cable run. Various cable types (shielded, unshielded, Cat5e, Cat6) and cable configurations (straight one-way run, straight two-way run, loosely coiled, with and without patch cables) were tested using discharge voltages between +/-2kV and +/-8kV. Results from this testing showed that discharge voltages as low as 4kV at a distance of ~4 meters from the cable run were responsible for causing video to drop. Figure 4 - Proximity ESD Event Test Diagram Page 16 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

17 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper Conclusions from this testing are that DXLink system susceptibility to EMI generated by proximity ESD events is related to the length of the cable run (shorter runs are less susceptible), the distance from the event to the cable, and the type of cable (properly connected shielded cable is least susceptible). AC POWER, GROUNDING Transmission of DXLink data over twisted pair copper wire (differential mode) requires well balanced terminations at both ends of the twisted pair to minimize the effects of the common mode hostile sources described above. Obtaining perfect balance becomes increasingly difficult as the length of the cable increases, making the cable less immune to EMI and ESD sources. Shielded or screened cable can reduce the effects of EMI and ESD on DXLink transmission, but they require equal grounding of the screen at both ends of the cable. A difference in ground potential between the termination points of the cable could cause the cable to act as an antenna, virtually negating all benefits hoped to be gained ( But with good grounding techniques applied to all components of the DXLink system, including the cable drain wires, lost packets and dropped video can be kept to a minimum. Siemon has provided an informative discussion of the benefits of shielded cable: DXLink signals can be carried over long distances; equipment connected to AC power at one end of the system may not be at the same ground potential as equipment at the other end of the system if guidelines provided by NEC (National Electrical Code) and TIA-607 (Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises) are not followed. AMBIENT OPERATING CONDITIONS Temperature - Cable manufacturers specify their cables in different ways, but most will provide specifications for both installation temperature and operating temperature. To minimize damage to the cables, these specifications should be well understood before attempting to install a DXLink system cable run. Humidity - As was demonstrated above, relative humidity has a distinct effect on the voltage generated during an ESD event which in turn can have an effect on the quality of the transmitted DXLink signal when the event occurs in proximity to an unshielded cable. CONCLUSION DXLink products can provide a wealth of features and benefits for your installation. Ensuring a quality transmission medium for distribution of signals will allow for a successful and robust solution. For more information on DXLink products, contact your AMX Representative or visit Page 17 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

18 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper APPENDIX A Minimum performance cable requirements for Cat5e Maximum horizontal cable insertion loss, length of 100m Freq (MHz) Cable (db) Minimum horizontal cable return loss Freq (MHz) Cable (db) Minimum horizontal cable NEXT loss Freq (MHz) Cable (db) Minimum horizontal cable PSNEXT loss Freq (MHz) Cable (db) Minimum horizontal cable ACRF / ELFEXT Freq (MHz) Cable (db) Minimum horizontal cable PSACRF / PSELFEXT Freq (MHz) Cable (db) For all other cable types the corresponding TIA-568-C.2 specification must be met. Page 18 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

19 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper APPENDIX B Enova DGX Link Quality Reporting Link quality measurements can be reported by the Enova DGX DXLink Input and Output boards to help determine the quality of the link established and potentially identify cable runs that could incur performance issues. Link Quality Reporting over local Input/Output board debug ports By using USB or Serial to TTL debug cables on the DXLink Input or Output boards the Mean Square Error (MSE) information can be captured and evaluated. Please contact AMX technical support to provide documentation on accessing this information if required. Once communication to the debug ports is established the following commands can be sent through the debug cable to provide the following reporting. 1. The command to get the Valens HDBaseT information is as follows: a. Press h followed by the channel number (1,2,3,4) to enter the Target VS100 Sub- Menu. b. Press i to display the HDBaseT info. c. The command is the same on both the DXLink input and output boards. d. The MSE (Mean Square Error) value is included in this information and highlighted below. The raw values for all 4 twisted pairs are displayed with the db values below. Press x to exit the menu. e. Below is a sample of the input board information that will follow the command: Valens VS100 Information on channel 1 ******************************************************************** FW Version: FW Bld Date: FW Type: HDBaseT Receiver HW Type: HDBaseT Receiver Link Status: HDBaseT ON HDMI Status: HDMI Detected (no HDCP) Video BER: 10^(-10) Audio BER: 10^(-10) Blank BER: 10^(-10) Ctrl BER: 10^(-10) Cable Len: 0 (Meters) 0 (Feet) Qual Ind (MSE) Applicable To VS100Rx Only: rawval:0x Chan A:-22db Chan B:-22db Chan C:-23db Chan D:-22db Cable Term Ind: <command not supported or failed (0x62)> DSP RST Cnt: 1 Page 19 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

20 C ABLING FOR SUCCESS WITH DXLINK White Paper Remote VS100 Info FW Version: FW Bld Date: FW Type: HDBaseT Transmitter HW Type: HDBaseT Transmitter Link Status: HDBaseT ON HDMI Status: HDMI Detected (no HDCP) Total BER: 10^(-10) Cable Len: 0 (Meters) 0 (Feet) Qual Ind (MSE) Applicable To VS100Rx Only: rawval:0x Chan A:-0db Chan B:-0db Chan C:-0db Chan D:-0db Cable Term Ind: <command not supported or failed (0x62)> DSP RST Cnt: 1 5v/HPD Stat: RxSense ON 5v Detect TRUE Bypass HPD ON Current HPD ON ******************************************************************** Link Quality Reporting over Enova DGX Serial or USB Port A future firmware release will allow access to the individual input & output board s serial debug data from the CPU s Serial or USB port, which will alleviate the need for a cable connection directly to the Input or Output board(s) debug port. This feature will allow the installer/end-user to gain access to information like comprehensive A/V signal parameters, link quality measurements, board status, and streaming diagnostics data. Page 20 AMX White Paper Cabling for Success with DXLink TM V

21 DATA SHEET TM DXLink AVB-RX-DXLINK-HDMI (FG ) HDMI Receiver Module Overview The DXLink HDMI Receiver features built-in SmartScale Technology to deliver HDMI with HDCP that is perfectly scaled for each connected display automatically, eliminating the integration challenges that can occur when sources and displays have different optimal resolutions. It accepts audio, video, control and Ethernet over one standard twisted pair cable up to 100 meters away from a compatible Enova DVX All-In-One Presentation Switcher or DXLink Transmitter Module; it accepts all this plus power over the same twisted pair cable when used in conjunction with the Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switchers, Enova DVX-2150HD or DVX-2155HD. Mount the low-profile DXLink Receiver behind a display or above a ceiling mounted projector and control it using the built in RS-232 or IR ports. Plus monitor the connected display's settings, and send IR control signals back to the head end using the same twisted pair cable. Common Applications The DXLink HDMI Receiver Module receives HDMI and control signals from a remote DXLink Transmitter, Enova DGX or compatible Enova DVX. The receivers built-in control ports can be used to control a destination device and the ICS Lan port provides IP an access point with used in conjunction with the Enova DGX or compatible Enova DVX. Features Only One Cable Receive audio and video while passing control Ethernet and power over one twisted pair cable SmartScale Technology Automatically responds to the display's declared EDID information and scales the video to the best resolution and video parameters for that display without manual setup; this prevents inferior video quality when sources are forced to lower resolutions to support the least capable display in the system Native NetLinx Control Everywhere - Control connected destination devices using the built-in IR and RS-232 ports Standard Twisted Pair Cable Save time and effort in installation by leveraging cost effective twisted pair cable, see the Cabling for Success with DXLink white paper for more details HDCP Compliant 2012 AMX. All rights reserved.

22 Dealer Benefits HDMI/HDCP with the Simplicity of Analog - Hassle-free plug-and-play operation eliminates the need for time consuming, cumbersome work-around tools to deal with HDCP key constraints and resolution incompatibilities Exceed Video Quality Expectations - Integrated SmartScale Technology in the receiver automatically scales the video, ensuring the highest resolution possible to each display Simplified Design and Installation - Audio, video, control, Ethernet and power are distributed over one twisted pair cable speeding up installation at remote endpoints Customer Benefits Picture Perfect - Prevents degraded video due to incompatibilities between different display resolutions by scaling the video to match each display's preferred resolution using innovative SmartScale Technology Interruption Free Content - Exclusive InstaGate Pro Technology allows audio and video to be switched quickly and easily to every connected display without the difficulties typically associated with HDCP Audio, Video and Control Everywhere - Compact low profile design and remote powering capabilities allows the receiver to be installed in discreet locations out of sight without additional wiring Additional Features Built-in Control Ports - Control the display using the built-in IR or RS-232 control ports Low Profile Design - Easily mount behind a display or above a ceiling mounted projector IR Receiver - Send IR commands back to the Enova DGX or compatible Enova DVX to control source equipment using an IR remote Power Remotely - Power is carried over one twisted pair to simplify installation when used with the Enova DGX or compatible Enova DVX 3D Support* - Pass through latest video formats including 3D and Deep Color Ethernet Connectivity - Provides ICSLan Ethernet support at the Receiver - add Ethernet connectivity to a Touch Panel, plug in a WAP or stream IP audio/video to a Ethernet enabled display *This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update Specifications GENERAL Dimensions (HWD) Weight AC Power DXLink Power 1 x 8 3/4 x 5 1/5 (2.54 x cm x cm) Approx. 1.1 lb (0.50 kg) Shipping Weight: Approx lb (1.00 kg) VAC single phase, Hz VAC max RX unit can alternatively have power supplied over twisted pair cable when connected to DXLink Power sourcing device such as an Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher DXLink Twisted Pair Output Board or Enova DVX-2150HD or DVX-2155HD All-In-One Presentation Switcher. When using in conjunction with Enova DGX use the Enova DGX Configuration Tool located at AMX.com/enova to determine the power requirements of a configuration and whether any of the DXLink Transmitters or Receivers should be

23 Power Consumption (Max) Power Connector Mounting Options Advanced Configuration Interface* Transport Layer Throughput (Max) Compatible AMX Products Twisted Pair Cable Type Twisted Pair Cable Length MTBF Approvals Included Accessories Optional Accessories powered with the local power supply. The configuration tool contains instructions on how to determine power requirements Local 12V supplied: 18 W DXLink power supplied via Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher DXLink Twisted Pair Output Board or Enova DVX-2150HD or DVX-2155HD All-In-One Presentation Switcher: 15 W 2.1 mm DC Power Jack Compatible with all V Style versatile mounting options including rack, surface or pole USB Mini-B Connector 10.2 Gbps DXLink HDMI RX DXLink Multi-Format TX Module Enova DGX 16 / 32 Digital Media Switchers, Enova DVX-3155HD, DVX-2155HD, DVX-3150HD and DVX-2150HD All-In-One Presentation Switchers Cat5e, Cat6/6e, Cat6A, Cat7 of UTP, SF/UTP, S/FTP, and F/UTP varieties ** Up to 328 ft (100 m)** 381,000 hours CE, FCC, UL, cul, RoHS / WEEE Compliant Each HDMI RX ships with a desktop power supply (ENERGY STAR qualified) with power cord AVB-VSTYLE-SURFACE-MNT, V Style Module Surface Mount (FG ) AVB-VSTYLE-RMK-1U, V Style Module Tray (FG ) AVB-VSTYLE-RMK-FILL-1U, V Style Module Tray w/fill Plates (FG ) AVB-VSTYLE-POLE-MNT, V Style Module Pole Mount (FG ) CC-NIRC, NetLinx IR Emitter Cable (FG ) IR03, External IR Receiver Module (FG-IR03) ** Cable runs with a minimum specification of ANSI/TIE/EIA 568A-5 and ratings of 250MHz or better may be used with DXLink equipment. However, cable run topology and environmental influences can affect the overall successful distance capabilities of these runs. For successful deployments up to 100 meters without consideration to outside variables, AMX recommends the use of shielded category cable (STP) or Cat6A (or better) versions of unshielded or shielded twisted pair (UTP/STP) for DXLink runs. For more details and helpful cabling information, please contact your AMX representative for a copy of the white paper titled Cabling for Success with DXLink ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature (Operating) 32 to 104 F (0 to 40 C) Temperature (Storage) -22 to 158 F (-30 to 70 C) Humidity (Operating) Humidity (Storage) Power Dissipation (Max) 5% to 85% RH (non-condensing) 0% to 90% RH (non-condensing) Local 12V supplied: 61 BTU/hr DXLink power supplied via Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher DXLink Twisted Pair Output Board or Enova DVX-2150HD or DVX-2155HD All-In-One

24 Presentation Switcher: 51 BTU/hr FRONT CONNECTORS Advanced Configuration Interface* USB Mini-B Connector BACK CONNECTORS Local Power DXLink Input 2.1 mm DC Power Jack ICS LAN/Ethernet Port RJ-45 Connector, TCP/IP Port (ICS LAN 10/100) Serial 3.5mm Pluggable Phoenix Terminal Block Bidirectional RS-232 Standard NetLinx Baudrate k Parity support Odd/Even/None IR Control Port for use with IR03 Receiver (Optional Accessory FG-IR03) Port for use with CC-NIRC Emitter (Optional Accessory FG ) USB (HID) Keyboard & Mouse* HDMI Output Analog Stereo Output RJ-45 USB Type B Connector HDMI Type A Female 3.5mm Mini-Stereo Jack CONTROLS & INDICATORS Power Indicator Video Indicator Audio Indicator Scaling Button and LEDs IR TX Indicator IR RX Indicator RS-232 TX Indicator RS-232 RX Indicator LINK/ACT Status Green indicates whether or not the module is powered on Green LED indicates the presence of video and audio signals through the module Green LED indicates the presence of audio signals through the module 1 push button and 3 green LEDs; use Scaling button to select one of the 3 Scaling options: Bypass, Auto (SmartScale), or Manual. The factory default is Auto (SmartScale). If the RX power cycles, it defaults to the last persisted mode (achieved by pressing scaling button and holding it until the desired scaling mode LED flashes) Red LED lights during the transmission of IR data via the rear IR port Yellow LED lights during the receipt of IR data via the rear IR port Red LED shows serial transmit (TX) data activity Yellow LED shows serial receive (RX) data activity Green LED lights when the Ethernet cable is connected and an active link is established. This LED also blinks when receiving Ethernet data packets Green LED lights when the Controller is programmed

25 CEC Indicator USB Indicator ID Pushbutton and communicating properly Not currently supported Not currently supported Places system in NetLinx Device ID assignment mode HDMI Compatible Formats Signal Type Support Input Signal Type Output Signal Type Output Connector Output Scaling HDMI, HDCP, DVI HDMI DVI-D (Single Link with HDMI Cable Adapter) DXLink from any of the following: DXLink HDMI Transmitter Module, DXLink Multi-Format Transmitter Module, Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Output Board, Enova DVX-3155HD, DVX-2155HD, DVX-3150HD and DVX-2150HD All-In-One Presentation Switchers HDMI DVI-D (Single Link with Cable Adapter) HDMI Type A Female SmartScale or Manual Configuration or bypass SmartScale Output Resolution Support All resolutions between 480p and 1920 x 60 Output Nominal Voltage Output Re-clocking Hz via automatic SmartScale query of the display's declared EDID Detailed Timing Definition 1.0 Vpp Differential +5V DDC Pin Output 50 ma when using Enova DXLink Power, 500 ma when Yes using local 12V supply +5V USB Output 150 ma when using Enova DXLink Power, 500 ma when using local 12V supply Output Rise Time / Fall Time 425 ps typ (20% - 80%) Propagation Delay (Typ) 25 ms when scaling, 5 us when in bypass mode HDMI Audio Synchronization Data Rate (Max) Video 60Hz frame rate: Audio is actively delayed to match video within 9 ms leading to 10 ms lagging when scaling. When in bypass mode the audio is matched to video within 1 ms Gbps / 6.75 Gbps 6.75 Gbps supported when the DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Pixel Clock (Max) Progressive Resolution Support 165 MHz / 225 MHz 255 MHz supported when the DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less 480p up to 60 Hz (including but not limited to those resolutions shown on Digital Video Resolution Support Appendix) If input is interlaced, the scaled output will deinterlace video to a progressive resolution format. If in scaler

26 Deep Color Support* Bypass mode interlaced input will pass through unaltered 24-bit, 30-bit^, 36-bit^ 30-bit and 36-bit supported when the DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Color Space Support RGB: 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4: and 4:2:2 3D Format Support* Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4 Yes (HDMI Primary Formats) Frame Packing 1080p up to 24Hz Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60Hz Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60Hz Top-Bottom 1080p up to 24Hz Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60Hz Side-by-Side Half 1080p up to 50/60Hz Side-by-Side Half 720p up to 50/60Hz 3D supported when the DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Audio Format Support Audio Resolution Audio Sample Rate Local Audio Support HDCP Support CEC Support Dolby TrueHD*, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio*, DTS, 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48kHz, 5.1 channels 16 bit to 24 bit 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192kHz Yes for audio extraction Yes None STEREO AUDIO Output Signal Types Analog Output Level (Max) Analog Output Frequency Response Analog Audio Output THD+N Analog Audio Out SNR Digital to Analog Reference Level Audio Synchronization Output Connectors *This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update Stereo Analog +2 dbu, unbalanced < +0 db to -0.5 db, 20 Hz to 20 khz <0.03 %, 1 khz, -10dBu to +2 dbu >85 db, 20 Hz to 20 khz Vin=+2dBu 0 dbfs = +0 dbu Video 60Hz frame rate: Audio is actively delayed to match video within 9 ms leading to 10 ms lagging when scaling. When in bypass mode the audio is matched to video within 1 ms 3.5mm Mini-Stereo Jack (Analog Stereo)

27 DIGITAL VIDEO RESOLUTION SUPPORT APPENDIX CEA(RGBHV): CVR (RGBHV): CVT (RGBHV): DMR(RGBHV): DMT(RGBHV):

28 About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 23-Aug-12. AMX.com fax

29 DATA SHEET TM DXLink AVB-TX-MULTI-DXLINK (FG ) Multi-Format Transmitter Module Overview The DXLink Multi-Format Transmitter sends analog and digital audio and video signals including HDMI with HDCP, control, and Ethernet up to 100 meters over one standard twisted pair cable. The DXLink Transmitter can also be used as a point-topoint solution with a DXLink HDMI Receiver. The DXLink Transmitter can be powered from any DXLink power source such as the Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board or the Enova DVX-3155HD or DVX-2155HD, and it also includes a local power supply for point-to-point use with a stand-alone receiver. The transmitter features both a multi-format analog port to support legacy devices and an HDMI port to support newer digital devices. COMMON APPLICATIONS The DXLink Multi-Format Transmitter sends analog or digital video, audio and control to a remote display across the room, on the other side of the house or to a classroom down the hall. The transmitter's built-in control ports can be used to control a source and the ICSLan port provides an IP access point. FEATURES Only One Cable Send audio and video while passing control, Ethernet, USB signals and power Native NetLinx Control Everywhere Control connected source and display devices using the built-in IR and RS232 ports Send HDMI signals up to 100 meters Extend the reach of the HDMI signals far beyond the capabilities of typical HDMI cabling Multi-Format Analog Port and HDMI Port Supports legacy analog signals - RGBHV, Component, S-video, and Composite, and digital HDMI/HDCP, DisplayPort and DVI signals Standard Twisted Pair Cable Save time and effort in installation by leveraging pre-existing cost effective twisted pair cable, see the Cabling for Success with DXLink white paper for more details DEALER BENEFITS HDMI/HDCP with the Simplicity of Analog - Hassle-free plug-and-play operation eliminates the need for time consuming, cumbersome work-around tools to deal with HDCP key constraints and resolution incompatibilities Simplified Design and Installation - Audio, video, control, Ethernet and power are distributed over one twisted pair cable speeding up installation at remote endpoints 2012 AMX. All rights reserved.

30 Reduce Network Drops - Centralized Ethernet communication from the Enova DGX can be implemented with the ICSLan port - providing IP access points at every DXLink Transmitter and Receiver CUSTOMER BENEFITS Interruption-Free Content - Exclusive InstaGate Pro Technology allows audio and video to be switched quickly and easily to every connected display without the difficulties typically associated with HDCP Audio, Video and Control Everywhere - Compact low-profile design and remote powering capabilities allows the transmitter to be installed in discreet locations out of sight without additional wiring ADDITIONAL FEATURES Powered Remotely - Power is carried over one twisted pair cable to simplify installation when used with a Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher, Enova DVX-3155HD or Enova DVX-2155HD 3D Support* - Pass through latest video formats including 3D and Deep Color Surround Sound Support - Pass through high definition surround sound including Dolby Digital, DTS and up to 8-channel L-PCM at 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192kHz Ethernet Connectivity - Provides ICSLan Ethernet support at the Transmitter - add Ethernet connectivity to a Touch Panel, plug in a WAP or stream IP audio/video to a Ethernet enabled source device HDCP compliant * This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL Dimensions (HWD) Weight AC Power DXLink Power 1 x 8 3/4 x 5 1/5 (2.54 x cm x cm) Approx. 1.1 lb (0.50 kg) Shipping Weight: Approx lb (1.00 kg) VAC single phase, Hz VAC max TX unit can alternatively have power supplied over twisted pair cable when connected to a DXLink Power sourcing device such as an Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher, Enova DVX-3155HD or DVX-2155HD All-In-One Presentation Switcher Power Consumption (Max) Power Connector Mounting Options When using in conjunction with the Enova DGX use the Enova DGX Power Calculator located at AMX.com/enova to determine the power requirements of a configuration and whether any of the DXLink Transmitters or Receivers should be powered with the local power supply. The calculator contains instructions on how to use the tool. Local 12V supplied: 10 W DXLink power supplied via Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board or Enova DVX-3155HD or DVX-2155HD All-In-One Presentation Switcher: 10 W 2.1 mm DC Power Jack (for optional local DC power) Compatible with all V Style versatile mounting options

31 Advanced Configuration Interface* Transport Layer Throughput (Max) including rack, surface or pole USB Mini-B Connector 10.2 Gbps Compatible AMX Products DXLink HDMI RX, Enova DGX 16 and Enova DGX 32 Twisted Pair Cable Type Twisted Pair Cable Length MTBF Approvals Digital Media Switchers, Enova DVX-3155HD and Enova DVX-2155HD All-In-One Presentation Switchers Cat5e, Cat6/6e, Cat6A, Cat7 of UTP, SF/UTP, S/FTP, and F/UTP varieties ** Up to 328 ft (100 m)** 381,000 hours CE, FCC, UL, cul, RoHS / WEEE Compliant * This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update **Cable runs with a minimum specification of ANSI/TIE/EIA 568A-5 and ratings of 250MHz or better may be used with DXLink equipment. However, cable run topology and environmental influences can affect the overall successful distance capabilities of these runs. For successful deployments up to 100 meters without consideration to outside variables, AMX recommends the use of shielded category cable (STP) or Cat6A (or better) versions of unshielded or shielded twisted pair (UTP/STP) for DXLink runs. For more details and helpful cabling information, please contact your AMX representative for a copy of the white paper titled Cabling for Success with DXLink. ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature (Operating) 32 to 104 F (0 to 40 C) Temperature (Storage) -22 to 158 F (-30 to 70 C) Humidity (Operating) 5% to 85% RH (non-condensing) Humidity (Storage) 0% to 90% RH (non-condensing) Power Dissipation (Max) Local 12V supplied: 34 BTU/HR DXLink power supplied via Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board or Enova DVX-3155HD or DVX-2155HD All-In-One Presentation Switcher: 34 BTU/HR FRONT CONNECTORS Advanced Configuration Interface* * This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update USB Mini-B Connector BACK CONNECTORS Video Input HDMI Input Analog Stereo Input S/PDIF Digital Audio Input HD-15 (RGBHV, RGBs, RGsB, Y/Pb/Pr, Y/c / S-Video, composite (breakout cable is required for non RGBHV formats) HDMI Type A Female 3.5mm Mini-Stereo Jack RCA Jack ICS LAN/Ethernet Port RJ-45 Connector, TCP/IP Port (ICS LAN 10/100) Serial 3.5mm Pluggable Phoenix Terminal Block Bidirectional RS-232 Standard NetLinx Baudrate k Parity support Odd/Even/None IR RX IR TX 3.5mm Mini-Stereo Jack Port for IR03 Receiver (Optional) 3.5mm Pluggable Phoenix Terminal Block

32 USB (HID) Keyboard & Mouse* DXLink Output Local Power * This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update Port for IR01 Emitter (Optional) USB Type B Connector RJ mm DC Power Jack CONTROLS & INDICATORS ID Pushbutton Power Indicator Digital Video Indicator Audio Indicator Analog Video Indicator IR TX Indicator IR RX Indicator RS-232 TX Indicator RS-232 RX Indicator LINK/ACT Status CEC Indicator USB Indicator Places system in NetLinx Device ID assignment mode Green indicates whether or not the module is powered on Green LED indicates the presence of video signals through the module Green LED indicates the presence of audio signals through the module 3 Green LEDs, 1 lights to indicate the presence of the type of analog video through the Multi-Format TX (composite, Y/c; Y/Pb/Pr or RGB; RGBHV or RGBS) Red LED lights during the transmission of IR data via the rear IR port Yellow LED lights during the receipt of IR data via the rear IR port Red LED shows serial transmit (TX) data activity Yellow LED shows serial receive (RX) data activity Green LED lights when the Ethernet cable is connected and an active link is established. This LED also blinks when receiving Ethernet data packets Green LED lights when the Controller is programmed and communicating properly Not currently supported Not currently supported HDMI Compatible Formats Input Signal Type Input Connector Propagation Delay (Typ) Input Voltage (Nominal) Input Re-clocking (CDR) Input Equalization Data Rate (Max) Pixel Clock (Max) HDMI, HDCP, DVI HDMI DVI-D (Single Link With Cable Adapter) DisplayPort ++ (Input Only, With HDMI Cable Adapter) HDMI Type A Female 5 us 1.0 Vpp Differential Yes Yes, Adaptive 4.95 Gbps / 6.75 Gbps 6.75 Gbps supported when the HDMI DXLink RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less 165 MHz / 225 MHz

33 Progressive Resolution Support Interlaced Resolution Support 225 MHz supported when the HDMI DXLink RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less 480p up to 60 Hz (including but not limited to those resolutions shown on Digital Video Resolution Support Appendix) 480i, 576i, 1080i (including but not limited to those resolutions shown on Digital Video Resolution Support Appendix) Note-Reminder: Interlace video supported into the Transmitter, progressive only supported out of the Receiver unless in non-scaling Bypass Deep Color Support* 24-bit, 30-bit, 36-bit 30-bit and 36-bit supported when the HDMI DXLink RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Color Space Support RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2 (Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4) 3D Format Support* Audio Format Support Audio Resolution Audio Sample Rate Local Audio Support HDCP Support Yes (HDMI Primary Formats) Frame Packing 1080p up to 24Hz Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60Hz Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60Hz Top-Bottom 1080p up to 24Hz Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60Hz Side-by-Side Half 1080p up to 50/60Hz Side-by-Side Half 720p up to 50/60Hz 3D supported when the HDMI DXLink RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Dolby TrueHD*, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio*, DTS, 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48kHz, 5.1 channels 16 bit to 24 bit 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192kHz Yes for audio insertion Yes Supports AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro Technology When used with an AMX Digital Media Switcher the key support is up to 16 sinks per output, independent of source device CEC Support DDC/EDID Support When used as a single point-to-point solution the key support is defined by the source device None EDID in point-to-point mode is passed up from the sink Device

34 When used with Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher the EDID is read from the switcher and presented to the source through the TX on the digital HDMI connector only, See the Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board specifications for the specific EDID list The digital video input (HDMI) EDID is user re programmable via the switcher * This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update The analog video input EDID is fixed ANALOG VIDEO Compatible Formats Progressive Resolution Support Interlaced Resolution Support Auto-Adjust Input RGB Input Signal Level Range RGB Input Impedance HV Sync Input Signal Level Range HV Sync Input Impedance Digital Processing Y/Pb/Pr Input Signal Level Range Y/Pb/Pr Input Impedance Y/c (S-Video) Input Signal Level Range Y/c (S-Video) Input Impedance C (Composite) Input Signal Level Range C (Composite) Input Impedance Input Connector RGBHV, RGBs, RGsB YPbPr (HDTV) Y/c (S-Video), C (Composite) 480p up to 60 Hz Interlaced Resolution Support:480i, 576i, 1080i Interlace video supported into the Transmitter, progressive only supported out of the Receiver unless in scaler Bypass mode Supported 1 Vpp nominal 75 Ω 2 to 5 Vpp 2.5 pf Typ, 10 pf Max 24 bit, 165 MHz 1.0 Vpp for Y, 700 mvpp for Pb Pr 75 Ω 1.0 Vpp for Y, 300 mvpp for c 75 Ω 1.0 Vpp 75 Ω HD-15 (Breakout cable required for non RGBHV formats) AUDIO (ANALOG & DIGITAL S/PDIF) Input Signal Types Analog Input Level (Max) Analog Input Impedance Analog to Digital Conversion S/PDIF Audio Format Support Stereo Analog, S/PDIF Video signal must be present to pass Audio +2 dbu, unbalanced 10k Ω 48 khz Sample Rate, 24-bit Dolby Digital, DTS, 2 CH L-PCM Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48kHz, 5.1

35 S/PDIF Resolution S/PDIF Sample Rate S/PDIF Input Signal Level Range S/PDIF Input Impedance Analog to Digital Reference Level Input Connectors channels 16 to 24 bit 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz 200 mvpp to 600mVpp terminated 75 Ω +2.5 dbu = 0 dbfs 3.5mm Mini-Stereo Jack (Analog Stereo) RCA Jack (S/PDIF) DIGITAL VIDEO RESOLUTION SUPPORT APPENDIX CEA(RGBHV): 640x480p@59Hz, 720x480p@59Hz, 720(1440)x480i@59Hz, 720x480p@60Hz, 720x480p@119Hz, 720x480p@120Hz, 720x480p@239Hz, 720x480p@240Hz, 720x576p@50Hz, 720(1440)x576i@50Hz, 720x576p@100Hz, 720x576p@200Hz, 768x576p@50Hz, 960x576p@50Hz, 960(1920)x576i@50Hz, 1280x720p@23Hz, 1280x720p@24Hz, 1280x720p@25Hz, 1280x720p@29Hz, 1280x720p@30Hz, 1280x720p@50Hz, 1280x720p@59Hz, 1280x720p@60Hz, 1280x720p@100Hz, 1280x720p@119Hz, 1280x720p@120Hz, 1920x1080p@23Hz, 1920x1080p@24Hz, 1920x1080i@25Hz, 1920x1080p@25Hz, 1920x1080i@29Hz, 1920x1080p@29Hz, 1920x1080i@30Hz, 1920x1080p@30Hz, 1920x1080p@50Hz, 1920x1080p@59Hz, 1920x1080p@60Hz CVR (RGBHV): 768x480p@60Hz, 800x600p@60Hz, 800x600p@120Hz, 848x480p@60Hz, 960x600p@60Hz, 1024x576p@60Hz, 1024x640p@60Hz, 1024x768p@60Hz, 1024x768p@120Hz, 1064x600p@60Hz, 1152x720p@60Hz, 1152x864p@60Hz, 1224x768p@60Hz, 1280x720p@60Hz, 1280x768p@60Hz, 1280x768p@120Hz, 1280x800p@120Hz, 1280x960p@60Hz, 1280x1024p@60Hz, 1360x768p@60Hz, 1360x768p@120Hz, 1400x1050p@60Hz, 1440x900p@60Hz, 1536x960p@60Hz, 1600x1000p@60Hz, 1600x1200p@60Hz, 1680x1050p@60Hz, 1704x960p@60Hz, 1728x1080p@60Hz, 1800x1350p@60Hz, 1864x1050p@60Hz, 1920x1080p@60Hz, 1920x1200p@60Hz CVT (RGBHV): 640x360p@85Hz, 640x400p@75Hz, 640x400p@85Hz, 640x480p@75Hz, 640x480p@85Hz, 768x480p@60Hz, 768x480p@75Hz, 768x480p@85Hz, 800x600p@50Hz, 800x600p@60Hz, 800x600p@75Hz, 800x600p@85Hz, 848x480p@50Hz, 848x480p@60Hz, 848x480p@75Hz, 848x480p@85Hz, 960x600p@50Hz, 960x600p@60Hz, 960x600p@75Hz, 960x600p@85Hz, 1024x576p@50Hz, 1024x576p@60Hz, 1024x576p@75Hz, 1024x576p@85Hz, 1024x640p@50Hz, 1024x640p@60Hz, 1024x640p@75Hz, 1024x640p@85Hz, 1024x768p@50Hz, 1024x768p@60Hz, 1024x768p@75Hz, 1024x768p@85Hz, 1064x600p@50Hz, 1064x600p@60Hz, 1064x600p@75Hz, 1064x600p@85Hz, 1152x720p@50Hz, 1152x720p@60Hz, 1152x720p@75Hz, 1152x720p@85Hz, 1152x864p@60Hz, 1224x768p@50Hz, 1224x768p@60Hz, 1224x768p@75Hz, 1224x768p@85Hz, 1280x720p@50Hz, 1280x720p@60Hz, 1280x720p@75Hz, 1280x720p@85Hz, 1280x768p@50Hz, 1280x768p@60Hz, 1280x768p@75Hz, 1280x768p@85Hz, 1280x800p@50Hz, 1280x800p@75Hz, 1280x800p@85Hz, 1280x960p@50Hz, 1280x960p@60Hz, 1280x960p@75Hz, 1280x960p@85Hz, 1280x1024p@50Hz, 1280x1024p@60Hz, 1280x1024p@75Hz, 1280x1024p@85Hz, 1360x768p@50Hz, 1360x768p@60Hz, 1360x768p@75Hz, 1360x768p@85Hz, 1400x1050p@50Hz, 1400x1050p@60Hz, 1400x1050p@75Hz, 1440x900p@60Hz, 1440x900p@75Hz, 1440x900p@85Hz, 1536x960p@50Hz, 1536x960p@60Hz, 1536x960p@75Hz, 1600x1000p@50Hz, 1600x1000p@60Hz, 1600x1200p@50Hz, 1600x1200p@60Hz, 1680x1050p@50Hz, 1680x1050p@60Hz, 1704x960p@50Hz, 1704x960p@60Hz, 1728x1080p@50Hz, 1728x1080p@60Hz, 1864x1050p@50Hz, 1864x1050p@60Hz, 1920x1080p@50Hz, 1920x1200p@50Hz DMR(RGBHV): 1280x800p@60Hz, 1366x768p@60Hz, 1600x900p@60Hz DMT(RGBHV): 640x350p@85Hz, 640x400p@85Hz, 640x480p@60Hz, 640x480p@72Hz, 640x480p@75Hz, 640x480p@85Hz, 720x400p@85Hz, 800x600p@56Hz, 800x600p@60Hz, 800x600p@72Hz, 800x600p@75Hz, 800x600p@85Hz, 848x480p@60Hz, 1024x768i@43Hz, 1024x768p@60Hz, 1024x768p@70Hz, 1024x768p@75Hz, 1024x768p@85Hz, 1152x864p@70Hz, 1152x864p@75Hz, 1152x864p@85Hz, 1280x800p@60Hz, 1280x960p@60Hz, 1280x960p@75Hz, 1280x960p@85Hz, 1280x1024i@43Hz, 1280x1024p@60Hz, 1280x1024p@75Hz, 1280x1024p@85Hz, 1360x768p@60Hz, 1366x768p@60Hz, 1600x1200i@48Hz, 1600x1200p@60Hz ANALOG FORMAT SUPPORT TABLE APPENDIX CEA (YPbPr): 720x480p@59Hz, 720x480p@60Hz, 720x480p@119Hz, 720x480p@120Hz, 720x480p@239Hz, 720x480p@240Hz, 720x576p@50Hz, 720x576i@50Hz, 720x576p@100Hz, 720x576p@200Hz, 768x576p@50Hz, 960x480p@59Hz, 960x576p@50Hz, 960x576i@50Hz, 1280x720p@23Hz, 1280x720p@24Hz, 1280x720p@25Hz, 1280x720p@29Hz, 1280x720p@30Hz, 1280x720p@50Hz, 1280x720p@59Hz, 1280x720p@60Hz, 1280x720p@100Hz, 1280x720p@119Hz, 1280x720p@120Hz, 1920x1080p@23Hz, 1920x1080p@24Hz, 1920x1080i@25Hz, 1920x1080p@25Hz, 1920x1080i@29Hz, 1920x1080p@29Hz, 1920x1080i@30Hz, 1920x1080p@30Hz, 1920x1080p@50Hz, 1920x1080p@59Hz, 1920x1080p@60Hz CEA(RGBHV): 640x480p@59Hz, 720x480p@59Hz, 720(1440)x480i@59Hz, 720x480p@60Hz, 720x480p@119Hz, 720x480p@120Hz, 720x480p@239Hz, 720x480p@240Hz, 720x576p@50Hz, 720(1440)x576i@50Hz, 720x576p@100Hz, 720x576p@200Hz, 768x576p@50Hz, 960x576p@50Hz, 960(1920)x576i@50Hz, 1280x720p@23Hz, 1280x720p@24Hz, 1280x720p@25Hz, 1280x720p@29Hz, 1280x720p@30Hz, 1280x720p@50Hz, 1280x720p@59Hz, 1280x720p@60Hz, 1280x720p@100Hz, 1280x720p@119Hz, 1280x720p@120Hz, 1920x1080p@23Hz, 1920x1080p@24Hz, 1920x1080i@25Hz, 1920x1080p@25Hz, 1920x1080i@29Hz, 1920x1080p@29Hz, 1920x1080i@30Hz, 1920x1080p@30Hz, 1920x1080p@50Hz, 1920x1080p@59Hz, 1920x1080p@60Hz CVR (RGBHV): 768x480p@60Hz, 800x600p@60Hz, 800x600p@120Hz, 848x480p@60Hz, 960x600p@60Hz, 1024x576p@60Hz, 1024x640p@60Hz, 1024x768p@60Hz, 1024x768p@120Hz, 1064x600p@60Hz, 1152x720p@60Hz, 1152x864p@60Hz, 1224x768p@60Hz, 1280x720p@60Hz, 1280x768p@60Hz, 1280x768p@120Hz, 1280x800p@120Hz, 1280x960p@60Hz, 1280x1024p@60Hz, 1360x768p@60Hz, 1360x768p@120Hz, 1400x1050p@60Hz, 1440x900p@60Hz, 1536x960p@60Hz, 1600x1000p@60Hz, 1600x1200p@60Hz, 1680x1050p@60Hz, 1704x960p@60Hz, 1728x1080p@60Hz, 1800x1350p@60Hz, 1864x1050p@60Hz, 1920x1080p@60Hz, 1920x1200p@60Hz CVT (RGBHV): 640x360p@85Hz, 640x400p@75Hz, 640x400p@85Hz, 640x480p@75Hz, 640x480p@85Hz, 768x480p@60Hz, 768x480p@75Hz, 768x480p@85Hz, 800x600p@50Hz, 800x600p@60Hz, 800x600p@75Hz, 800x600p@85Hz, 848x480p@50Hz, 848x480p@60Hz, 848x480p@75Hz, 848x480p@85Hz, 960x600p@50Hz, 960x600p@60Hz, 960x600p@75Hz, 960x600p@85Hz, 1024x576p@50Hz, 1024x576p@60Hz, 1024x576p@75Hz, 1024x576p@85Hz, 1024x640p@50Hz, 1024x640p@60Hz, 1024x640p@75Hz, 1024x640p@85Hz, 1024x768p@50Hz, 1024x768p@60Hz, 1024x768p@75Hz, 1024x768p@85Hz, 1064x600p@50Hz, 1064x600p@60Hz, 1064x600p@75Hz, 1064x600p@85Hz, 1152x720p@50Hz, 1152x720p@60Hz, 1152x720p@75Hz,

36 DMR(RGBHV): DMT(RGBHV): CEA (RGBs): CVT (RGBs): DMT (RGBs): CEA (RGsB): CVT (RGsB): DMT (RGsB): CEA (YPbPr):

37 About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 28-Aug-12. AMX.com fax

38 DATA SHEET DXLink TM Multi-Format Wallplate Transmitters AVB-WP-TX-MULTI-DXLINK (FG BL, FG WH) Overview The DXLink Multi-Format Wallplate Transmitter sends analog or digital video including HDMI/HDCP, along with embedded audio or supplemental analog audio up to 100 meters to an Enova DGX Matrix Switcher. It receives power from the Enova DGX or compatible Enova DVX All-In-One Presentation Switcher (3155HD or 2155HD) over the twisted pair cable and features both a multi-format analog port to support legacy devices and an HDMI port to support newer digital devices. Common Applications Mount the DXLink Multi-Format Wallplate Transmitter in the wall or lectern to connect guest equipment and send audio and video signals across the room, on the other side of the house or in a classroom down the hall. Since it is powered remotely, the wallplate can be installed virtually anywhere. Features Only One Cable Send audio and video, while passing Ethernet signals and power over one twisted pair cable Multi-Format Analog Port and HDMI Port Supports legacy analog signals - RGBHV, Component, S-Video, and Composite, and digital HDMI/HDCP, DisplayPort++ and DVI signals Send HDMI signals up to 100 meters Extend the reach of the HDMI signals far beyond the capabilities of typical HDMI cabling Standard Twisted Pair Cable Save time and effort in installation by leveraging cost effective twisted pair cable, see the Cabling for Success with DXLink white paper for more details 2012 AMX. All rights reserved.

39 Dealer Benefits HDMI/HDCP with the Simplicity of Analog - Hassle-free plug-and-play operation eliminates the need for time consuming, cumbersome work-around tools to deal with HDCP key constraints and resolution incompatibilities Installation Friendly - Standard two gang size and remote powering capabilities allows the wallplate to be installed in virtually any location Customer Benefits Interruption-Free Content - Exclusive InstaGate Pro Technology allows audio and video to be switched quickly and easily to every connected display without the difficulties typically associated with HDCP Easily Connect Guest Devices - Provides a versatile solution for environments where sources are consistently changing Additional Features Power Remotely - Power is carried over twisted pair to simplify installation when used with the Enova DGX 3D Support* - Pass through latest video formats including 3D and Deep Color Surround Sound Support - Pass through high definition surround sound including Dolby Digital, DTS and up to 8-channel L-PCM at 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192kHz HDCP Compliant *This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update Specifications GENERAL Dimensions (HWD) 4 11/16" x 6" x 1 5/16" (11.90 cm x cm x 3.33 cm) Installation Mounts onto standard 2 gang US, UK or EU back boxes Weight Approx. 1.4 lb (0.64 kg) Shipping Weight: Approx. 2.2 lb (1.0 kg) DXLink Power Requires power to be provided by a DXLink Power sourcing device such as an Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher or compatible Enova DVX All-In-One Presentation Switcher (3155HD or 2155HD) Use the Enova DGX Configuration Tool located at AMX.com/enova to determine the power requirements of a configuration. The Enova DGX Configuration Tool contains instructions on how to use it. Power Consumption (Max), DXLink Power Supplied 7 W Compatible AMX Products Enova DGX 16 / 32 Digital Media Switchers and Enova DVX-3155 and 2155 All-In-One Presentation Switchers Advanced Configuration Interface* USB Mini-B Connector Transport Layer Throughput (Max) 10.2 Gbps Airflow Natural convection via air vent openings on front, back and top Twisted Pair Cable Type Cat5e, Cat6/6e, Cat6A, Cat7 of UTP, SF/UTP, S/FTP, and F/UTP varieties ** Twisted Pair Cable Length Up to 328 ft (100 m)** MTBF 381,000 hours Approvals CE, FCC, UL, cul, RoHS / WEEE compliant *This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update ** Cable runs with a minimum specification of ANSI/TIE/EIA 568A-5 and ratings of 250MHz or better may be used with DXLink equipment. However, cable run topology and environmental influences can affect the overall successful distance capabilities of these runs. For successful deployments up to 100 meters without consideration to outside variables, AMX recommends the use of shielded category cable (STP) or Cat6A (or better) versions of unshielded or shielded twisted pair (UTP/STP) for DXLink runs. For more details and helpful cabling information, please contact your AMX representative for a copy of the white paper titled Cabling for Success with DXLink.

40 ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature (Operating) 32 to 104 F (0 to 40 C) Temperature (Storage) -22 to 158 F (-30 to 70 C) Humidity (Operating) 5% to 85% RH (non-condensing) Humidity (Storage) 0% to 90% RH (non-condensing) Heat Dissipation (Max) Enova DGX / DVX DXLink (PoE) supplied: 24 BTU/hr FRONT CONNECTORS HDMI Input Analog Video Input Analog Stereo Input Advanced Configuration Interface* USB (HID) Keyboard & Mouse* HDMI Type A Female HD-15 (Breakout cable required for non RGB formats) 3.5mm Mini-Stereo Jack USB Mini-B Connector USB Mini-B Connector SIDE CONNECTORS ID Pushbutton Reset Pushbutton Places system in NetLinx Device ID assignment mode Resets/reboots the CPU of the wallplate BACK CONNECTORS DXLink Output RJ-45 CONTROLS & INDICATORS Advanced Configuration Interface* Power Indicator USB Mini-B Connector Green indicates whether or not the module is powered on HDMI Compatible Formats Input Signal Type Input Signal Support Input Connector Propagation Delay (Typ) Input Voltage (Nominal) Input Re-clocking (CDR) Input Equalization Data Rate (Max) Pixel Clock (Max) Progressive Resolution Support Interlaced Resolution Support HDMI, HDCP, DVI HDMI DVI-D (Single Link With Cable Adapter) DisplayPort ++ (Input Only, With HDMI Cable Adapter) HDMI DVI-D (Single Link with Cable Adapter) DisplayPort ++ HDMI Type A Female DVI-D (Single Link with Cable Adapter) 5 us 1.0 Vpp Differential Yes Yes, Adaptive 4.95 Gbps / 6.75 Gbps 6.75 Gbps supported when the DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less 165 MHz / 225 MHz 225 MHz supported when the DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less 480p up to 60 Hz including but not limited to those resolutions shown on Digital Video Resolution Support Appendix 480i, 576i, 1080i including but not limited to those resolutions shown on Digital Video Resolution Support Appendix

41 If input is interlaced, all scaled outputs will deinterlace video to a progressive resolution format. If in scaler Bypass mode interlaced input will pass through Deep Color Support* 24-bit, 30-bit, 36-bit 30-bit, 36-bit supported when the DXLink HDMI Rx Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Color Space Support RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2 (Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4) 3D Format Support* Yes (HDMI Primary Formats) Frame Packing 1080p up to 24Hz Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60Hz Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60Hz Top-Bottom 1080p up to 24Hz Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60Hz Side-by-Side Half 1080p up to 50/60Hz Side-by-Side Half 720p up to 50/60Hz 3D supported when the DXLink HDMI Rx Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Audio Format Support Dolby TrueHD*, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio*, DTS, 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48kHz, 5.1 channels Audio Resolution 16 bit to 24 bit Audio Sample Rate 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192kHz Local Audio Support Yes for audio insertion HDCP Support Yes Supports AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro Technology When used with an Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher the key support is up to 16 sinks per output, independent of source device CEC Support DDC/EDID Support *This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update When used as a single point to point solution the key support is defined by the source device None The HDMI EDID in point to point mode is passed up from the sink device. When used with Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher or Enova DVX-2155 or 3155 the HDMI EDID is passed from the Enova Switcher input to the TX and is user reprogrammable. The analog video input connection provides a fixed EDID set ANALOG VIDEO Compatible Formats Progressive Resolution Support Interlaced Resolution Support RGBHV, RGBs, RGsB YPbPr (HDTV) Y/c (S-Video), C (Composite) 480p up to 60 Hz (reference Analog Table Format Appendix for extended list) 480i, 576i, 1080i (reference Analog Table Format Appendix for extended list)

42 Auto-Adjust Input* RGB Input Signal Level Range RGB Input Impedance HV Sync Input Signal Level Range HV Sync Input Impedance Digital Processing Y/Pb/Pr Input Signal Level Range Y/Pb/Pr Input Impedance Y/c (S-Video) Input Signal Level Range Y/c (S-Video) Input Impedance C (Composite) Input Signal Level Range C (Composite) Input Impedance Input Connector *This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update If input is interlaced, all scaled outputs will deinterlace video to a progressive resolution format. If in scaler Bypass mode interlaced input will pass through unaltered Supported 1 Vpp nominal 75 Ω 2 to 5 Vpp 2.5 pf Typ, 10 pf Max 24 bit, 165 MHz 1.0 Vpp for Y, 700 mvpp for Pb Pr 75 Ω 1.0 Vpp for Y, 300 mvpp for c 75 Ω 1.0 Vpp 75 Ω HD-15 (Breakout cable required for non RGBHV formats) AUDIO (ANALOG & DIGITAL S/PDIF) Input Signal Types Analog Input Level (Max) Analog Input Impedance Analog to Digital Conversion S/PDIF Audio Format Support S/PDIF Resolution S/PDIF Sample Rate S/PDIF Input Signal Level Range S/PDIF Input Impedance Analog to Digital Reference Level Input Connectors Stereo Analog, S/PDIF Video signal must be present to pass Audio +2 dbu, unbalanced 10k Ω 48 khz Sample Rate, 24-bit Dolby Digital, DTS, 2 CH L-PCM Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48kHz, 5.1 channels 16 to 24 bit 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz 200 mvpp to 600mVpp terminated 75 Ω +2.5 dbu = 0 dbfs 3.5mm Mini-Stereo Jack (Analog Stereo) RCA Jack (S/PDIF) DIGITAL VIDEO RESOLUTION SUPPORT APPENDIX CEA(RGBHV): 640x480p@59Hz, 720x480p@59Hz, 720(1440)x480i@59Hz, 720x480p@60Hz, 720x480p@119Hz, 720x480p@120Hz, 720x480p@239Hz, 720x480p@240Hz, 720x576p@50Hz, 720(1440)x576i@50Hz, 720x576p@100Hz, 720x576p@200Hz, 768x576p@50Hz, 960x576p@50Hz, 960(1920)x576i@50Hz, 1280x720p@23Hz, 1280x720p@24Hz, 1280x720p@25Hz, 1280x720p@29Hz, 1280x720p@30Hz, 1280x720p@50Hz, 1280x720p@59Hz, 1280x720p@60Hz, 1280x720p@100Hz, 1280x720p@119Hz, 1280x720p@120Hz, 1920x1080p@23Hz, 1920x1080p@24Hz, 1920x1080i@25Hz, 1920x1080p@25Hz, 1920x1080i@29Hz, 1920x1080p@29Hz, 1920x1080i@30Hz, 1920x1080p@30Hz, 1920x1080p@50Hz, 1920x1080p@59Hz, 1920x1080p@60Hz CVR (RGBHV): 768x480p@60Hz, 800x600p@60Hz, 800x600p@120Hz, 848x480p@60Hz, 960x600p@60Hz, 1024x576p@60Hz, 1024x640p@60Hz, 1024x768p@60Hz, 1024x768p@120Hz, 1064x600p@60Hz, 1152x720p@60Hz, 1152x864p@60Hz, 1224x768p@60Hz, 1280x720p@60Hz, 1280x768p@60Hz, 1280x768p@120Hz, 1280x800p@120Hz, 1280x960p@60Hz, 1280x1024p@60Hz, 1360x768p@60Hz, 1360x768p@120Hz, 1400x1050p@60Hz, 1440x900p@60Hz, 1536x960p@60Hz, 1600x1000p@60Hz, 1600x1200p@60Hz, 1680x1050p@60Hz, 1704x960p@60Hz, 1728x1080p@60Hz, 1800x1350p@60Hz, 1864x1050p@60Hz, 1920x1080p@60Hz, 1920x1200p@60Hz CVT (RGBHV): 640x360p@85Hz, 640x400p@75Hz, 640x400p@85Hz, 640x480p@75Hz, 640x480p@85Hz, 768x480p@60Hz, 768x480p@75Hz, 768x480p@85Hz, 800x600p@50Hz, 800x600p@60Hz, 800x600p@75Hz, 800x600p@85Hz, 848x480p@50Hz, 848x480p@60Hz, 848x480p@75Hz, 848x480p@85Hz, 960x600p@50Hz, 960x600p@60Hz, 960x600p@75Hz, 960x600p@85Hz, 1024x576p@50Hz, 1024x576p@60Hz, 1024x576p@75Hz, 1024x576p@85Hz, 1024x640p@50Hz, 1024x640p@60Hz, 1024x640p@75Hz, 1024x640p@85Hz, 1024x768p@50Hz, 1024x768p@60Hz, 1024x768p@75Hz, 1024x768p@85Hz, 1064x600p@50Hz, 1064x600p@60Hz, 1064x600p@75Hz, 1064x600p@85Hz, 1152x720p@50Hz, 1152x720p@60Hz, 1152x720p@75Hz, 1152x720p@85Hz, 1152x864p@60Hz, 1224x768p@50Hz, 1224x768p@60Hz, 1224x768p@75Hz, 1224x768p@85Hz, 1280x720p@50Hz, 1280x720p@60Hz, 1280x720p@75Hz, 1280x720p@85Hz, 1280x768p@50Hz, 1280x768p@60Hz, 1280x768p@75Hz, 1280x768p@85Hz, 1280x800p@50Hz, 1280x800p@75Hz, 1280x800p@85Hz, 1280x960p@50Hz, 1280x960p@60Hz, 1280x960p@75Hz, 1280x960p@85Hz, 1280x1024p@50Hz, 1280x1024p@60Hz, 1280x1024p@75Hz, 1280x1024p@85Hz, 1360x768p@50Hz, 1360x768p@60Hz, 1360x768p@75Hz, 1360x768p@85Hz, 1400x1050p@50Hz, 1400x1050p@60Hz, 1400x1050p@75Hz, 1440x900p@60Hz, 1440x900p@75Hz, 1440x900p@85Hz, 1536x960p@50Hz, 1536x960p@60Hz, 1536x960p@75Hz, 1600x1000p@50Hz, 1600x1000p@60Hz, 1600x1200p@50Hz, 1600x1200p@60Hz, 1680x1050p@50Hz, 1680x1050p@60Hz,

43 DMR(RGBHV): DMT(RGBHV): ANALOG FORMAT SUPPORT TABLE APPENDIX CEA (Y/Pb/Pr): CEA(RGBHV): CVR (RGBHV): CVT (RGBHV): DMR(RGBHV): DMT(RGBHV): CEA (RGBs): CVT (RGBs): DMT (RGBs): CEA (RGsB): CVT (RGsB): DMT (RGsB): CEA (YPbPr):

44 About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 28-Aug-12. AMX.com fax

45 DATA SHEET Enova DGX 16 Enclosure AVS-ENOVADGX16-ENC (FG ) Overview The Enova DGX 16 Enclosure is a Digital Media Matrix Switcher that includes an integrated NetLinx Controller, redundant power supplies and can be populated with Enova DGX video input and output boards in addition to optional audio insert/extract boards. There are four connections per video board, and each enclosure holds four video input boards and four video output boards for a maximum matrix of 16x16. The Enova DGX 16 is far beyond a modular media switcher with built-in controller - it functions as the centerpiece of a complete integrated solution that manages and distributes analog and digital audio and video including HDMI/HDCP, control and Ethernet. Easily integrate HDCP into system designs and enjoy hassle-free plug-and-play operation. No tools, no delays and no key constraints it just works with AMX s exclusive InstaGate Pro Technology. Built for today's and tomorrow's needs, a comprehensive set of Enova DGX hot swappable boards can be used in conjunction with DXLink and DGX Transmitters and Receivers to provide an end-to-end distribution system over twisted pair cable or fiber*. An integrated NetLinx Controller and embedded Ethernet switch enables management of the entire solution including source equipment and display devices located throughout the environment all from a single point of control. In addition to eliminating HDCP delays, InstaGate Pro allows traditionally key limited sources to be switched freely to all connected HDCP compliant displays eliminating HDCP key limitations that plague large applications. Built-in SmartScale Technology on every output provides video that is perfectly scaled for each connected display, eliminating the integration challenges that can occur when sources and displays have different supported resolutions - making it easy to specify, easy to install and easy to use. With the powerful combination of analog-to-digital signal conversion, video scaling and high speed digital switching the system delivers perfect video every time regardless of signal type AMX. All rights reserved.

46 As part of a complete distribution system, easily send analog or digital audio and video including HDMI with HDCP signals, plus control and power up to 100 meters over one standard twisted pair cable to and from the Enova DGX using the DXLink Transmitters/Receivers. *Fiber input and output boards provide support for non-hdcp signals only Common Applications The Enova DGX 16 is ideal for commercial or residential installations requiring the highest quality video to be shared between 16 local or remote AV sources and destinations. Compact form factor allows for installation in locations where space is limited and included redundant power supplies provides for constant uptime for mission critical applications. Features HDMI/HDCP Switching with Simplicity of Analog End-to-end distribution of HDMI/HDCP without interruption or key constraints using InstaGate Pro Technology AV and Control over Twisted Pair Send audio, video, bi-directional control and Ethernet up to 100m over one standard twisted pair cable Embedded NetLinx Controller Allows any connected device to be managed, monitored and controlled Integrated Ethernet Switch Pass Ethernet or stream IP video through the attached DXLink Transmitter or Receiver Analog to Digital Video Conversion with Scaled Outputs Converts any source signal to digital and uses SmartScale Technology to automatically output video that is perfectly scaled for each connected display 4 RU Enclosure Comparatively speaking, that s half the space of the competition Key Dealer Benefits HDCP With Simplicity of Analog Hassle-free plug-and-play operation eliminates the need for timeconsuming, cumbersome work around tools to deal with HDCP key constraints and resolution incompatibilities All-In-One Control and Distribution Solution Powerful combination of modular matrix switcher, built-in controller, embedded Ethernet switch and video scaling on every output simplifies the end-to-end distribution and management of audio, video and control throughout multiple rooms Fast Easy Installation Leverage pre-existing standard twisted pair infrastructure to distribute highdefinition video, audio, control and Ethernet Key Customer Benefits Picture Perfect Prevents degraded video due to incompatibilities between different display resolutions by scaling the video to match each display's preferred resolution using innovative SmartScale Technology Interruption-Free Content Exclusive InstaGate Pro Technology allows audio and video to be switched quickly and easily to every connected display without the difficulties typically associated with HDCP Audio, Video and Control Everywhere Provides end-to-end distribution of audio, video and control signals throughout a residence or commercial facility over one twisted pair cable Additional Features InstaGate Pro Technology Easily integrate HDCP into system designs and enjoy hassle-free matrix switching to all compliant displays. No tools, no delays, and no key constraints it just works SmartScale Technology Automatically responds to the display's declared EDID information and scales the video to the best resolution and video parameters for that display without manual setup; this prevents inferior video quality when sources are forced to lower resolutions to support the least capable display in the system

47 DXLink Twisted Pair Input and Output Boards HDCP Compliant boards send audio, video, control, Ethernet and power over one standard twisted pair cable up to 200m 100m to the matrix switcher and 100m after the matrix switcher, see the Cabling for Success with DXLink white paper for more details Built-in NetLinx Controller Easily program and manage the entire solution including source equipment and display devices located across multiple rooms all from a single point of control Easily Convert Analog to Digital Signals Use legacy analog sources with the Enova DGX and automatically convert their signals to digital Hot Swappable Video Input / Output Boards Easily add or replace I/O boards at any time after deployment - the system automatically recognizes the new configuration and activates the boards Audio Insert / Extract Boards Add audio from a local source or breakaway embedded audio and send to a separate audio system to distribute throughout an environment Fiber Input and Output Boards Use in conjunction with DGX Fiber Transmitters and Receivers to send analog and digital audio and video* over fiber 3D Support** Pass through latest video formats including 3D and Deep Color Surround Sound Support Pass through high definition surround sound including Dolby Digital, DTS and up to 8-channel L-PCM at 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192kHz High Speed Digital Switching 12.8 Gbps ensures perfect pixel for pixel reproduction of video Fully Redundant Power Supplies with Independent Power Paths Ensures maximum reliability for applications that require 24/7 uptime *Fiber input and output boards provide support for non-hdcp signals only **This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update Specifications GENERAL Supported Signal Styles Future Supported Signal Styles AC Power Power Consumption (Max) Power Consumption (Typ) Power Consumption w/dxlink Power (Typ) For supported signal styles please see the data sheets for Enova DGX compatible Input / Output Boards: AVS-ENOVADGX32-VI-HDMI, Enova DGX HDMI Input Board (FG ) AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO-HDMI, Enova DGX HDMI Output Board (FG ) AVS-ENOVADGX32-VI-DVI, Enova DGX DVI Input Board (FG ) AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO-DVI, Enova DGX DVI Output Board (FG ) AVS-ENOVADGX32-VI-DXLINK, Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board (FG ) AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO-DXLINK, Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Output Board (FG ) AVS-ENOVADGX32-AUD-INS-EXT, Enova DGX Audio Insert / Extract Board (FG ) AVS-EPDGX32-OI-SC, 4 SC Fiber Connection Epica DGX Input Board (FG ) AVS-EPDGX32-OO-SC, 4 SC Fiber Connection Epica DGX Input Board (FG ) Passes USB (HID) Keyboard & Mouse** VAC single phase, Hz 930 Watts, with redundancy 1760 Watts, without redundancy 362 Watts, fully loaded HDMI enclosure with redundancy 835 Watts, fully loaded DXLink Power enclosure without redundancy Use the Enova DGX Configuration Tool located at AMX.com/enova to determine the power

48 Dimensions (HWD) requirements of a configuration and whether any of the DXLink Transmitters or Receivers should be powered with the local power supply to maintain PS redundancy in the Enova enclosure 6 13/16" x 19" x 15" (17.4 cm x 48.3 cm x 38 cm) Dimensions (HWD) with Extractors 6 13/16" x 19" x 16" (17.4 cm x 48.3 cm x 40.6 cm) Units 4 Weight Approximately 55 lbs (24.95 kg) per loaded enclosure Shipping Weight Approximately 65 lbs (29.5 kg) per loaded enclosure MTBF 168,000 hours Per Channel Aggregate Data Rate (Max) 12.8 Gbps Noise Level < 58 1m 25 C) Airflow Forced Air (inlet on side, exhaust on side) Approvals CE, FCC Class A, UL, cul, RoHS / WEEE compliant ENVIRONMENTAL Heat Dissipation (Max) Heat Dissipation (Typ) Heat Dissipation w/dxlink Power (Typ) 3173 BTU/hr, with redundancy 6005 BTU/hr, without redundancy 1235 BTU/hr, fully loaded enclosure with redundancy 2849 BTU/hr, fully loaded DXLink Power enclosure without redundancy Use the Enova DGX Configuration Tool located at AMX.com/enova to determine the power requirements of a configuration and whether any of the DXLink Transmitters or Receivers should be powered with the local power supply to maintain PS redundancy in the Enova enclosure 5% to 85% RH (non-condensing) 0% to 90% RH (non-condensing) Humidity (Operating) Humidity (Storage) Temperature (Operating) 32 to 104 F (0 to 40 C) Temperature (Storage) -22 to +158 F (-30 to +70 C) INTEGRATED CONTROLLER LAN/Ethernet Port NetLinx On Board Master is an NI-3100 Class Controller TCP/IP Uplink Port (LAN 10/100/1000) Supports up to 64-Port Unmanaged 10/100 Ethernet Switch (Cascaded architecture actual throughput dependent on loading. Worst case per port throughput 10 Mbps, best case 100 Mbps when used with 16 DXLink Transmitters and 16 DXLink Receivers) Processor Memory Program Port (USB) ENCLOSURE CONTROL Control Port (Serial) Static IP or DHCP/DNS, SSL, Auto-negotiating, Half/Full duplex, Auto MDI/MDI-X Cross-Over TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, SMTP, SNMP, Built-in Web server Includes support for DXLink Devices RJ-45 Connector CPU 404 MIPS PowerPC SDRAM 256 MB NVRAM 1 MB Flash 2 GB USB Mini-AB (used for NetLinx Studio control) Bidirectional RS-232 Baud Rates of 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, DB-9 Connector

49 Control Port (USB) **This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update USB Mini-B For audio, video and signal transport specifications please see compatible input / output board data sheets: Compatible Boards AVS-ENOVADGX32-VI-HDMI, Enova DGX HDMI Input Board (FG ) AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO-HDMI, Enova DGX HDMI Output Board (FG ) AVS-ENOVADGX32-VI-DVI, Enova DGX DVI Input Board (FG ) AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO-DVI, Enova DGX DVI Output Board (FG ) AVS-ENOVADGX32-VI-DXLINK, Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board (FG ) AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO-DXLINK, Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Output Board (FG ) AVS-ENOVADGX32-AUD-INS-EXT, Enova DGX Audio Insert / Extract Board (FG ) AVS-EPDGX32-OI-SC, 4 SC Fiber Connection Epica DGX Input Board (FG ) AVS-EPDGX32-OO-SC, 4 SC Fiber Connection Epica DGX Input Board (FG )

50 About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 10-Sept-12. AMX.com fax

51 DATA SHEET Enova DGX Audio Insert / Extract Board AVS-ENOVADGX32-AUD-INS-EXT (FG ) Overview The AVS-ENOVADGX32-AUD-INS-EXT is an audio insert / extract board for the Enova DGX 16 and Enova DGX 32. The board provides insert or extract access to the first 16 video input or output positions. The Enova DGX 16 and Enova DGX 32 enclosures both support one audio insert/extract board on the input side and one on the output side. The audio insert/extract board simplifies system design by allowing audio from a source located near the Enova DGX to be plugged directly into the system. This can dramatically reduce the overall cost of the system by eliminating the need for additional Transmitters or Receivers. Breakaway embedded audio and send to a separate audio system to be distributed throughout an environment. COMMON APPLICATIONS The Enova DGX Audio Insert / Extract Board is ideal for applications when local sources such as computers with analog audio outputs are plugged directly into the Enova DGX. Inserted audio can be embedded onto any Enova DGX output. The board also allows de-embed audio from Enova DGX HDMI inputs to be sent to a separate audio system. FEATURES De-embed Audio Breakaway embedded audio from Enova DGX inputs and send to a separate audio system to distribute throughout an environment Embed Audio Insert local analog audio into pre-switched digital video paths or post switched digital audio paths depending on audio insert/extract board location Individually Configurable Each audio access point can be individually configured for insertion or extraction functionality Hot Swappable Easily add or replace I/O boards at any time after deployment - the system automatically recognizes the new configuration and activates the boards 2011 AMX. All rights reserved.

52 SPECIFICATIONS ANALOG AUDIO AUDIO INSERTION Audio Signal Type Analog Input Level (Max) Input Impedance Analog to Digital Conversion Analog to Digital Reference Level Optimal Analog Audio Operating Range Input Connectors Analog Stereo, up to 16 channels per enclosure +3 dbu, unbalanced 10k Ω 48 khz Sample Rate, 24-bit +3 dbu = 0 dbfs -30 dbu to +2 dbu 8 pluggable, dual three-position, terminal blocks each containing two single-ended stereo contacts (supports 28 to 18 AWG) ANALOG AUDIO AUDIO EXTRACTION Audio Signal Type Analog Output Level (Max) Output Impedance Drive Output Frequency Response Audio Output THD+N Audio Out SNR Digital to Analog Resolution Digital to Analog Reference Level Optimal Digital Audio Operating Range Audio Synchronization Output Connectors Analog Stereo, up to 16 channels per enclosure +2.8 dbu, unbalanced >= 5k Ω <± 0.3 db, 20 Hz to 20 khz <0.04%, 1 khz, -10dBu to +2.8dBu >95 db, 20 Hz to 20 khz Vin=+3dBu 24 bit, 2 Channel 0 dbfs = +3 dbu -30 dbfs to -2 dbfs TBA 8 pluggable, dual three-position, terminal blocks each containing two single-ended stereo contacts (supports 28 to 18 AWG) About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 5-Jan-12. AMX.com fax

53 DATA SHEET Enova DGX DVI Input Board AVS-ENOVADGX32-VI-DVI (FG ) Overview The AVS-ENOVADGX32-VI-DVI is an HDCP compliant DVI input board for the Enova DGX 16 and Enova DGX 32. It has four DVI connections per board and supports HDMI, DisplayPort++ or DVI signals. Common Applications The Enova DGX DVI Input Board is ideal for applications where source devices are located within 15 meters of the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher, allowing direct digital inputs into the system and eliminating the need for external transmitters. Features InstaGate Pro Technology Easily integrate HDMI/HDCP into system designs and enjoy hassle-free matrix switching to all compliant displays. No tools, no delays, and no key constraints it just works Hot Swappable Easily add or replace I/O boards at any time after deployment - the system automatically recognizes the new configuration and activates the boards Specifications DVI w/hdcp Compatible Formats Signal Type Support HDMI Mode Support Data Rate (Max) Pixel Clock (Max) Progressive Resolution Support Input Interlaced Resolution Support DVI, HDCP DVI-D (Single Link) HDMI (With DVI Cable Adapter) DisplayPort ++ (Input Only, With DVI Cable Adapter) DVI boards can be run in HDMI mode with an EDID update which will provide full HDMI functionality and board specifications 4.95 Gbps / 6.75 Gbps 6.75 Gbps supported when DVI Input Board is used in HDMI mode and the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink HDMI Rx Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less 165 MHz 480p up to 60 Hz 480i, 576i, 1080i 2012 AMX. All rights reserved.

54 Input Equalization Yes, Adaptive up to 100 ft (30 m) at 165 MHz Cable distance support dependent on cable type and signal format Input Re-clocking (CDR) Yes Color Depth Support 24-bit Color Space Support RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2 Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4 Local Audio Support Yes, Insertion and/or Extraction of 2 CH L-PCM selectable by channel DDC/EDID Support EDID provided by Enova DGX 16/32, EDID is user reprogrammable HDCP Support Yes, full matrix HDCP support (includes any input to any or all outputs) Key Management System AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro Technology Key support up to 16 devices per output, independent of source device Input Voltage (Nominal) 1.0 Vpp Differential DVI Input Board Propagation Delay 2 us HDMI Audio Synchronization (relevant to DVI when DVI board is used in HDMI mode) Connector Approvals EDID FACTORY LOADED 1 Standard Timing Identification Established Timing 1 The default EDID can be overwritten to include a broad range of features, including HDMI mode, based on installation requirements Progressive and Interlaced Video 60 Hz frame rate: Audio is actively delayed to match video within 8ms leading or lagging. 4 DVI-I Ports (DVI-D Single Link is the supported signal type) CE, FCC Class A, UL, cul, RoHS / WEEE compliant 1920 x Hz (this is the preferred timing identified in the EDID) 1920 x Hz 1680 x Hz 1600 x Hz 1600 x Hz 1400 x Hz 1440 x Hz 1360 x Hz 1280 x Hz 1280 x Hz 1280 x Hz 1280 x Hz 1280 x 75 Hz 1152 x 75 Hz 1024 x 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 75 Hz, 87 Hz 832 x 75 Hz 800 x 56 Hz, 60 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz 720 x 70 Hz, 88 Hz 640 x 60 Hz, 67 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 10-Sept-12. AMX.com fax

55 DATA SHEET Enova TM DGX DXLink AVS-ENOVADGX32-VI-DXLink (FG ) Twisted Pair Input Board Overview The AVS-ENOVADGX32-VI-DXLINK is a HDCP compliant twisted pair cable input board for the Enova DGX 16 and Enova DGX 32. It has four connections per board designed to receive audio and video from DXLink Transmitters while passing bidirectional control and Ethernet signals over one standard twisted pair cable up to 100m. DXLink Power is available from the DXLink Input Board to power DXLink Transmitters. Common Applications The Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board is ideal for applications where source devices are located up to 100 meters away from the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher and need to be distributed throughout a commercial or residential environment. Features Only One Cable Receive audio and video while passing control, Ethernet and power over one twisted pair cable Send HDMI signals up to 100 Meters Extend the reach of the HDMI with HDCP signals far beyond the capabilities of typical HDMI cabling Standard Twisted Pair Cable Save time and effort in installation by leveraging pre-existing cost effective twisted pair cable, see the Cabling for Success with DXLink white paper for more details Hot Swappable Easily add or replace I/O boards at any time after deployment - the system automatically recognizes the new configuration and activates the boards HDCP Compliant Additional Features Remotely Powered Transmitters- DXLink Power is available from the DXLink Input Board to power DXLink Transmitters 3D Support* - Pass through latest video formats including 3D and Deep Color Surround Sound Support Pass through high definition surround sound including Dolby Digital, DTS and up to 8-channel L-PCM at 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192kHz * This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update 2012 AMX. All rights reserved.

56 Specifications Signal Transport DXLink w/hdcp Compatible Formats Future Compatible Formats Signal Type Support DXLink Power HDMI Video / Audio / Ethernet / Power and Control USB (HID Keyboard & Mouse)* DXLink DxLink TX units can have power supplied over twisted pair cable when connected to a DXLink Input Board of the Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher Use the Enova DGX Configuration Tool located at AMX.com/enova to determine the power requirements of a configuration and whether any of the DXLink Transmitters or Receivers should be powered with the local power supply. The configuration tool contains instructions on how to determine power requirements Connectors (4) RJ-45 Ports Transport Layer Throughput (Max) 10.2 Gbps Twisted Pair Cable Type Cat5e, Cat6/6e, Cat6A, Cat7 of UTP, SF/UTP, S/FTP, and F/UTP varieties** Twisted Pair Cable Length Up to 328 ft (100 m) ** Video Data Rate (Max) 4.95 Gbps / 6.75 Gbps 6.75 Gbps supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink HDMI Rx Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Video Pixel Clock (Max) 165 MHz / 225 MHz 225 MHz supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink HDMI Rx Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Progressive Resolution Support 480p up to 60 Hz Interlaced Resolution Support 480i, 576i, 1080i Deep Color Support* 24-bit, 30-bit, 36-bit 30-bit, 36-bit supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink HDMI Rx Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Color Space Support RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2 3D Format Support* Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4 Yes (HDMI Primary Formats, when used with DXLink Output Boards and the DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in bypass mode ) Frame Packing 1080p up to 24 Hz Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60 Hz Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60 Hz Top-Bottom 1080p up to 24 Hz

57 Audio Format Support Audio Resolution Audio Sample Rate Local Audio Support HDCP Support CEC Support ICSP, TCP/IP, IR, Control Management DDC/EDID Support Approvals * This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60 Hz Side-by-Side Half 1080p up to 50/60 Hz Side-by-Side Half 720p up to 50/60 Hz Dolby TrueHD*, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio*, DTS, 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48 khz, 5.1 channels 16 bit to 24 bit 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192 khz Yes, Insertion and/or Extraction of 2 CH L-PCM selectable by channel when used in conjunction with Enova DGX Audio Insert / Extract Board Yes, full matrix HDCP support (includes any input to any or all outputs) Key Management System AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro Technology Key support up to 16 sinks per output, independent of source device None Control distribution is managed by the Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher on-board NetLinx Master and Ethernet Switch EDID provided by the Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher to the connected DXLink HDMI TX, EDID is user re-programmable CE, FCC Class A, UL, cul, RoHS / WEEE compliant ** Cable runs with a minimum specification of ANSI/TIE/EIA 568A-5 and ratings of 250MHz or better may be used with DXLink equipment. However, cable run topology and environmental influences can affect the overall successful distance capabilities of these runs. For successful deployments up to 100 meters without consideration to outside variables, AMX recommends the use of shielded category cable (STP) or Cat6A (or better) versions of unshielded or shielded twisted pair (UTP/STP) for DXLink runs. For more details and helpful cabling information, please contact your AMX representative for a copy of the white paper titled Cabling for Success with DXLink. EDID FACTORY LOADED 1 Note Standard Timing Identification The default EDID can be overwritten to include a broad range of features based on installation requirements 1920 x Hz (This is the preferred format DTD identified in the EDID) 1920 x Hz 1680 x Hz 1600 x Hz 1600 x Hz 1400 x Hz 1440 x Hz 1360 x Hz 1280 x Hz 1280 x Hz 1280 x Hz 1280 x Hz

58 Established Timing 1280 x 75 Hz 1152 x 75 Hz 1024 x 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 75 Hz, 87 Hz 832 x 75 Hz 800 x 56 Hz, 60 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz 720 x 70 Hz, 88 Hz 640 x 60 Hz, 67 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz CEA Video Information Code (VIC) Formats VIC = 1, 640 x 480 p 59.94/60 Hz 4:3 VIC = 2, 720 x 480 p 59.94/60 Hz 4:3 VIC = 3, 720 x 480 p 59.94/60 Hz 16:9 VIC = 4, 1280 x 720 p 59.94/60 Hz 16:9 VIC = 5, 1920 x 1080i 59.94/60 Hz 16:9 VIC = 6, 720(1440) x 480i 59.94/60 Hz 4:3 VIC = 14, 1440 x 480 p 59.94/60 Hz 4:3 VIC = 15, 1440 x 480 p 59.94/60 Hz 16:9 VIC = 16, Native 1920 x 1080 p 59.94/60 Hz 16:9 VIC = 17, 720 x 576 p 50 Hz 4:3 VIC = 18, 720 x 576 p 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 19, 1280 x 720 p 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 20, 1920 x 1080i 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 21, 720(1440) x 576i 50 Hz 4:3 VIC = 22, 720(1440) x 576i 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 29, 1440 x 576 p 50 Hz 4:3 VIC = 30, 1440 x 576 p 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 31, 1920 x 1080 p 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 32, 1920 x 1080 p 23.97/24 Hz 16:9 VIC = 33, 1920 x 1080 p 25 Hz 16:9 VIC = 34, 1920 x 1080 p 29.97/30 Hz 16:9 VIC = 39, 1920 x 1080i 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 41, 1280 x 720 p 100 Hz 16:9 VIC = 42, 720 x 576 p 100 Hz 4:3 VIC = 43, 720 x 576 p 100 Hz 16:9 VIC = 44, 720(1440) x 576i 100 Hz 4:3 VIC = 45, 720(1440) x 576i 100 Hz 16:9 VIC = 47, 1280 x 720 p /120 Hz 16:9 VIC = 48, 720 x 480 p /120 Hz 4:3 VIC = 49, 720 x 480 p /120 Hz 16:9 Audio Data Block Basic Audio: 2 Channel L-PCM 32, 44.1, 48 khz Sampling Frequency at 16, 20 or 24 bits per sample 1 The default EDID can be overwritten to include a broad range of features, including HDMI mode, based on installation requirements About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 10-Sept-12. AMX.com fax

59 DATA SHEET Enova DGX HDMI Input Board AVS-ENOVADGX32-VI-HDMI (FG ) Overview The AVS-ENOVADGX32-VI-HDMI is a HDCP compliant HDMI input board for the Enova DGX 16 and Enova DGX 32. It has four connections and supports HDMI with embedded audio, DisplayPort++ or DVI signals. Common Applications The Enova DGX HDMI Input Board is ideal for applications where source devices are located within 15 meters of the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher, allowing direct digital inputs into the system and eliminating the need for external transmitters. Features InstaGate Pro Technology Easily integrate HDMI/HDCP into system designs and enjoy hassle-free matrix switching to all compliant displays. No tools, no delays, and no key constraints it just works Hot Swappable Easily add or replace I/O boards at any time after deployment - the system automatically recognizes the new configuration and activates the boards 3D Support * Pass through latest video formats including 3D and Deep Color Surround Sound Support Pass through high definition surround sound including Dolby Digital, DTS and up to 8-channel L-PCM at 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192 khz *This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update Specifications HDMI w/hdcp Compatible Formats Signal Type Support Data Rate (Max) Pixel Clock (Max) HDMI, HDCP, DVI HDMI DVI-D (Single Link With HDMI Cable Adapter) DisplayPort ++ (Input Only, With HDMI Cable Adapter) 4.95 Gbps / 6.75 Gbps 6.75 Gbps supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less 165 MHz / 225 MHz 255 MHz supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and 2012 AMX. All rights reserved.

60 format is 1080p60 or less Progressive Resolution Support 480p up to 60 Hz Input Interlaced Resolution Support 480i, 576i, 1080i If input is interlaced, all scaled outputs will deinterlace video to a progressive resolution format. If in scaler Bypass mode interlaced input will pass through unaltered Input Equalization Yes, Adaptive up to 100ft (30m) at 225MHz Cable distance support dependent on cable type and signal format Input Re-clocking (CDR) Yes Deep Color Support* 24-bit, 30-bit, 36-bit 30-bit, 36-bit supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Color Space Support RGB 4:4:4; YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2 Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4 3D Format Support* Yes (HDMI Primary Formats) Frame Packing 1080p up to 24Hz Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60Hz Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60Hz Top-Bottom 1080p up to 24Hz Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60Hz Side-by-Side Half 1080p up to 50/60Hz Side-by-Side Half 720p up to 50/60Hz Audio Format Support Audio Resolution Audio Sample Rate Local Audio Support DDC/EDID Support HDCP Support CEC Support Input Voltage (Nominal) Connectors HDMI Input Board Propagation Delay HDMI Audio Synchronization Approvals *This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update 3D supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Dolby TrueHD*, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio*, DTS, 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48kHz, 5.1 channels 16 bit to 24 bit 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192kHz Yes, Insertion and/or Extraction of 2 CH L-PCM selectable by channel EDID provided by Enova DGX 16 / 32, EDID is user reprogrammable Yes, full matrix HDCP support (includes any input to any or all outputs) Key Management System AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro Technology Key support up to 16 devices per output, independent of source device None 1.0 Vpp Differential 4 HDMI Type A Female Ports 2 us Progressive and Interlace Video 60Hz frame rate: Audio is actively delayed to match video within 8ms leading or lagging CE, FCC Class A, UL, cul, RoHS / WEEE compliant EDID FACTORY LOADED 1 Standard Timing Identification 1920 x (this is the preferred format DTD

61 identified in the EDID) 1920 x Hz 1680 x Hz 1600 x Hz 1600 x Hz 1400 x Hz 1440 x Hz 1360 x Hz 1280 x Hz 1280 x Hz 1280 x Hz 1280 x Hz Established Timing 1280 x 75 Hz 1152 x 75 Hz 1024 x 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 75 Hz, 87 Hz 832 x 75 Hz 800 x 56 Hz, 60 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz 720 x 70 Hz, 88 Hz 640 x 60 Hz, 67 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz CEA Video Information Code (VIC) Formats VIC = 1, 640 x 480 p 59.94/60 Hz 4:3 VIC = 2, 720 x 480 p 59.94/60 Hz 4:3 VIC = 3, 720 x 480 p 59.94/60 Hz 16:9 VIC = 4, 1280 x 720 p 59.94/60 Hz 16:9 VIC = 5, 1920 x 1080 i 59.94/60 Hz 16:9 VIC = 6, 720(1440) x 480 i 59.94/60 Hz 4:3 VIC = 7, 720(1440) x 480 i 59.94/60 Hz 16:9 VIC = 14, 1440 x 480 p 59.94/60 Hz 4:3 VIC = 15, 1440 x 480 p 59.94/60 Hz 16:9 VIC = 16, Native 1920 x 1080 p 59.94/60 Hz 16:9 VIC = 17, 720 x 576 p 50 Hz 4:3 VIC = 18, 720 x 576 p 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 19, 1280 x 720 p 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 20, 1920 x 1080 i 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 21, 720(1440) x 576 i 50 Hz 4:3 VIC = 22, 720(1440) x 576 i 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 29, 1440 x 576 p 50 Hz 4:3 VIC = 30, 1440 x 576 p 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 30, 1440 x 576 p 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 31, 1920 x 1080 p 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 32, 1920 x 1080 p 23.97/24 Hz 16:9 VIC = 33, 1920 x 1080 p 25 Hz 16:9 VIC = 34, 1920 x 1080 p 29.97/30 Hz 16:9 VIC = 39, 1920 x 1080 i 50 Hz 16:9 VIC = 41, 1280 x 720 p 100 Hz 16:9 VIC = 42, 720 x 576 p 100 Hz 4:3 VIC = 43, 720 x 576 p 100 Hz 16:9 VIC = 44, 720(1440) x 576 i 100 Hz 4:3 VIC = 45, 720(1440) x 576 i 100 Hz 16:9 VIC = 47, 1280 x 720 p /120 Hz 16:9 VIC = 48, 720 x 480 p /120 Hz 4:3 VIC = 49, 720 x 480 p /120 Hz 16:9 Audio Data Block Basic Audio: 2 Channel L-PCM 32, 44.1, 48 khz Sampling Frequency at 16, 20 or 24 bits per sample 1 The default EDID can be overwritten to include a broad range of features, including HDMI mode, based on installation requirements About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 10-Sept-12. AMX.com fax

62 DATA SHEET Enova DGX DVI Output Board AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO-DVI (FG ) Overview The AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO-DVI is a HDCP compliant DVI output board for the Enova DGX 16 and Enova DGX 32. It has four DVI connections per board and supports HDMI or DVI signals. Like all output boards for the Enova DGX, the AVS- ENOVADGX32-VO-DVI features SmartScale Technology which outputs video that is perfectly scaled for each connected display, eliminating the integration challenges that can occur when sources and displays have different optimal resolutions. Common Applications The Enova DGX DVI Output Board is ideal for applications where destinations are located within 15 meters of the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher, eliminating the need for external receivers. Integrated SmartScale Technology provides optimal display resolution for each connected display. Features InstaGate Pro Technology Easily integrate HDMI/HDCP into system designs and enjoy hassle-free matrix switching to all compliant displays. No tools, no delays, and no key constraints it just works SmartScale Technology Automatically responds to the display's declared EDID information and scales the video to the best resolution and video parameters for that display without manual setup; this prevents inferior video quality when sources are forced to lower resolutions to support the least capable display in the system Hot Swappable Easily add or replace I/O boards at any time after deployment - the system automatically recognizes the new configuration and activates the boards 3D Support* Pass through latest video formats including 3D and Deep Color Surround Sound Support Pass through high definition surround sound including Dolby Digital, DTS and up to 8-channel L-PCM at 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192 khz *This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update Specifications DVI w/hdcp Compatible Formats DVI, HDCP 2012 AMX. All rights reserved.

63 Signal Type Support DVI-D (Single Link) HDMI (With DVI Cable Adapter) HDMI Mode Support DVI boards can be run in HDMI mode with an EDID update which will provide full HDMI functionality and board specifications Data Rate (Max) 4.95 Gbps / 6.75 Gbps 6.75 Gbps supported when the DVI Output Board is used in HDMI mode and Output Board Scaler or DXLink HDMI Rx Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Pixel Clock (Max) 165 MHz Progressive Resolution Support 480p up to 60 Hz If input is interlaced, all scaled outputs will deinterlace video to a progressive resolution format. If in scaler Bypass mode interlaced input will pass through unaltered Output Re-clocking Yes Output Scaling SmartScale or manual configuration or Bypass SmartScale Output Resolution Support All resolutions between 480p and 1920 x 60 Hz via automatic SmartScale query of the display's declared EDID Detailed Timing Definition Color Depth Support 24-bit Color Space Support RGB 4:4:4; YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2 Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4 Local Audio Support Yes, Insertion and/or Extraction of 2 CH L-PCM selectable by channel DDC/EDID Support EDID provided by Enova DGX 16/32 EDID is user reprogrammable HDCP Support Yes, full matrix HDCP support (includes any input to any or all outputs) Key Management System AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro Technology Key support up to 16 devices per output, independent of source device Output Voltage (Nominal) 1.0 Vpp Differential Output Rise Time / Fall Time 100 ps min ps max (20% - 80%) 0.16 UI min UI max (@ 1.65 Gbps, 20% - 80%) Output +5V DDC Pin 50 ma DVI Output Board Propagation Delay 24 ms for progressive, 48 ms for interlace Connectors 4 DVI-I Ports (DVI-D Single Link is the supported signal type) Approvals CE, FCC Class A, UL, cul, RoHS / WEEE compliant About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 10-Sept-12. AMX.com fax

64 DATA SHEET Enova TM DGX DXLink AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO-DXLink (FG ) Twisted Pair Output Board Overview The AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO-DXLINK is a HDCP compliant twisted pair cable output board for the Enova DGX 16 and Enova DGX 32. It has four connections per DXLink Output Board and is designed to transmit audio and video to DXLink Receivers while passing bi-directional control and Ethernet over one standard twisted pair cable up to 100m. DXLink Power is available from the DXLink Output Board to power DXLink Receivers. Common Applications The Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Output Board is ideal for applications where destination devices are located up to 100 meters away from the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher and need to be distributed throughout a commercial or residential environment. Features Only One Cable Send audio and video while passing control, Ethernet and power over one twisted pair cable Send HDMI signals up to 100 Meters Extend the reach of the HDMI with HDCP signals far beyond the capabilities of typical HDMI cabling Standard Twisted Pair Cable Save time and effort in installation by leveraging pre-existing cost effective twisted pair cable, see the Cabling for Success with DXLink white paper for more details Hot Swappable Easily add or replace I/O boards at any time after deployment - the system automatically recognizes the new configuration and activates the boards HDCP Compliant Additional Features Remotely Powered Receivers - DXLink Power is available from the DXLink Output Board to power DXLink Receivers 3D Support* - Pass through latest video formats including 3D and Deep Color Surround Sound Support - Pass through high definition surround sound including Dolby Digital, DTS and up to 8-channel L-PCM at 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192 khz *This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update 2012 AMX. All rights reserved.

65 Specifications Signal Transport DXLink w/hdcp Description Compatible Formats HDMI Video / Audio / Ethernet / Power and Control Future Compatible Formats USB (HID) Keyboard & Mouse * Signal Type Support DXLink DXLink Power DxLink RX units can have power supplied over twisted pair cable when connected to a DXLink Input or Output board of the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher Use the Enova DGX Configuration Tool located at AMX.com/enova to determine the power requirements of a configuration and whether any of the DXLink Transmitters or Receivers should be powered with the local power supply. The configuration tool contains instructions on how to determine power requirements. Connectors (4) RJ-45 Ports Transport Layer Throughput (Max) 10.2 Gbps Twisted Pair Cable Type Cat5e, Cat6/6e, Cat6A, Cat7 of UTP, SF/UTP, S/FTP, and F/UTP varieties** Twisted Pair Cable Length Up to 328 ft (100 m) ** Video Data Rate (Max) 4.95 Gbps / 6.75 Gbps 6.75 Gbps supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Video Pixel Clock (Max) 165 MHz / 225 MHz 225 MHz supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Progressive Resolution Support 480p up to 60 Hz Deep Color Support* 24-bit, 30-bit, 36-bit 30-bit, 36-bit supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Color Space Support RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2 3D Format Support* Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4 Yes (HDMI Primary Formats, when used with DXLink Output Boards and the DXLink HDMI RX Scaler is in Bypass mode) Frame Packing 1080p up to 24 Hz Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60 Hz Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60 Hz Top-Bottom 1080p up to 24 Hz Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60 Hz

66 Audio Format Support Audio Resolution Audio Sample Rate Local Audio Support HDCP Support CEC Support ICSP, TCP/IP, USB, IR, Control Management Approvals *This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update Side-by-Side Half 1080p up to 50/60 Hz Side-by-Side Half 720p up to 50/60 Hz Dolby TrueHD*, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio*, DTS, 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48 khz, 5.1 channels 16 bit to 24 bit 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192kHz Yes, Insertion and/or Extraction of 2 CH L-PCM selectable by channel when used in conjunction with the Enova DGX Audio Insert / Extract Board Yes, full matrix HDCP support (includes any input to any or all outputs) Key Management System AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro Technology Key support up to 16 devices per output, independent of source device None Control distribution is managed by the Enova DGX 16/32 Digital Media Switcher on-board NetLinx Master and Ethernet Switch CE, FCC Class A, UL, cul, RoHS / WEEE compliant ** Cable runs with a minimum specification of ANSI/TIE/EIA 568A-5 and ratings of 250MHz or better may be used with DXLink equipment. However, cable run topology and environmental influences can affect the overall successful distance capabilities of these runs. For successful deployments up to 100 meters without consideration to outside variables, AMX recommends the use of shielded category cable (STP) or Cat6A (or better) versions of unshielded or shielded twisted pair (UTP/STP) for DXLink runs. For more details and helpful cabling information, please contact your AMX representative for a copy of the white paper titled Cabling for Success with DXLink. About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 10-Sept-12. AMX.com fax

67 DATA SHEET Enova DGX HDMI Output Board AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO-HDMI (FG ) Overview The AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO-HDMI is a HDCP compliant HDMI output board for the Enova DGX 16 and Enova DGX 32. It has four connections and supports HDMI or DVI signals. Like all output boards for the Enova DGX, the AVS-ENOVADGX32-VO- HDMI features SmartScale Technology which outputs video that is perfectly scaled for each connected display, eliminating the integration challenges that can occur when sources and displays have different optimal resolutions. Common Applications The Enova DGX HDMI Output Board is ideal for applications where destinations are located within 15 meters of the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher, eliminating the need for external receivers. Integrated SmartScale Technology provides optimal display resolution for each connected display. Features InstaGate Pro Technology Easily integrate HDMI/HDCP into system designs and enjoy hassle-free matrix switching to all compliant displays. No tools, no delays, and no key constraints it just works SmartScale Technology Automatically responds to the display's declared EDID information and scales the video to the best resolution and video parameters for that display without manual setup; this prevents inferior video quality when sources are forced to lower resolutions to support the least capable display in the system Hot Swappable Video Input / Output Boards Easily add or replace I/O boards at any time after deployment - the system automatically recognizes the new configuration and activates the boards Surround Sound Support Pass through high definition surround sound including Dolby Digital, DTS and up to 8-channel L-PCM at 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192kHz Specifications HDMI w/hdcp Compatible Formats Signal Type Support Data Rate (Max) Description HDMI, HDCP, DVI HDMI DVI-D (Single Link With HDMI Cable Adapter) 4.95 Gbps / 6.75 Gbps 2012 AMX. All rights reserved.

68 6.75 Gbps supported when the HDMI Output Scaler or DXLink Rx Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Pixel Clock (Max) 165 MHz / 225 MHz 225 MHz supported when the HDMI Output Scaler or DXLink Rx Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Progressive Resolution Support 480p up to 60 Hz If input is interlaced, all scaled outputs will deinterlace video to a progressive resolution format. If in scaler Bypass mode interlaced input will pass through unaltered Output Re-clocking Yes Output Scaling SmartScale, or optional manual configuration, or optional Bypass SmartScale Output Resolution Support All resolutions between 480p and 1920 x 60 Hz via automatic SmartScale query of the display's declared EDID Detailed Timing Definition Deep Color Support* 24-bit, 30-bit, 36-bit 30-bit and 36-bit supported when the HDMI Output Scaler or DXLink Rx Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Color Space Support RGB 4:4:4; YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2 Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4 3D Format Support* Yes (HDMI Primary Formats) Frame Packing 1080p up to 24 Hz Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60 Hz Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60 Hz Top-Bottom 1080p up to 2 4Hz Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60 Hz Side-by-Side Half 1080p up to 50/60 Hz Side-by-Side Half 720p up to 50/60 Hz 3D supported when the HDMI Output Scaler or DXLink Rx Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less Audio Format Support Dolby TrueHD*, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio*, DTS, 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48 khz, 5.1 channels Audio Resolution 16 bit to 24 bit Audio Sample Rate 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz, 96 khz, 192kHz Local Audio Support Yes, Insertion and/or Extraction of 2 CH L-PCM selectable by channel HDCP Support Yes, full matrix HDCP support (includes any input to any or all outputs) Key Management System AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro Technology Key support up to 16 devices per output, independent of source device CEC Support None Output Voltage (Nominal) 1.0 Vpp Differential Output Rise Time / Fall Time 100 ps min ps max (20% - 80%) 0.16 UI min UI max (@ 1.65 Gbps, 20% - 80%) Output +5V DDC Pin 50mA max per output port Connectors 4 HDMI Type A Female Ports HDMI Output Board Propagation Delay 24 ms for progressive, 48 ms for interlace, 5 us when in Bypass mode

69 HDMI Audio Synchronization Approvals * This feature will be available upon release of a future firmware update Progressive and Interlace Video 60Hz frame rate: Audio is actively delayed to match video within 8ms leading or lagging CE, FCC Class A, UL, cul, RoHS / WEEE compliant About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 10-Sept-12. AMX.com fax

70 axb-midi midi interface The versatile AXB-MIDI can receive data from two independent MIDI IN A and MIDI IN B ports to provide automated control of audio mixers, routers, and other MIDI-compatible devices. MIDI IN A and IN B are combined to THRU and OUT, and can be re-patched under software control. Internallygenerated MIDI commands are sent to OUT. MIDI bus activity can be monitored from four front-panel LED indicators. The MIDI Interface can extend control up to 3,000 feet using the AXlink data/power bus. The optional AC-RK Accessory Rack Kit is available for rack mounting.

71 axb-midi midi interface AXB-MIDI (FG5913) Receives two MIDI IN data streams Transmits system-generated MIDI commands to MIDI OUT Combines data from MIDI IN A and MIDI IN B into the MIDI THRU and OUT (default setting) Repatches MIDI IN commands under software control to THRU, OUT, and the AXlink data/power bus Axcess device for pass-through and control of Musical Digital Interface (MIDI) protocol signals Acts a a MIDI matrix switc[her Decodes and encodes MIDI protocol signals and routes the signals according to the programming within an Axcess Central Controller Mounts in equipment rack with optional AC-RK Accessory Rack Kit POWER VDC DIMENSIONS (HWD) 1.51" x 5.55" x 5.45" (3.84 cm x cm x cm) ENCLOSURE Metal with black matte finish INPUT BUFFER 3,072 bytes OUTPUT BUFFER (AXLINK) 6,143 bytes FRONT PANEL DIP SWITCH 8-position DIP switch sets the AXlink address for the MIDI Baud rate settings are: ,400 (bps) (default) LEDS AXlink: Green LED lights to indicate that the AXB-MIDI is operational and interfacing with the Central Controller (when blinking once per second). IN A LED: Red LED lights to indicate that there is MIDI data present on the IN A connector. IN B LED: Red LED lights to indicate that there is MIDI data present on the IN B connector. THRU LED: Red LED lights to indicate MIDI A/B signal passing through without any changes. OUT LED: Red LED lights to indicate MIDI data is being transmitted through the OUT connector (after the AXB-MIDI receives AXlink control commands or MIDI signals from the Central Controller). MAX. LENGTH OF DATA PACKETS 64 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 12 VDC power supply (PS2.8) Five-pin DIN MIDI cable AC-RK Accessory Rack Kit (Module) WEIGHT 1 lb. 5 oz (488 grams) REAR PANEL MIDI CONNECTORS Four 5--pin (female) DIN MIDI connectors (IN A, INB, THRU, and OUT) PWR CONNECTOR 4-pin (male) green captive-wire connector for AXlink control signaling and 12 VDC power from the Central Controller [141.0 MM] [141.0 MM] [138.4 MM] MM] [38.4 MM] MM] AXB-MIDI (Front) IN A IN B THRU OUT AXB-MIDI (Rear) AXB-MIDI (Top) ARGENTINA AUSTRALIA BELGIUM BRAZIL CANADA CHINA ENGLAND FRANCE GERMANY GREECE HONG KONG INDIA INDONESIA ITALY JAPAN LEBANON MALAYSIA MEXICO NETHERLANDS NEW ZEALAND PHILIPPINES PORTUGAL RUSSIA SINGAPORE SPAIN SWITZERLAND THAILAND TURKEY USA ATLANTA BOSTON CHICAGO CLEVELAND DALLAS DENVER INDIANAPOLIS LOS ANGELES MINNEAPOLIS PHILADELPHIA PHOENIX PORTLAND SPOKANE TAMPA 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX fax GND AXM AXP PWR AXlink 2006 AMX. All rights reserved. AMX and the AMX logo are all trademarks of AMX. AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time.

72 DATA SHEET 10.1 Modero X Series Wall Mount Touch Panel MXD-1000-P (FG ) Portrait Wall Mount Touch Panel MXD-1000-L (FG ) Landscape Wall Mount Touch Panel Overview The Modero X Series is the most elegant family of interfaces designed specifically for dedicated room control. This new generation of touch panels is built for usability offering edge-to-edge capacitive touch glass with multi-touch capabilities. It features advanced technology empowering users to operate AV equipment seamlessly, while providing the ultimate in audio and video quality. The distinctive appearance will complement even the most sophisticated meeting facilities and homes. With a lightning fast processor, brilliant graphics and enhanced capabilities, the Modero X Series is the control surface that simply delivers more. Common Applications The MXD-1000 is ideal for boardrooms, conference rooms or auditoriums where a control surface is needed to provide access to key functions. In residences, it is perfect for kitchens, home theaters or home offices where it can be used to manage systems throughout the house. Features Latest Communication Technologies Supports Near Field Communication (NFC) - short-range wireless technologies that deliver peer-to-peer communication by 'sharing, pairing and transaction' between RF devices like exchanging data/identities Enhanced Usability External phone connections via Bluetooth or USB and HD video streaming 2012 AMX. All rights reserved.

73 Graphic Leaps & Bounds The Modero X Series features intuitive UI functionality including: gesturing, swiping, dynamic reordering and enhanced animation capabilities Perfect From Any Angle Includes In-Plane Switching (IPS), the latest technology in popular tablet/mobile devices that delivers the widest viewing angles and the most accurate color reproduction on the market Dealer Benefits Attract More Corporate Customers - The elegant design and simple beauty of the Modero X Series will create demand from both new and current customers Address Unique Requirements With edge-to-edge glass and capacitive touch, the Modero X Series Touch Panels provide dealers with a control surface that is unobtrusive and simple to use Differentiate Yourself The Modero X Series offers design and technology features unmatched in the industry Customer Benefits Simple to Use Interfaces The capacitive multi-touch and gesture-based screen makes it easy for anyone to operate sophisticated meeting room or home theater equipment Range of Sizes The contemporary design with edge-to-edge glass is available in 4.3", 7", 10.1" as well as 19.4" and 20.3" panoramic sizes for applications in any room Choose Horizontal or Vertical Orientation - The The 10.1" Modero X Series Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel has models engineered to mount horizontally or vertically giving design flexibility for specific applications such as room scheduling Specifications TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY Display Type TFT Active Matrix Color LCD with In plane Switching Technology (IPS) Display Size (WH) Landscape: 9.9" x 6.7" (252 mm x 170 mm), Portrait: 6.7" x 9.9" (170 mm x 252 mm), 12.0" (304 mm) diagonal Viewable Area (WH) Landscape: 8.5" x 5.3" (217mm x 136mm), Portrait: 5.3" x 8.5" (136 mm x 217 mm), 10.1" (257mm) diagonal Resolution (WH) Landscape: 1280x800, Portrait: 800x1280 Aspect Ratio (WH) Landscape: 16:9, Portrait: 9:16 Brightness 400 cd/m2 Contrast Ratio 700:1 Color Depth 264K colors Illumination LED Touch Overlay Projected Capacitive, multi-touch support, 3 simultaneous max Viewing Angle Vertical ± 89, Horizontal ± 89 MEMORY SDRAM Flash Maximum Project Size 512 MB 4 GB 2.4 GB flash available to user

74 COMMUNICATIONS ETHERNET 10/100 port, RJ-45 connector. Supported IP and IP- Based Protocols: UCP, TCP, ICMP, ICSP, IGMP,DHCP, Telnet, FTP, DNS, RFB (for VNC), HTTP USB (2) USB host 2.0, Type A ports (1 with limited physical access requiring right angle connection): Firmware upgrade, touch panel file transfer, JPEG image viewer, HID peripherals, USB audio output for headsets (1) Micro-USB device port: video output from onboard camera (landscape touch panel only), USB audio from on-board microphone to host device Near Field Communication (NFC) Supports standards ISO/IEC 15693, ISO/IEC 14443A, ISO/IEC 14443B; Unique Identifier (UID), typ range =.25", max =.5" Bluetooth HID Profile v1.1, keyboard/mouse support only, requires MXA-BT Bluetooth USB Adapter for Modero X Series (FG ) VIDEO Supported Video Codecs, Landscape Model (FG ) MPEG-2-TS: H.264 HP@L4, AAC-LC up to 720p at 25 fps (encode/decode) Supported Video Codecs, Portrait Model (FG ) MJPEG up to 720p at 25 fps (decode only) Supported Video Transport Streams MPEG-TS for MPEG2 and H.264; HTTP for MJPEG Max Number of Active Video Streams Portrait: One decode, Landscape: One decode plus one encode Video Conferencing, Landscape Model Only (FG ) External application using on-board camera and microphone through Micro-USB connection Video Output, Landscape Model Only (FG ) Camera video output: h.264, up to 720p@25 fps via Micro-USB port only (controlled by host device) AUDIO Microphone -42dB +- 3dB sensitivity FET microphone Speakers 4 ohm, 2 Watt, 300Hz cutoff frequency Supported Audio Codecs MP2 Layer I and II, MP3 (8 khz, khz, 12 khz, 16 khz, khz, 24 khz, 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz) AAC-LC (8 khz, 96 khz) G.711 with μlaw (VoIP encode/decode at 8kHz) Audio Output USB Audio out Micro-USB port only (controlled by host device) File Formats WAV, MP3 (as part of touch panel file only - no USB storage) Intercom Full Duplex VoIP, SIP v2.0 (supported with AMX-CSG)

75 GRAPHICS ENGINE AMX G4 G4 enhanced feature set supporting multi-touch and gestures, scrolling, transitions - See TPD4 Operations Guide for more information EMBEDDED APPLICATIONS Remote Management Conferencing VNC Server, G4 Web Control, AMX Resource Management Suite Audio (full duplex intercom) FRONT PANEL COMPONENTS Light Sensor Proximity Detector Camera, Landscape Model Only (FG ) LED indicators, Landscape Model Only (FG ) Sleep Button Photosensitive light detector for automatic adjustment of the panel brightness Max range = ~3', typ range = ~1', FOV = ~10 degrees HD 720p camera for video conferencing/video chat support Camera active indicator (models with camera only) Sleep button to activate sleep mode and powering off. Also provides access to setup pages (can be disabled) CONNECTIONS Ethernet 10/100 port, RJ-45 connector USB (2) USB host 2.0, Type A ports (1) Micro-USB device port Power PoE (Power over Ethernet), 802.3af, class 3 ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature (Operating) 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C) Temperature (Storage) 4 F to 140 F ( 20 C to 60 C) Humidity (Operating) 20% to 85% RH Humidity (Storage) 5% to 85% RH Power ( Heat ) Dissipation On: 21.3 BTU/hr Standby: 10.6 BTU/hr GENERAL Dimensions (HWD) Landscape: 6 11/16" x 9 7/8" x 2 5/8" (171 mm x 252 mm x 67 mm), Portrait: 9 7/8" x 6 11/16" x 2 5/8" (252 mm x 171 mm x 67 mm) Weight Power Consumption 2.0 lbs (0.91 Kg) Full-On: 8 W (max.) Standby: 3.2 W

76 Start-Up Inrush Current External Power Supply Required Certifications Included Accessories Optional Accessories Shutdown: 1 W Not applicable due to PoE standard AMX recommends using one of these AMX approved PoE power supplies (not included): PS-POE-AF-TC, PoE Injector, 802.3AF Compliant (FG423-83) NXA-ENET8-2POE, Gigabit PoE Ethernet Switch (FG ) FCC Part 15 Class B C-Tick CISPR 22 Class B CE EN Class B and EN CB Scheme IEC IC IEC/EN UL RoHS MXA-USB-C, USB Port Cover Kit, Modero X Series Touch Panel (FG ) MXA-CLK, Modero X Series Cleaning Kit (FG ) MXA-MP, Modero X Series Multi Preview (FG ) MXA-MPL, Modero X Series Multi Preview Live (FG ) PS-POE-AF-TC, PoE Injector, 802.3AF Compliant (FG423-83) CB-MXP10, Rough-In Box and Cover Plate for Modero X Series Touch Panel, 10" (FG039-17) MXA-BT Bluetooth USB Adapter for Modero X Series (FG ) MXA-HST, Bluetooth Handset for Modero X Series Touch Panels MXA-CLK, Modero X Series Cleaning Kit (FG ) NXA-ENET8-2POE, Gigabit PoE Ethernet Switch (FG ) CSG, Communications Gateway (FG , -02, -03)

77 About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 31-Aug-12. AMX.com fax

78 DATA SHEET 10.1 Modero X Series Tabletop Touch Panel MXT-1000 (FG ) Overview The Modero X Series is the most elegant family of interfaces designed specifically for dedicated room control. This new generation of touch panels is built for usability offering edge-to-edge capacitive touch glass with multi-touch capabilities. It features advanced technology empowering users to operate AV equipment seamlessly, while providing the ultimate in audio and video quality. The distinctive appearance will complement even the most sophisticated meeting facilities and homes. With a lightning fast processor, brilliant graphics and enhanced capabilities, the Modero X Series is the control surface that simply delivers more. Common Applications The MXT-1000 is ideal for boardrooms, conference rooms or auditoriums where a control surface is needed to provide access to key functions. In residences, it is perfect for kitchens, home theaters or home offices where it can be used to manage systems throughout the house. Features Latest Communication Technologies Supports Near Field Communication (NFC) - short-range wireless technologies that deliver peer-to-peer communication by 'sharing, pairing and transaction' between RF devices like exchanging data/identities Enhanced Usability External phone connections via Bluetooth or USB and HD video streaming Graphic Leaps & Bounds The Modero X Series features intuitive UI functionality including: gesturing, swiping, dynamic reordering and enhanced animation capabilities Perfect From Any Angle Includes In-Plane Switching (IPS), the latest technology in popular tablet/mobile devices that delivers the widest viewing angles and the most accurate color reproduction on the market 2012 AMX. All rights reserved.

79 Dealer Benefits Attract More Corporate Customers - The elegant design and simple beauty of the Modero X Series will create demand from both new and current customers Address Unique Requirements With edge-to-edge glass and capacitive touch, the Modero X Series Touch Panels provide dealers with a control surface that is unobtrusive and simple to use Differentiate Yourself The Modero X Series offers design and technology features unmatched in the industry Customer Benefits Simple to Use Interfaces The capacitive multi-touch and gesture-based screen makes it easy for anyone to operate sophisticated meeting room or home theater equipment Range of Sizes The contemporary design with edge-to-edge glass is available in 4.3", 7", 10.1" as well as 19.4" and 20.3" panoramic sizes for applications in any room Sleek, Low-Profile Design The Modero X Series is engineered to sit perfectly on a table without obstructing views Specifications TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY Display Type TFT Active Matrix Color LCD with In plane Switching Technology (IPS) Display Size (WH) Landscape: 9.9" x 6.7" (252 mm x 170 mm), 12.0" (304 mm) diagonal Viewable Area (WH) Landscape: 8.5" x 5.3" (217mm x 136mm), 10.1" (257mm) diagonal Resolution (WH) Landscape: 1280x800 Aspect Ratio (WH) Landscape: 16:9 Brightness 400 cd/m2 Contrast Ratio 700:1 Color Depth 264K colors Illumination LED Touch Overlay Projected capacitive, multi-touch support, 3 simultaneous max Viewing Angle Vertical ± 89, Horizontal ± 89 MEMORY SDRAM Flash Maximum Project Size 512 MB 4 GB 2.4 GB flash available to user COMMUNICATIONS ETHERNET USB 10/100 port, RJ-45 connector. Supported IP and IP- Based Protocols: UCP, TCP, ICMP, ICSP, IGMP,DHCP, Telnet, FTP, DNS, RFB (for VNC), HTTP (2) USB host 2.0, Type A ports (1 with limited physical access requiring right angle connection): Firmware

80 upgrade, touch panel file transfer, JPEG image viewer, HID peripherals, USB audio output for headsets (1) Micro-USB device port: video output from onboard camera (landscape touch panel only), USB audio from on-board microphone to host device Near Field Communication (NFC) Supports standards ISO/IEC 15693, ISO/IEC 14443A, ISO/IEC 14443B; Unique Identifier (UID), typ range =.25", max =.5" Bluetooth HID Profile v1.1, keyboard/mouse support only, requires MXA-BT Bluetooth USB Adapter for Modero X Series (FG ) VIDEO Supported Video Codecs Supported Video Transport Streams Max Number of Active Video Streams Video Output Video Conferencing MPEG2-TS: MPEG-2 Main Level up to 720p at 25 fps (decode only) MPEG-2-TS: H.264 HP@L4, AAC-LC up to 720p at 25 fps (encode/decode) MJPEG up to 720p at 25 fps (decode only) MPEG-TS for MPEG2 and H.264; HTTP for MJPEG One decode plus one encode Camera video output: h.264, up to 720p@25 fps via Micro-USB External application using on-board camera and microphone through Micro-USB connection AUDIO Microphone -42dB +- 3dB sensitivity FET microphone Speakers 4 ohm, 2 Watt, 300Hz cutoff frequency Supported Audio Codecs MP2 Layer I and II, MP3 (8 khz, khz, 12 khz, 16 khz, khz, 24 khz, 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz) AAC-LC (8 khz, 96 khz) Audio Output File Formats Intercom G.711 with μlaw (VoIP encode/decode at 8kHz) USB Audio out Micro-USB port only (controlled by host device) WAV, MP3 (as part of touch panel file only - no USB storage) Full Duplex VoIP, SIP v2.0 (supported with AMX-CSG) GRAPHICS ENGINE AMX G4 G4 enhanced feature set supporting multi-touch and gestures, scrolling, transitions - See TPD4 Operations Guide for more information

81 EMBEDDED APPLICATIONS Remote Management Conferencing VNC Server, G4 Web Control, AMX Resource Management Suite Audio (full duplex intercom) FRONT PANEL COMPONENTS Light Sensor Proximity Detector Camera LED Indicators Sleep Button Photosensitive light detector for automatic adjustment of the panel brightness Max range = ~3', typ range = ~1', FOV = ~10 degrees HD 720p camera for video conferencing/video chat support Camera active indicator (models with camera only) Sleep button to activate sleep mode and powering off. Also provides access to setup pages (can be disabled) CONNECTIONS Ethernet 10/100 port, RJ-45 connector through cable extension USB (2) USB host 2.0, Type A ports (1) Micro-USB device port Power PoE (Power over Ethernet), 802.3af, class 3 ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature (Operating) 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C) Temperature (Storage) 4 F to 140 F ( 20 C to 60 C) Humidity (Operating) 20% to 85% RH Humidity (Storage) 5% to 85% RH Power ( Heat ) Dissipation On: 21.3 BTU/hr Standby: 10.6 BTU/hr GENERAL Dimensions (HWD) Weight Power Consumption Start-Up Inrush Current External Power Supply Required 6 14/16" x 9 14/16" x 4 14/16" (174 mm x 252 mm x 124 mm) 3.0 lbs (1.36 Kg) Full-On: 8 W (max) Standby: 3.2 W Shutdown: 1 W Not applicable due to PoE standard AMX recommends using one of these AMX approved PoE power supplies (not included): PS-POE-AF-TC, PoE Injector, 802.3AF Compliant (FG423-83) NXA-ENET8-2POE, Gigabit PoE Ethernet Switch

82 Certifications Included Accessories Optional Accessories (FG ) FCC Part 15 Class B C-Tick CISPR 22 Class B CE EN Class B and EN CB Scheme IEC IC IEC/EN UL RoHS MXA-USB-C, USB Port Cover Kit, Modero X Series Touch Panel (FG ) 3/4" Mini-Grommet (FG570-01) MXA-CLK, Modero X Series Cleaning Kit (FG ) MXA-MP, Modero X Series Multi Preview (FG ) MXA-MPL, Modero X Series Multi Preview Live (FG ) PS-POE-AF-TC, PoE Injector, 802.3AF Compliant (FG423-83) HPG-10-10K, 3/4" Mini-Grommet, 10-Pack (FG K) MXA-BT Bluetooth USB Adapter for Modero X Series (FG ) MXA-HST, Bluetooth Handset for Modero X Series Touch Panels (FG ) MXA-CLK, Modero X Series Cleaning Kit (FG ) NXA-ENET8-2POE, Gigabit PoE Ethernet Switch (FG ) CSG, Communications Gateway (FG , -02, -03)

83 About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 30-Aug-12. AMX.com fax

84 DATA SHEET 19.4 Modero X Series Panoramic Tabletop Touch Panel MXT-1900L-PAN (FG ) Overview See more and do more with the most elegant interface designed specifically for dedicated room control. The Modero X Series Touch Panels provide several industry firsts including a beautiful, panoramic capacitive multi-touch screen that provides users access to multiple applications with minimal navigation. It is hardware-ready for support of Near Field Communication (NFC) Technology to allow personalization of the user experience and productivity enhancing capabilities through integration with NFC capable personal devices. The distinctive, low-profile design is engineered to sit perfectly on a table without obstructing views. Modero X Series is the control surface that simply delivers more. Common Applications The MXT-1900L-PAN is ideal for boardrooms, conference rooms or auditoriums where a panoramic control surface is needed to provide access to multiple functions simultaneously while remaining elegantly unobtrusive. In residences, it is perfect for kitchens, home theaters or home offices where the panoramic control surface can be used to manage systems throughout the house. Features Panoramic Control Surface Combined with the new PanTastic UI, the panoramic touch panels take the user experience to a whole new level with an impressive control surface to perform activities much in the same way you use a computer multi-tasking with dedicated spaces Latest Communication Technologies HD video chat and conferencing using integrated camera (tabletop and landscape versions only) and supports Near Field Communication (NFC) short-range wireless technologies that deliver peer-to-peer communication by 'sharing, pairing and transaction' between RF devices like exchanging data/identities Enhanced Usability External phone connections via Bluetooth or USB and HD video streaming 2012 AMX. All rights reserved.

85 Graphic Leaps & Bounds The Modero X Series includes some striking new intuitive UI functionality including: gesturing, swiping, dynamic reordering and enhanced animation capabilities Perfect From Any Angle Includes In-Plane Switching (IPS), the latest technology in popular tablet/mobile devices that delivers the widest viewing angles and the most accurate color reproduction on the market Dealer Benefits Attract More Corporate Customers - The elegant design and simple beauty of the Modero X Series will create demand from both new and current customers Address Unique Requirements With a panoramic profile, the Modero X Series provides dealers with a solution for unique uses where multiple applications must be viewed simultaneously Differentiate Yourself The Modero X Series offers design and technology features unmatched in the industry Customer Benefits Multi-Task Capability The contemporary design provides a large control surface, which allows multiple views for different activities such as presenting, controlling and previewing Simple to Use Interfaces The capacitive multi-touch screen combined with intuitive user-interfaces makes it easy for anyone to operate sophisticated meeting room equipment Sleek, Low-Profile Design - The Modero X Series is engineered to sit perfectly on a table without obstructing views Specifications TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY Display Type TFT Active Matrix Color LCD with In-plane Switching Technology (IPS) Display Size (WH) Landscape: 20.4" x 6.9" (519 mm x 175 mm), 20.4" (518 mm) diagonal Viewable Area (WH) Landscape: 18.7" x 5.9" (475 mm x 151 mm), 19.4" (493 mm) diagonal Resolution (WH) Landscape: 1920x530 Aspect Ratio (WH) Landscape: 18:5 Brightness 350 cd/m2 Contrast Ratio 1000:1 Color Depth 16.7M colors Illumination LED Touch Overlay Projected Capacitive, multi-touch support, 3 simultaneous max Viewing Angle Vertical ± 89, Horizontal ± 89 MEMORY SDRAM Flash Maximum Project Size 512 MB 4 GB 2.4 GB flash available to user COMMUNICATIONS ETHERNET USB 10/100 port, RJ-45 connector. Supported IP and IP- Based Protocols: UCP, TCP, ICMP, ICSP, IGMP,DHCP, Telnet, FTP, DNS, RFB (for VNC), HTTP (3) USB host 2.0, Type A ports: Firmware upgrade, Touch Panel File Transfer, JPEG Image Viewer, HID Peripherals, USB Audio Output for Headsets (1) Micro-USB device port: video output from onboard camera, USB Audio from on-board microphone

86 to host device Near Field Communication (NFC) Supports standards ISO/IEC 15693, ISO/IEC 14443A, ISO/IEC 14443B; Unique Identifier (UID), typ range =.25", max =.5" Bluetooth Mouse/Keyboard: HID Profile v1.1, requires MXA-BT Bluetooth Adapter (FG ) VIDEO Handset: Hands Free Profile v1.5, Headset Profile v1.2, requires MXA-BT Bluetooth Adapter (FG ) and MXA-HST Bluetooth Handset (FG ) Supported Video Codecs MPEG2-TS: MPEG-2 Main Level up to 720p at 25 fps (decode only) MPEG-2-TS: H.264 High 4, AAC-LC up to 720p at 25 fps (encode/decode) Supported Video Transport Streams Max Number of Active Video Streams Video Output Video Conferencing MJPEG up to 720p at 25 fps (decode only) MPEG-TS for MPEG2 and H.264; HTTP for MJPEG One decode plus one encode Camera video output: H.264, up to fps via Micro-USB port only (controlled by host device) Panel-to-panel and video chat AUDIO Microphone -42dB +- 3dB sensitivity FET microphone Speakers 4 ohm, 2 Watt, 300Hz cutoff frequency Supported Audio Codecs MP2 Layer I and II, MP3 (8 khz, khz, 12 khz, 16 khz, khz, 24 khz, 32 khz, 44.1 khz, 48 khz) AAC-LC (8 khz, 96 khz) Audio Output File Formats Intercom G.711 with μlaw (VoIP encode/decode at 8kHz) USB audio out USB port (head/hand set support) WAV, MP3 (as part of touch panel file only - no USB storage) Full Duplex VoIP, SIP v2.0 (supported with AMX-CSG) GRAPHICS ENGINE AMX G4 G4 enhanced feature set supporting multi-touch and gestures, scrolling, transitions - See TPD4 Operations Guide for more information EMBEDDED APPLICATIONS Remote Management Video Conferencing Audio Conferencing VNC Server, G4 Web Control, AMX Resource Management Suite Panel-to-panel and video chat Audio (full duplex intercom) FRONT PANEL COMPONENTS Light Sensor Photosensitive light detector for automatic adjustment of the panel brightness

87 Proximity Detector Camera LED Indicators Sleep Button Max range = ~3', typ range = ~1', FOV = ~10 degrees HD 720p camera for video conferencing/video chat support Camera active indicator Sleep button to activate sleep mode and powering off. Also provides access to setup pages (can be disabled) CONNECTIONS Ethernet USB Power 10/100 port, RJ-45 connector (3) USB host 2.0, Type A ports (1) Micro USB device port 2 pin, locking 3.5mm Phoenix connector ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature (Operating) 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C) Temperature (Storage) 4 F to 140 F ( 20 C to 60 C) Humidity (Operating) 20% to 85% RH Humidity (Storage) 5% to 85% RH Power ( Heat ) Dissipation On: BTU/hr, Standby: 10.6 BTU/hr GENERAL Dimensions (HWD) 7" x 20 3/8" x 5 5/16" (177 mm x 519 mm x 135 mm) Weight 9.4 lbs (4.26 Kg) Power Consumption Full-On: 32W (12 VDC, 2.7 A), Standby: 3.10 W (12 VDC, 0.3 A) Start-Up Inrush Current 40 A for 80 μsec External Power Supply Required Requires one of these AMX power sources (not included): PSN4.4 Power Supply, 4.4 A, 3.5 mm Phoenix, 13.5 VDC (FG423-45) MXA-MPL Modero X Series Multi Preview Live (FG ) MXA-MP Modero X Series Multi Preview (FG ) Certifications FCC Part 15 Class B C-Tick CISPR 22 Class B CE EN Class B and EN CB Scheme IEC IC IEC/EN RoHS/WEEE compliant Included Accessories Locking 2-pin Phoenix mate ( SA) MXA-USB-C, USB Port Cover Kit, Modero X Series Touch Panel (FG ) HPG-10-10K, 3/4 Mini-Grommet (FG570-01) MXA-CLK, Modero X Series Cleaning Kit (FG ) Optional Accessories MXA-MP, Modero X Series Multi Preview (FG ) MXA-MPL, Modero X Series Multi Preview Live (FG ) Power supply, 4.4A, 3.5mm Phoenix, 13.5VDC (FG423-45) HPG-10-10K, Mini-Grommet, 10-Pack (FG K) MXA-BT Bluetooth USB Adapter for Modero X Series (FG ) MXA-HST, Bluetooth Handset for Modero X Series Touch Panels (FG )

88 MXA-CLK, Modero X Series Cleaning Kit (FG ) MXA-USB-C, USB Port Covers for the Modero X Series Touch Panels (FG ) CSG, Communications Gateway (FG , -02, -03) About AMX AMX hardware and software solutions simplify the implementation, maintenance, and use of technology to create effective environments. With the increasing number of technologies and operating platforms at work and home, AMX solves the complexity of managing this technology with reliable, consistent and scalable systems. Our award-winning products span control and automation, system-wide switching and audio/video signal distribution, digital signage and technology management. They are implemented worldwide in conference rooms, homes, classrooms, network operation / command centers, hotels, entertainment venues, broadcast facilities, and more AMX. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change. Revised 13-Sept-12. AMX.com fax

89 NI-2100 DATA SHEET NetLinx Controllers NI-2100 NetLinx Integrated Controller The NI-2100 is ideal for control and automation of medium-sized rooms and multi-room applications. The NI-2100 has 64MB of onboard RAM and is Device Discovery enabled to simplify programming by standardizing device and function definitions, default touch panel button assignments, and control and feedback methods. COMMON APPLICATION The NI-2100 is a good fit for medium-sized rooms or multi-room applications in home theaters, whole homes, hotel rooms and other environments. FEATURES 3 Configurable RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485 Serial ports 4 Relays 4 IR / Serial ports 4 Digital I/O ports 2 Communication Networks: AxLink and Ethernet (TCP/IP) 404 MIPS processor speed 64 MB RAM 512 MB CompactFlash (upgradeable to 4 GB) 1 MB Non-Volatile Memory AMX Device Discovery enabled JITC Compliant

90 NI-2100 DATA SHEET NI-2100 Controller NI-2100/ICS Controller with ICSNET (FG ) (FG ) DIMENSIONS (HWD) 3 1/2 x 17 x 3 1/2 (8.8 cm x 43.2 cm x 8.8 cm) RU: 2 WEIGHT 4.50 lbs (2.04 kg) POWER VDC ENCLOSURE Metal with black matte finish MEMORY 64 MB SDRAM 1 MB of Non-volatile SRAM COMPACT FLASH 512 MB Compact Flash (upgradeable to 4 GB factory programmed) ICSHub Out: RJ-45 connector provides data to a Hub connected to the Controller (provided by ICSNet daughter card) Relay (Port 4) Digital I/O (Port 9) IR/Serial (Ports 5-8) Program Port Configuration DIP Switch: Sets the communication parameters for the Program port ID Pushbutton Ethernet Port: RJ-45 port for 10/100 Mbps communication. LEDs show communication activity, connection status, speeds, and mode information: - SPD (speed) - Yellow LED lights On when the connection speed is 100 Mbps and turns Off when the speed is 10 Mbps. - L/A (link/activity) - Green LED lights On when the Ethernet cables are connected and terminated correctly, and blinks when receiving Ethernet data packets. AxLink LED: Green LED indicates the state of the AxLink port AxLink Port: 4-pin 3.5 mm mini-phoenix (male) connector that provides data and power to external control devices Power Port: 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-phoenix (male) connector ONBOARD MASTER 404 MIPS CERTIFICATIONS FCC Part 15 Class B, CE, and IEC FRONT PANEL COMPONENTS: LINK/ACT: Green LED blinks when the Ethernet cables are connected and terminated correctly. Also blinks when receiving Ethernet data packets Status: Green LED blinks to indicate that the system is programmed and communicating properly Output: Red LED blinks when the Controller transmits data, sets channels and sends data strings, etc. Input: Yellow LED blinks when the Controller receives data from button pushes, strings, commands, channel levels, etc. RS-232/422/485 LEDs Relay LEDs IR/Serial LEDs I/O LEDs Rack-mount brackets: Provides an installation option for the Integrated Controller to be mounted into an equipment rack, when used with the Installation Kit (KA ) ENVIRONMENTAL Operating Temperature: 0 C (32 F) to 50 C (122 F) Operating Humidity: 20% to 85% RH Heat Dissipation (Typical): 28.7 BTU/hr INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-phoenix (female) PWR connector ( ) 4-pin 3.5 mm mini-phoenix (female) AxLink connector ( ) 6-pin 3.5 mm mini-phoenix female I/O connector ( ) 8-pin 3.5 mm mini-phoenix female Relay connector ( ) Two CC-NIRC IR Emitters Two removable rack ears ( ) RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES PSN A Power Supply (F423-41) PSN A Power Supply (F423-45) NXA-ICSNET - NetLinx ICSNet Communication Network Card (FG ) NXA-CF2NI - CompactFlash Upgrade (FG21116-XX) CC RS-232/422 Cables (FG ) CC-NIRC - IR Cables (FG ) REAR PANEL COMPONENTS RS-232/422/485 (Ports 1-3) ICSNet: Two RJ-45 connectors for ICSNet interface (provided by ICSNet daughter card) 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX fax

91 NI-2100 DATA SHEET 3 1/2 (8.8 cm) 3 5/8 (9.1 cm) 19 (48.3 cm) NI-2100 (Front View) 17 (43.2 cm) 3 1/2 (8.8 cm) NI-2100 (Top View) NI-2100 (Right View) WITHOUT OPTIONAL ICSNET CARD INSTALLED (Back View) WITH OPTIONAL ICSNET CARD INSTALLED (Back View) 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX fax

92 NI-700 DATA SHEET NetLinx Controllers NI-700 NetLinx Integrated Controller The NI-700 unit is geared to meet the specific control and automation needs of a single room environment, in which both price and functionality are the driving requirements. The NI-700 is configured to control a limited number of video players, projectors, lights, thermostats, and other electronic equipment. COMMON APPLICATION Ideal for single-room environments with a limited number of devices such as classrooms, conference rooms, hotel rooms and other applications. FEATURES Ultra-fast 304 MIPS processor 2 Configurable RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485 Serial Ports 1 IR/Serial Port 1 IR Receiver Port 4 Digital I/O Channels 1 Ethernet 10/100 Port 1 AxLink Connector 64 MB RAM 32 MB Flash Memory 512 KB Non-Volatile Memory AMX Device Discovery enabled JITC Compliant

93 NI-700 DATA SHEET NI-700 (FG ) DIMENSIONS (HWD) 1 9/16 x 5 9/16 x 5 1/8 (4.01 cm x cm x cm) RU: 1 WEIGHT 1.30 lbs (590 g) POWER VDC Power requirements are usage dependant ENCLOSURE Metal with black matte finish ONBOARD MASTER 304 MIPS CERTIFICATIONS FCC Part 15 Class B, CE, and IEC FRONT PANEL COMPONENTS: Program Port Configuration DIP Switch: Sets the communication parameters for the Program port IR RX LED: Red LED lights when IR data is being received via the rear IR RX port IR LED: Red LED lights during the transmission of IR or Serial data via the rear IR port I/O LEDs: Four yellow LEDs light when the rear I/O channels 1-4 are active. LED indicator for each I/O port reflects the state of that particular port Serial LEDs LINK/ACT: Green LED lights when the Ethernet cable is connected and an active link is established. This LED also blinks when receiving Ethernet data packets Status: Green LED lights when the Controller is programmed and communicating properly Output: Red LED lights when the Controller transmits data, sets channels sends data strings, etc. Input: Yellow LED lights when the Controller receives data from button pushes, strings, commands, channel levels, etc. ID Pushbutton: Sets the NetLinx ID (Device only) assignment for the device REAR PANEL COMPONENTS RS-232/422/485 (Ports 1 & 2) IR RX (Port 5) Digital I/O (Port 4) IR/Serial (Port 3) AxLink LED AxLink Port: 4-pin 3.5 mm mini-phoenix (male) connector provides data and power to external control devices Ethernet Port: RJ-45 port for 10/100 Mbps communication. LEDs show communication activity, connection status, speeds, and mode information: - SPD (speed) - Yellow LED lights On when the connection speed is 100 Mbps and turns Off when the speed is 10 Mbps. - L/A (link/activity) - Green LED lights On when the Ethernet cables are connected and terminated correctly, and blinks when receiving Ethernet data packets. Power Port ENVIRONMENTAL Operating Temperature: 0 C (32 F) to 50 C (122 F) Operating Humidity: 20% to 85% RH Heat Dissipation (Typical): 11.5 BTU/hr INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-phoenix female PWR connector ( ) 4-pin 3.5 mm mini-phoenix female connector ( ) 6-pin 3.5 mm mini-phoenix female I/O connector ( ) CC-NIRC IR Emitter RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES PSN A Power Supply (F423-41) PSN A Power Supply (F423-45) AC-RK - Accessory Rack Kit (FG515) AC-SMB - Surface Mounting Bracket (FG525) AC-PMB - Pole Mounting Bracket (FG531) CC RS-232/422 Cables (FG ) CC-NIRC - IR Cables (FG ) NI-700 (Front View) 1 9/16 (4 cm) 5 1/8 (13 cm) NI-700 (Back View) NI-700 (Left View) 5 9/16 (14.1 cm) NI-700 (Top View) 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX fax

94 netlinx control cards and net modules NetLinx Control Cards serve as flexible, modular building blocks for creating advanced control applications. Up to 12 Control Cards can be inserted into the NetLinx CardFrame s front-access control slots, or supplied in a NetModule enclosure for stand-alone operation. Control Cards can meet a wide variety of control needs, including multi-port RS- 232/422/485, IR/Serial, Input/Output, Relay, Voltage, and Volume control. Every Control Card includes a full array of LED status indicators at the front, easily viewable from the NetLinx enclosure s translucent cover. Whether in a CardFrame or NetModule, NetLinx Control Cards operate directly on the high-speed ICSNet data bus.

95 netlinx control cards and net modules DUAL COM PORTS, RS-232/422/485 Provides 2 RS-232/422/485 data control ports and front-panel feedback OPERATION DATA RS-232/422/485 control ports, supports XON/XOFF, CTS/RTS, ,200 baud STATUS 2 LEDs for each channel Red LED for data TX, RTS Yellow LED for data RX, CTS Green ICSP status LED WIRING 3.5mm captive-screw terminals MODELS NXC-COM2 Dual COM Port Card NXM-COM2 Dual COM Port NetModule GND 1 RXD 2 TXD 3 CTS1 4 RTS1 5 TX1+ 6 TX1-7 RX1+ 8 RX VDC 10 GND 11 RXD2 12 TXD2 13 CTS2 14 RTS2 15 TX2+ 16 TX2-17 RX2+ 18 RX VDC 20 CH 1 TX (red) CH 1 RX (yellow) CH 2 TX (red) CH 2 RX (yellow) RELAY 10, 10 RELAYS Provides 10 isolated relays and frontpanel LED feedback OPERATION RELAY relays, 750 ma, 28 VAC/24 VDC normally open STATUS LED for each relay, Red LED shows on status, Green ICSP status LED WIRING 3.5mm captive-screw terminals MODELS NXC-REL10 Relay 10 Card Relay 1A 1 Relay 1A 2 Relay 2A 3 Relay 2B 4 Relay 3A 5 Relay 3B 6 Relay 4A 7 Relay 4B 8 Relay 5A 9 Relay 5B 10 Relay 6A 11 Relay 6B 12 Relay 7A 13 Relay 7B 14 Relay 8A 15 Relay 8B 16 Relay 9A 17 Relay 9B 18 Relay 10A 19 Relay 1 (red) Relay 2 (red) Relay 3 (red) Relay 4 (red) Relay 5 (red) Relay 6 (red) Relay 7 (red) Relay 8 (red) Relay 9 (red) Relay 10 (red) HOUSING NXF NetLinx CardFrame NXS-NMS NetModule Shell HOUSING NXF NetLinx CardFrame NXS-NMS NetModule Shell Relay 10B 20 ANALOG VOLTAGE, 4ANALOGI/O CHANNELS Provides 4 analog Input/Output channels and front-panel LED feedback Drives internal voltage or accepts external Input/Output DC voltages OPERATION INPUTS to +12 VDC, ref. to power supply GND OUTPUTS 1-4: -12 to +12 VDC, 60ma ref. to power supply GND FEEDBACK 4 Red LEDs for channel Out, 4 Yellow LEDs for channel In Green ICSP status LED JUMPERS Select output type: Single- ended bipolar and external reference Ground 1 Output 1 2 Ground 3 Output 2 4 Ground 5 Output 3 6 Ground 7 Output 4 8 Ground 9 Input 1 10 Ground 11 Input 2 12 Ground 13 Input 3 14 Ground 15 Input 4 16 Ground 17 Extnl Ref Output 18 Ground 19 Extnl Ref Input 20 CH 1 Out (red) CH 1 Input (yello CH 2 Out (red) CH 2 Input (yello CH 3 Out (red) CH 3 Input (yello CH 4 Out (red) CH 4 Input (yello VOLUME, 4 AUDIO CHANNELS Provides 4 channels of audio attenuation 100 db of volume coontrol OPERATION Inputs: 1-4, balanced or unbalanced audio Outputs: 1-4, balanced audio Status: 3 LEDs for each channel Yellow LED for raise volume Yellow LED for lower volume Red LED for muting volume Wiring: 3.5 mm captive-screw terminals MODELS NXC-VOL4 Volume Card HOUSING NXF NetLinx CardFrame NXS-NMS NetModule Shell Audio ground 1 CH1 Input+ 2 CH1 Input- 3 CH1 Output+ 4 CH1 Output- 5 Audio ground 6 CH2 Input+ 7 CH2 Input- 8 CH2 Output+ 9 CH2 Output- 10 Audio ground 11 CH3 Input+ 12 CH3 Input- 13 CH3 Output+ 14 CH3 Output- 15 Audio ground 16 CH4 Input+ 17 CH4 Input- 18 CH4 Output+ 19 CH4 Output- 20 CH1 Raise (yellow) CH1 Lower (yellow) CH1 Mute (red) CH2 Raise (yellow) CH2 Lower (yellow) CH2 Mute (red) CH3 Raise (yellow) CH3 Lower (yellow) CH3 Mute (red) CH4 Raise (yellow) CH4 Lower (yellow) CH4 Mute (red) RESOLUTION 10-bit A/D, 1024 steps WIRING 3.5mm captive-screw terminals MODELS NXC-VAI4 Analog I/O 4 Card HOUSING NXF NetLinx CardFrame NXS-NMS NetModule Shell 4-PORT IR/S, 4 IR PORTS AND 4 I/0 PORTS Provides 4 IR/Serial control ports and front-panel status feedback Includes 4 inputs for sensed IR power control OPERATION IR IR/IR Serial control ports 20 KHz-1.14 MHz INPUT I/O ports for closure or 0 5 VDC sensing, 200 ma POWER +12 VDC power for sensors CH1 Ground 1 CH1 IR Data 2 CH1 Ground 3 CH1 IR Data 4 CH1 Ground 5 CH1 IR Data 6 CH4 Ground 7 CH4 IR Data 8 Ground 9 Input 1 10 Input 2 11 Input 3 12 Input VDC CH 1 IR Out (red) CH 1 Input (yellow) CH 2 IR Out (red) CH 2 Input (yellow) CH 3 IR Out (red) CH 3 Input (yellow) CH 4 IR Out (red) CH 4 Input (yellow) INPUT 10, 10 INPUT/OUTPUT CHANNELS Provides 10 Input/Output control channels and front-panel feedback Acts as logic-level switch or input, senses high and low voltage states in voltage mode OPERATION I/O 10 I/O channels STATUS 1 LED for each channel, Yellow LED for on status, Green ICSP status LED WIRING 3.5mm captive-screw terminals MODELS NXC-I/O10 Input 10 Card HOUSING NXF NetLinx CardFrame NXS-NMS NetModule Shell CH1 Common 1 CH1 Input 2 CH2 Common 3 CH2 Input 4 CH3 Common 5 CH3 Input 6 CH4 Common 7 CH4 Input 8 CH5 Common 9 CH5 Input 10 CH6 Common 11 CH6 Input 12 CH7 Common 13 CH7 Input 14 CH8 Common 15 CH8 Input 16 CH9 Common 17 CH9 Input 18 CH10 Common 19 CH10 Input 20 CH 1 (yellow) CH 2 (yellow) CH 3 (yellow) CH 4 (yellow) CH 5 (yellow) CH 6 (yellow) CH 7 (yellow) CH 8 (yellow) CH 9 (yellow) CH10 (yellow) STATUS LEDs for each channel, Red LED for IR transmission, Yellow LED for input status, Green ICSP status LED WIRING 3.5mm captive-screw terminals MODELS NXC-IRS4 4-Port IR/S Card HOUSING NXF NetLinx CardFrame NXS-NMS NetModule Shell ARGENTINA AUSTRALIA BELGIUM BRAZIL CANADA CHINA ENGLAND FRANCE GERMANY GREECE HONG KONG INDIA INDONESIA ITALY JAPAN LEBANON MALAYSIA MEXICO NETHERLANDS NEW ZEALAND PHILIPPINES PORTUGAL RUSSIA SINGAPORE SPAIN SWITZERLAND THAILAND TURKEY USA ATLANTA BOSTON CHICAGO CLEVELAND DALLAS DENVER INDIANAPOLIS LOS ANGELES MINNEAPOLIS PHILADELPHIA PHOENIX PORTLAND SPOKANE TAMPA 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX fax

96 Installation Guide PS/N Power Supplies AMX offers four system power supplies, with several variations available: AMX PS/N Power Supplies PSN6.5 (FG423-41) With U.S. power cord. (FG423-43) Without power cord. PSN4.4 Includes 2-pin captive-wire connector and U.S. power (FG423-45) cord, with 3.2 mm captive-wire connector. PS4.4 (FG423-44) Includes U.S. power cord and barrel plug. PSN2.8 (FG423-17) Includes U.S. power cord, with 3.5mm captive-wire connector. PS2.8 (FG423-05) Includes U.S. power cord, with 5mm captive-wire connector. (FG423-11) Includes U.S. power cord and barrel plug. PS3.0 (FG ) Includes U.S. power cord and barrel plug. PSN6.5 Specifications (Cont.) Included Accessories: Optional Accessories: NOTE: The PSN6.5 replaces the (obsolete) PSN4.2 and PSN6.3 power supplies. PSN4.4 and PS4.4 Specifications Single Universal input power cord ( ) Three removable 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-phoenix connectors ( ) AC-RK Accessory Rack Kit (FG515) The PS4.4 power supply is identical to the PSN4.4 except that the PSN4.4 comes with a NetLinx compatible 2-pin captive wire connector and the PS4.4 comes with a barrel-plug. NOTE: All models use an input connector sanctioned by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). FIG. 1 shows the front and rear panels of the PSN 6.5. Barrel-plug connector (FG423-44) 2-pin captive wire connector (FG423-45) FIG. 1 PSN6.5 Power Supply PSN6.5 Specifications The PSN6.5 is a Class 1 power supply, is CSA and CE approved, and UL listed. PSN6.5 Specifications Dimensions (HWD): Weight: 1.50 x 5.55" x 9.25" (3.81 cm x cm x cm) 2.76 lbs. (1.25 kg) (without power cord). Input Voltage: VAC, 2.6A, 47~63 Hz VAC, 1.3A, 47~63 Hz Output Voltage: 13.5 VDC 6.5A Output Current: 6.5 A (continuous power output is 90 W max). Ripple and Noise: 350 mv 70% load. Protection: Over-voltage, over-current, short-circuit, transient and thermal. Switching regulated, overload protected. PWR Indicator: Green LED indicates presence of DC on the output. Connectors: Three removable 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-phoenix connectors Rear Panel Components: Input Power Cord: Enclosure: Temperature Range: Certification: Three 12 VDC power supply connectors. Standard IEC (male) jack for the power cord. 6-foot (1.83 m) IEC power cord terminated with a grounded Edison plug for AC input (U.S. only). Metal with black matte finish. 32 F F (0 C - 50 C) UL: US listed - Class 1 Power Supply CSA approved CE approved FIG. 2 PS4.4 Power Supply (showing both connectors) The PSN4.4 and PS4.4 power supplies are Class 1 power supplies; both are CSA and CE approved and UL listed. PSN4.4 and PS4.4 Specifications Dimensions (HWD): Weight: Input Voltage: Input Frequency: Input Current: Output Voltage: Output Current: Ripple and Noise: Protection: Power Indicator: Connectors: PSN4.4 PS4.4 Input Power Cord: Enclosure: 1.38" x 2.36" x 4.76" (3.5 cm x 6.0 cm x 12.1 cm) 1.1 lb. (.499 kg) % VAC Hz 1.2A MAX at 115 VAC + full load 0.6A MAX at 230 VAC + full load 13.5 VDC 4.4A MAX 150 mv full load Over-voltage, over-current, short-circuit, transient and thermal. Switching regulated, overload protected. Green LED indicates the presence of DC on the output. Mini 2-pin captive wire connector (3.5 mm). Barrel plug (see Barrel Plug Dimensions) 50 mm IEC power cord terminated with a grounded Edison plug for AC input. Molded black matte plastic.

97 PSN4.4 and PS4.4 Specifications (Cont.) Temperature Range: Certification: Included Accessories: 32 F F (0 C - 40 C) UL: US listed - Class 1 Power Supply CSA approved CE approved Single Universal input power cord ( ) PSN2.8 and PS2.8 Specifications FIG. 3 shows the PSN2.8. The PS2.8 power supply is identical to the PSN2.8, except that the PSN2.8 comes with a 3.5 mm NetLinx compatible 2-pin mini connector whereas the PS2.8 comes with a 5mm standard Axcess compatible connector. The PS2.8 also includes a spare 3.5 mm captive wire connector. PSN2.8 and PS2.8 Specifications (Cont.) Certification: UL: US listed - Class 1 Power Supply CSA approved CE approved Included Accessories: Single Universal input power cord ( ) Barrel Plug Dimensions The dimensions of the Barrel Plug used by both the PS2.8 and PS4.4 power supplies are: 2.1mm ID 5.5mm OD 9.5mm length PS3.0 Specifications FIG. 4 shows the PS3.0. The PS3.0 is a Class 1 power supply which is CE approved and UL listed. The PS3.0 uses a barrel-plug connector. FIG. 3 PSN2.8 Power Supply Note: The PS2.8 is also available with a barrel-plug (FG423-11) instead of the 2-pin captive wire connector. The PSN2.8 and PS2.8 power supplies are Class 1 power supplies; both are CSA and CE approved and UL listed. The PSN2.8 has an attached mini 2-pin captive wire connector (3.5 mm). The PS2.8 comes with both an attached 2-pin captive wire connector (5 mm) and a spare 3.5 mm captive wire connector. PSN2.8 and PS2.8 Specifications Dimensions (HWD): Weight: 1 lb. (450 g) Input Voltage: Input Frequency: Input Current: Output Voltage: Output Current: Ripple and Noise: Protection: Power Indicator: Connectors: PSN2.8 PS2.8 Input Power Cord: 4.6" x 2.5" x 1.5" (11.7 cm x 6.4 cm x 3.8 cm) % VAC Hz 0.9A MAX at 115 VAC + full load 0.6A MAX at 230 VAC + full load 13.5 VDC 2.8A (continuous power output is 35 W max). 135 mv full load Over-voltage, over-current, short-circuit, transient and thermal. Switching regulated, overload protected. Green LED indicates the presence of DC on the output. Mini 2-pin captive wire connector (3.5 mm). 2-pin captive wire connector (5.0 mm), also available with barrel plug (see Barrel Plug Dimensions) 6-foot (1.83 m) IEC power cord terminated with a grounded Edison plug for AC input. Enclosure: Molded black matte plastic, with captive 6-foot (1.83 m) output cord and IEC male input power jack. Temperature Range: 32 F F (0 C - 50 C) FIG. 4 PS3.0 Power Supply PS 3.0 Specifications Dimensions (HWD): 3.85 x 1.77" x 1.22" (9.80 cm x 4.50 cm x 3.10 cm) Weight: 0.33 lbs. (150 g) (without power cord). Input Voltage: VAC, 3.0 A, 47~63 Hz Output Voltage: 12 VDC Output Current: 3.0 A. Ripple and Noise: 200 mv (60Hz Ripple + Switching ripple and noise). Protection: Over-voltage, over-current, short-circuit, transient and thermal. Switching regulated, overload protected. PWR Indicator: Green LED indicates presence of DC on the output. Connectors: 1.3mm barrel plug, 11mm long. Input Power Cord: 6-foot (1.83 m) IEC power cord terminated with a grounded Edison plug for AC input (U.S. only). Enclosure: Metal with black matte finish. Temperature Range: Operating temperature: 32 F F (0 C - 50 C) Storage temperature: -4 F F (-20 C - 85 C) Certification: UL: US listed - Class 1 Power Supply CUL approved TUV approved FCC approved CE approved PSE approved Included Single Universal input power cord ( ) Accessories: For full warranty information, refer to the AMX Instruction Manual(s) associated with your Product(s). 5/ AMX. All rights reserved. AMX and the AMX logo are registered trademarks of AMX. AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX fax technical support REV: G

98 netlinx mini-cardframe NETLINX MINI-CARDFRAME The NetLinx Mini-CardFrame extends the control capabilities of the AMX NetLinx Control System to a remote area or location. Compatible with the NI-700, NI-2000, NI-3000 and NI-4000 controllers, the Mini-CardFrame allows the installer to add as many as four NetLinx device-specific control cards for expanding control and automation features. AVAILABLE PORTS & CARDS The Mini-CardFrame works as an extension of the NI Series, housing as many as four control cards and providing an additional number of ports to accommodate an increasing amount of integrated devices within a control system. The Mini-CardFrame can provide volume, IR/Serial and RS-232 ports to control and communicate with electronic equipment within a small meeting room. POWER OF ICSNET The Mini-CardFrame can extend control capabilities from a NetLinx system to a remote area or location by using the ICSNet data/power bus to communicate with a NetLinx unit positioned up to 1,000 feet away. In situations that call for additional control functions in separate areas of control, the Mini-CardFrame can be networked together using ICSNet Hubs that connect directly to the NetLinx Master Controller.

99 ON CARDFRAME # SLOT SLOT SLOT SLOT ICSNet PWR 12VDC netlinx mini-cardframe NXF-MINI (FG2104) Provides four series control card slots Links to other NetLinx devices over the ICSNet Installs easily into rack or shelf, or onto wall using supplied mounting brackets Accepts optional CSB bracket for cable support and wire management (431.80MM) [431.80] FRONT PANEL 1 4: Shows LED status indicators from optional NXC control cards (242.70MM) [242.70] REAR PANEL Slots 1 4: 20-pin control card connectors Device: 8-position DIP switch sets the starting address for Control Cards in the MINI CardFrame ICSNet: One RJ45 connector for ICSNet interface PWR: 2-pin jack for +12 VDC power input NXF-MINI (Top View) ENCLOSURE Metal with black matte finish NXF-MINI MOUNTING OPTIONS Rack, wall, or shelf mount DIMENSIONS (HWD) 1.75" x 17.0" x 9.56" (4.45 cm x cm x cm) (width does not include mounting ears) WEIGHT 6.2 lbs (2.8 kg) POWER 12 VDC, 25 ma minimum Additional power required as cards and accessories added Includes INCLUDED ITEMS Two mounting brackets One 2-pin PWR connector ( ) OPTIONS NetLinx Control Cards CSB Cable Support Bracket (FG517) PSN A Power Supply (FG423-41) 1.75 (44.45MM) [44.45] (482.60MM) [482.60] NXF-MINI (Front View) NXF-MINI (Rear View) NXF-MINI (Right View) ARGENTINA AUSTRALIA BELGIUM BRAZIL CANADA CHINA ENGLAND FRANCE GERMANY GREECE HONG KONG INDIA INDONESIA ITALY JAPAN LEBANON MALAYSIA MEXICO NETHERLANDS NEW ZEALAND PHILIPPINES PORTUGAL RUSSIA SINGAPORE SPAIN SWITZERLAND THAILAND TURKEY USA ATLANTA BOSTON CHICAGO CLEVELAND DALLAS DENVER INDIANAPOLIS LOS ANGELES MINNEAPOLIS PHILADELPHIA PHOENIX PORTLAND SPOKANE TAMPA 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX fax NXF-MINI AMX Corporation. All rights reserved. AMX and the AMX logo are all trademarks of AMX Corporation. AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time.

100 9/12/12 Apple - Apple TV - View technical specifications for Apple TV. What is Apple TV What s on Apple TV AirPlay Tech Specs Size and Weight Height: 0.9 inch (23 mm) Width: 3.9 inches (98 mm) Depth: 3.9 inches (98 mm) Weight: 0.6 pound 1 In the Box Apple TV Apple Remote Power cord Documentation Processor Apple single-core A5 chip System Requirements Wi-Fi (802.11a, b, g, or n) wireless network (wireless video streaming requires a, g, or n) or 10/100BASE-T Ethernet network itunes Store account for buying or renting movies and buying TV shows Netflix subscription required for streaming content Hulu Plus subscription required for streaming content For streaming media from a Mac or PC: itunes 10.6 or later; itunes Store account for Home Sharing MLB.TV subscription required to watch live and archived games NBA.com League Pass Broadband subscription required to watch live and archived games NHL GameCenter Live subscription required to watch live and archived games 1/4

101 9/12/12 Apple - Apple TV - View technical specifications for Apple TV. Ports and Interfaces HDMI 2 Optical audio 10/100BASE-T Ethernet Built-in IR receiver Micro-USB (for service and support) Wireless Wi-Fi (802.11a/b/g/n) Environmental Requirements Operating temperature: 32 to 95 F (0 to 35 C) Storage temperature: -4 to 113 F (-20 to 45 C) Relative humidity: 5% to 95% noncondensing Maximum operating altitude: 10,000 feet (3000 m) Power Built-in 6-watt universal power supply Video Formats H.264 video up to 1080p, 30 frames per second, High or Main Profile level 4.0 or lower, Baseline profile level 3.0 or lower with AAC-LC audio up to 160 Kbps per channel, 48kHz, stereo audio in.m4v,.mp4, and.mov file formats MPEG-4 video up to 2.5 Mbps, 640 by 480 pixels, 30 frames per second, Simple Profile with AAC-LC audio up to 160 Kbps, 48kHz, stereo audio in.m4v,.mp4, and.mov file formats Motion JPEG (M-JPEG) up to 35 Mbps, 1280 by 720 pixels, 30 frames per second, audio in ulaw, PCM stereo audio in.avi file format Audio Formats HE-AAC (V1), AAC (16 to 320 Kbps), protected AAC (from itunes Store), MP3 (16 to 320 Kbps), MP3 VBR, Audible (formats 2, 3, and 4), Apple Lossless, AIFF, and WAV; Dolby Digital 5.1 surround sound pass-through Photo Formats JPEG, GIF, TIFF TV Compatibility Compatible with high-definition TVs with HDMI and capable of 1080p or 720p at 2 60/50Hz, including popular models from these manufacturers: Hitachi, JVC, LG, Mitsubishi, NEC, Panasonic, Philips, Pioneer, Samsung, Sharp, Sony, Toshiba, Vizio, Westinghouse Apple TV and the Environment Apple takes a complete product life cycle approach to determining our 2/4

102 9/12/12 Apple - Apple TV - View technical specifications for Apple TV. environmental impact. Learn more Apple TV is designed with the following features to reduce its environmental impact: Brominated flame retardant-free PVC-free Meets ENERGY STAR 3.0 requirements for set-top boxes Apple and the Environment Learn more about Apple s dedication to reducing the environmental impact of our products and process. Apple Product Environmental Reports detail the environmental attributes of our products. Recycling Apple takes a holistic view of materials management and waste minimization. Learn more about how to recycle your Apple products. itunes Movies and TV Shows 3 Resolution Audio Price HD Movie 1920 x 1080 (maximum) Dolby Digital 5.1 surround sound (not all titles) Rentals from $3.99. Purchase prices vary. 4 SD Movie 720 x 480 anamorphic (maximum) Dolby Digital 5.1 surround sound (not all titles) Rentals from $2.99. Purchase prices vary. 4 HD TV Show 1920 x 1080 (maximum) Dolby Digital 5.1 surround sound (not all titles) $2.99 per episode. SD TV Show 720 x 480 anamorphic (maximum) Dolby Digital 5.1 surround sound (not all titles) $1.99 per episode. Accessories Apple HDMI to HDMI Cable The Apple HDMI to HDMI Cable lets you connect an Apple TV, Mac mini, or other HDMI device to an HDTV or A/V receiver. Both high-definition digital video and multichannel digital audio are delivered Belkin 6' Digital Toslink Optical Audio Cable with Line-Out Adapter Belkin 6' Digital Toslink Optical Audio Cable with Line-Out Adapter sends AppleCare Protection Plan The AppleCare Protection Plan provides service and support from the people who know your Apple TV best. For up to two years from the original purchase date of your Apple TV, you get direct, one-stop 3/4

103 9/12/12 Apple - Apple TV - View technical specifications for Apple TV. over this single cable for stunning picture and sound. Learn more uncorrupted audio to any A/V receiver or device. It s ideal for audiophiles who want to take full advantage of the digital output capability built into their Mac, A/V receiver, DVD player, satellite dish receiver, or cable box. Learn more access to Apple s award-winning telephone technical support and repair coverage. Learn more Shop online. Visit a store. Call Apple. Apple Store app. Order Apple TV online and have it shipped to your door free. Buy online now Buy Apple TV at the Apple Retail Store and get all your questions answered. Find a store Get answers before you buy. Call MY-APPLE to talk with a knowledgeable Specialist. Buy Apple products on the go and get the most from your visits to the Apple Retail Store. Download now Find a local authorized reseller 1. Weight varies by configuration and manufacturing process. 2. Requires HDCP when playing protected content. 3. A sustained 8-Mbit/s or faster Internet connection is recommended for viewing 1080p high-definition movies and TV shows, 6-Mbit/s or faster for viewing 720p content, and 2.5-Mbit/s or faster for standard-definition content. Internet connection speeds may vary depending on your ISP and other factors. 4. Not all movies are available for purchase. Services are not available in all countries and are subject to change. 4/4

104 Professional Microphone Accessories AT8416 MICROPHONE SHOCK MOUNT Description The Audio-Technica AT8416 shock mount effectively isolates mounted microphones from impact vibration and shock handling noise. It is intended for use with microphones mounted on lecterns, pulpits, conference tables and similar surfaces. Designed especially for UniPoint gooseneck microphones, it may be used with other lightweight microphones as well. The use of a shock mount is particularly important in any application where wide-range sound equipment is used, and where highlevel low-frequency sounds can be expected. The AT8416 shock mount system utilizes two oversize chloroprene rings, similar to rubber bands. The rings are mounted transversely. An aluminum mounting stud with 5 /8"-27 threads is held in the central cavity formed by the opposing bands, thereby floating the shock mount assembly, and isolating it from mechanical coupling to the resonating surface. A slot is provided in the mounting flange to allow a small-diameter cable to pass down the mounting hole. A cable channel secures the cable in the flush mount assembly and helps to further deaden the transmission of vibration. When properly installed, the AT8416 isolates the microphone from contact with the mounting surface, and eliminates pickup of low-frequency resonances caused by mechanical coupling. This generally allows higher sound reinforcement levels and higher gain-before-feedback. Installation 5 /8"-27 Mount: Drill a 1 3 /8" hole at the desired point in the mounting surface. Screw the base of the microphone onto the threads of the mounting stud. Drop the microphone cable down through the hole in the mounting surface, making certain the cable is captured by the slot in the mounting flange and is in place in the cable channel along the side Fig. 1 of the shock mount (Fig. 1). Leave some slack in the cable between the mic and the mounting flange; pulling the cable snug will bypass the suspension. Set the shock mount in place, with the cable slot away from the front, and secure with the three screws provided (Fig 2). Fig. 2 Plug-in Mount: Drill a 1 3 /8" hole at the desired point in the mounting surface. Run the XLRF connector of the microphone cable up through the hole. Remove the mounting stud from the AT8416 and insert the XLRF connector up through the chloroprene rings (Fig. 3). Secure the shock mount with the three screws provided (as in Fig. 2). Attach the XLRF connector to the microphone and work the connector body back down into the shock mount (Fig. 4). Fig. 3 Remove Insert Since the design of the shock mount floats the microphone, with no rigid, fixed position, take care to center the mounting stud (or connector) in the shock mount cavity. This will ensure that the microphone stands upright. If the microphone still leans to one side after installation, the mounting stud or connector can be repositioned without damage. AT8416 SPECIFICATIONS DEPTH MOUNTING FLANGE BODY DIAMETER MOUNTING FLANGE BODY MOUNTING STUD WEIGHT SUSPENSION SYSTEM Fig " (2 mm) 1.26" (32 mm) One-Year Limited Warranty 2.01" (51 mm) 1.34" (34 mm) 0.71" (18 mm) 2.5 oz (71 grams) 2 chloroprene rings Audio-Technica microphones and accessories purchased in the U.S.A. are warranted for one year from date of purchase by Audio-Technica U.S., Inc. (A.T.U.S.) to be free of defects in materials and workmanship. In event of such defect, product will be repaired promptly without charge or, at our option, replaced with a new product of equal or superior value if delivered to A.T.U.S. or an Authorized Service Center, prepaid, together with the sales slip or other proof of purchase date. Prior approval from A.T.U.S. is required for return. This warranty excludes defects due to normal wear, abuse, shipping damage, or failure to use product in accordance with instructions. This warranty is void in the event of unauthorized repair or modification. For return approval and shipping information, contact the Service Department, Audio-Technica U.S., Inc., 1221 Commerce Drive, Stow, Ohio Except to the extent precluded by applicable state law, A.T.U.S. will have no liability for any consequential, incidental, or special damages; any warranty of merchantability or fitness for particular purpose expires when this warranty expires. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may have other rights which vary from state to state. Outside the U.S.A., please contact your local dealer for warranty details. Audio-Technica U.S., Inc., 1221 Commerce Drive, Stow, Ohio Audio-Technica Limited, Old Lane, Leeds LS11 8AG England Form No B/W 1996 Audio-Technica U.S., Inc. Printed in U.S.A.

105 U857Q/U857QL CARDIOID CONDENSER QUICK-MOUNT GOOSENECK MICROPHONES Designed for high-quality sound reinforcement, professional recording and broadcasting Superior off-axis rejection for maximum gain before feedback UniGuard RFI-shielding technology offers outstanding rejection of radio frequency interference (RFI) Easy-to-adjust, rugged, small-diameter, alternating gooseneck with virtually no memory permits quick positioning into desired shape UniSteep filter provides a steep low-frequency attenuation to improve sound pickup without affecting voice quality Self-contained electronics eliminate need for external power module Accepts interchangeable elements to permit angle of acceptance from 90 to 360 Two-stage foam windscreen yields dramatically improved resistance to P-pops and other breath blasts Quick-mount design with 3-pin XLRM-type connector insert at base plugs into any standard XLRF-type surface or cable connector U857Q/U857QL SPECIFICATIONS ELEMENT POLAR PATTERN FREQUENCY RESPONSE LOW FREQUENCY ROLL-OFF OPEN CIRCUIT SENSITIVITY IMPEDANCE MAXIMUM INPUT SOUND LEVEL DYNAMIC RANGE (typical) SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO 1 PHANTOM POWER REQUIREMENTS SWITCH Polar Pattern Fixed-charge back plate permanently polarized condenser Cardioid 30-20,000 Hz 80 Hz, 18 db/octave 39 db (11.2 mv) re 1V at 1 Pa* 250 ohms 139 db SPL, 1 khz at 1% T.H.D. 115 db, 1 khz at Max SPL 70 db, 1 khz at 1 Pa* 11-52V DC, 2 ma typical Flat, roll-off WEIGHT U857Q 5.1 oz (144 g) U857QL 5.3 oz (150 g) DIMENSIONS U857Q 14.37" (365.0 mm) long U857QL BOTH 18.94" (481.0 mm) long 0.48" (12.2 mm) head diameter, 0.74" (18.9 mm) base diameter OUTPUT CONNECTOR Integral 3-pin XLRM-type OPTIONAL INTERCHANGEABLE UE-H hypercardioid (100 ); ELEMENTS UE-O omnidirectional (360 ); UE-UL UniLine (90 ) ACCESSORIES FURNISHED AT8153 two-stage foam windscreen; AT8662 shock mount In the interest of standards development, A.T.U.S. offers full details on its test methods to other industry professionals on request. *1 Pascal = 10 dynes/cm 2 = 10 microbars = 94 db SPL 1 Typical, A-weighted, using Audio Precision System One. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Frequency Response Included shock mount attenuates noise, shock and vibration transmitted through the mounting surface The U857Q stands 14.37" (365.0 mm) from the table or podium; it is also available in a 18.94" (481.0 mm) version as U857QL. The two models are identical in all other respects. Response in db The U857Q requires 11V to 52V phantom power for operation. Output from the microphone s XLRM-type connector is low impedance (Lo-Z) balanced. The signal appears across Pins 2 and 3; Pin 1 is ground (shield). Output phase is Pin 2 hot positive acoustic pressure produces positive voltage at Pin 2. An integral 80 Hz high-pass UniSteep filter provides easy switching from a flat frequency response to a low-end roll-off. The roll-off position reduces the microphone s sensitivity to popping in close vocal use. It also reduces the pickup of low-frequency ambient noise (such as traffic, air-handling systems, etc.), room reverberation and mechanically coupled vibrations. Avoid leaving the microphone in the open sun or in areas where temperatures exceed 110 F (43 C) for extended periods. Extremely high humidity should also be avoided. LEGEND 200 Hz 1 khz 5 khz 8 khz SCALE IS 5 DECIBELS PER DIVISION LEGEND Shock Mount Installation AT8662 mounting dimensions A. 1 /16" (1.5 mm) pilot holes 3 places on 2.29" (58.2 mm) circle. B. 2.0" (51.0 mm) through-hole for mount clearance C. Outside edge of flange, 2.79" (71.0 mm) diameter Drawing not actual size. Frequency in Hertz 12" or more on axis Roll-off 1. Find the center of the mounting location and mark it. Allow enough clearance to accommodate the shock mount's flange on the surface and make certain there are no physical obstructions below the desired location. 2. Using 2.0" (51.0 mm) hole saw, drill the large through-hole for the shock mount. 3. Set the shock mount into the hole and mark the location of the three mounting screw holes. Make certain to center the mount in the large hole before marking the three small mounting screw locations. 4. Using a 1 /16" (1.5 mm) drill bit, drill three pilot holes for the mounting screws. 5. After installing the microphone, assure maximum shock mounting effectiveness by providing some slack in the connecting cable. Audio-Technica U.S., Inc., 1221 Commerce Drive, Stow, Ohio Audio-Technica Limited, Old Lane, Leeds LS11 8AG England P Audio-Technica U.S., Inc. Printed in U.S.A.

106 AT8666 DESK STAND Heavy die-cast construction and non-slip bottom pads minimize coupling of surface vibration to the unit Low-profile design with low-reflectance black finish for minimum visibility Reversible XLR-type connector on the top of the desk stand The low-profile desk stand is designed to fit any gooseneck microphone with a three-pin XLRMtype output. The AT8666 desk stand is designed to enable the user to reverse the direction of the XLR chassis connector and push tab on the top of the desk stand. (This is a useful feature if you are using a microphone whose switch would be oriented away from the user without reversing the direction of the XLR-type connector.) To reverse the direction of the XLR-type connector on top of the AT8666 desk stand: 1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screws (2) at the corners of the XLR chassis connector on the top of the desk stand. 2. Grasp the push lever, lift it slightly, and turn the connector 180, so the push lever is near the front of the desk stand. 3. Replace and tighten the corner screws on the XLR chassis connector. NOTE: Placing any object on a surface (such as a conference table) before its finish is fully cured may result in damage to the finish. AT8666 SPECIFICATIONS WEIGHT 27.6 oz (782 g) DIMENSIONS 5.23" (133.0 mm) maximum length, 3.58" (91.0 mm) maximum width, 1.49" (38.0 mm) maximum height INPUT CONNECTOR 3-pin XLRF OUTPUT CONNECTOR 3-pin XLRM In the interest of standards development, A.T.U.S. offers full details on its test methods to other industry professionals on request. Specifications are subject to change without notice. AT8666 PIED DE MICROPHONE DE TABLE Appareil combinant un corps robuste moulé et un socle antidérapant réduisant les vibrations de surface Design discret avec une finition noire, à faibles reflets pour une visibilité minimale Connecteur réversible de type XLR au-dessus du pied du microphone Le pied de table discret s adapte à tous les microphones à col-de-cygne, dotés d un connecteur de sortie de type XLRM à trois broches. Le pied de microphone AT8666 est conçu pour permettre à l utilisateur d inverser la direction du connecteur sur châssis de type XLR et pousser sur la languette se trouvant au-dessus du pied. (Il s agit d une caractéristique fort utile si l on veut orienter la touche du microphone à l opposé de l utilisateur sans avoir à changer la direction du connecteur de type XLR.) Pour inverser la direction du connecteur de type XLR sur le pied du microphone de table AT8666: 1. À l aide d un tournevis cruciforme, enlever les deux vis aux coins du connecteur sur châssis XLR situé au-dessus du pied de microphone. 2. Se saisir du «levier», le soulever légèrement et imprimer une rotation de 180 au connecteur, afin que le levier se retrouve proche de la partie avant du pied du microphone. 3. Remettre les vis en place dans les coins du connecteur XLR et serrer. REMARQUE : Une surface telle qu une table de conference risqué d être endommagée si l on y place un objet, alors que la finition de cette surface n est pas complètement sèche. AT8666 CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES POIDS 782 g (27,6 oz) DIMENSIONS Longueur maximale 133,0 mm (5,23 po), largeur maximale 91,0 mm (3,58 po), hauteur maximale 38,0 mm (1,49 po) CONNECTEUR D ENTRÉE XLRF à trois broches CONNECTEUR DE SORTIE XLRM à trois broches Afin de contribuer au développement des normes, A.T.U.S. fournit tout renseignement sur ses méthodes de test aux professionnels de l industrie qui en font la demande. Les caractéristiques techniques sont soumises à des changements sans préavis. AT8666 PLATAFORMA DE ESCRITORIO La construcción robusta de metal fundido y las almohadillas antideslizantes minimizan el acoplamiento de la vibración de la superficie a la unidad Diseño discreto acabado en negro de baja reflectancia para una visibilidad mínima Conector reversible tipo XLR en la parte superior de la plataforma de escritorio La plataforma de escritorio de bajo perfil está diseñada para ajustarse a cualquier micrófono de cuello de ganso con una salida de tres pines tipo XLRM. La plataforma de escritorio AT8666 está diseñada para permitir que el usuario invierta la dirección del conector de chasis tipo XLR y la palanca de empuje en la parte superior de la plataforma. (Ésta es una característica útil si usa un micrófono cuyo interruptor se ubicaría lejos del usuario si no se invierte la dirección del conector tipo XLR.) Para invertir la dirección del conector tipo XLR en la parte superior de la plataforma de escritorio AT8666: 1. Con un destornillador Phillips, retire los (2) tornillos de las esquinas del conector de chasis tipo XLR en la parte superior de la plataforma de escritorio. 2. Agarre la palanca de push, levántela levemente y gire el conector en 180, de manera que la palanca quede cerca de la parte delantera de la plataforma de escritorio. 3. Vuelva a colocar los tornillos de las esquinas en el conector de chasis tipo XLR y apriételos. NOTA: El colocar cualquier objeto en una superficie (como una mesa de conferencias) el cual su acabado no esté totalmente terminado, puede causar daños al acabado de la superficie. ESPECIFICACIONES DE AT8666 PESO 782 g (27,6 oz) DIMENSIONES 133,0 mm (5,23") de longitud máxima, 91,0 mm (3,58") de ancho máximo, 38,0 mm (1,49") de altura máxima CONECTOR DE ENTRADA XLRF de 3 pines CONECTOR DE SALIDA XLRM de 3 pines En el interés del desarrollo de estándares, la empresa A.T.U.S. ofrece detalles completos sobre sus métodos de pruebas a solicitud de otros profesionales de la industria. Las especificaciones están sujetas a cambios, sin previo aviso.

107 AT8666 PEDESTAL DE MESA Estrutura sólida com base antiderrapante, minimiza a transferência das vibrações da superfície para a unidade Projeto de perfil baixo com acabamento em preto fosco para mínima visibilidade Conector reversível do tipo XLR na parte superior do pedestal de mesa O pedestal de mesa de perfil baixo é projetado para se ajustar a qualquer microfone tipo pescoço de ganso com saída tipo XLRM de três pinos. O pedestal de mesa AT8666 é projetado para possibilitar ao usuário reverter a direção do conector tipo XLR da base metálica e pressionar a lingüeta na parte superior do pedestal de mesa. (Esta função é útil se você estiver usando um microfone cuja chave ficaria orientada contrariamente ao usuário sem reverter a direção do conector tipo XLR.) Para reverter a direção do conector tipo XLR na parte superior do pedestal de mesa AT8666: 1. Utilizando uma chave Phillips, retire os parafusos (2) dos cantos do conector da base metálica na parte superior do pedestal de mesa. 2. Segure a alavanca push (empurre), levante-a ligeiramente e gire o conector 180, aproximando a alavanca da parte dianteira do pedestal de mesa. 3. Substitua e aperte os parafusos de canto da base metálica do conector tipo XLR. OBSERVAÇÃO: A colocação de qualquer objeto na superfície (tal como um mesa de reunião) antes do acabamento estar totalmente curado pode danificar o acabamento. ESPECIFICAÇÕES DO AT8666 PESO 782 g (27,6 oz) DIMENSÕES 133,0 mm (5,23") de comprimento máximo, 91,0 mm (3,58") de largura máxima, 38,0 mm (1,49") de altura máxima CONECTOR DE ENTRADA XLRF de 3 pinos CONECTOR DE SAÍDA XLRM de 3 pinos No interesse no desenvolvimento de padrões, a A.T.U.S., sob demanda, oferece todos os detalhes de sua metodologia de testes a outros profissionais da industria. As especificações estão sujeitas a alterações sem prévio aviso. AT8666 SUPPORTO DA TAVOLO La robusta struttura in pressofusione e i cuscinetti antiscivolo nella parte inferiore riducono al minimo l accoppiamento delle vibrazioni superficiali sull unità Il design low-profile e la finitura nera a basso indice di riflessione garantiscono la minima visibilità Connettore di tipo XLR reversibile sulla parte superiore del supporto da tavolo Il supporto da tavolo con design low-profile è adatto a qualsiasi tipo di microfono gooseneck con uscita tripolare di tipo XLRM. Il supporto da tavolo AT8666 è progettato per consentire all utente di invertire la direzione del connettore XLR e della linguetta scorrevole sulla parte superiore del supporto da tavolo. (È una caratteristica molto utile se si usa un microfono il cui interruttore è orientato nella direzione opposta rispetto all utente e consente di non invertire la direzione del connettore tipo XLR). Per invertire la direzione del connettore di tipo XLR situato sulla parte superiore del supporto da tavolo AT8666: 1. Con un cacciavite a stella rimuovere le viti (2) poste agli angoli dell involucro del connettore XLR situato sulla parte superiore del supporto da tavolo. 2. Afferrare la levetta da spingere, sollevarla leggermente e ruotare il connettore di 180, in modo che la levetta sia vicina alla parte frontale del supporto da tavolo. 3. Riposizionare e avvitare le viti poste sugli angoli dell involucro esterno del connettore XLR. NOTA: Se si posiziona un oggetto su una superficie (come per esempio un tavolo da conferenza) prima che la sua finitura sia completamente polimerizzata, tale finitura potrebbe riportare danni. SPECIFICHE AT8666 PESO 782 g DIMENSIONI 133,0 mm lunghezza max, 91,0 mm larghezza max, 38,0 mm altezza max CONNETTORE DI INGRESSO XLRF tripolare CONNETTORE DI USCITA XLRM tripolare Nell'interesse dello sviluppo degli standard, A.T.U.S. fornisce (su richiesta) ai professionisti del settore informazioni dettagliate sui test di valutazione. Le specifiche possono subire variazioni senza preavviso. AT8666 TISCHFUSS Ein schweres Spritzgussgehäuse und rutschfeste Pads am Boden sorgen für minimale Kopplung von Oberflächenvibrationen zum Mikrofon Flaches Design mit mattschwarzem Finish lässt Mikrofon unauffälliger erscheinen Drehbarer XLR-Anschluss auf der Oberseite des Tischfußes Der kompakt konstruierte Tischfuß eignet sich zum Anschluss von Schwanenhalsmikrofonen mit dreipoligen XLRM-Ausgangssteckern. Der AT8666 Tischfuß ist so konzipiert, dass der XLR-Gehäuseanschluss am Fuß und die Sperrklinke umgedreht werden können. (Sehr nützlich, wenn ein Mikrofon angeschlossen werden soll, dessen Schalter ohne Umdrehen des XLR-Anschlusses nicht in Richtung des Benutzers zeigen würde.) So drehen Sie den XLR-Anschluss auf der Oberseite des Tischfußes AT8666 um: 1. Lösen Sie die beiden Schrauben (2) mit einem Kreuzschlitz Schraubendreher an den Eckpunkten des XLR-Gehäuseanschlusses, der auf der Oberseite des Tischfußes zu finden ist. 2. Heben Sie die Sperrklinke ganz leicht an, und drehen Sie den Anschluss um 180, bis sich die Sperrklinke in der Nähe der Tischfußvorderseite befindet. 3. Setzen Sie die Eckschrauben wieder in den XLR-Gehäuseanschluss ein, und schrauben Sie sie fest. Hinweis: Wird ein Gegenstand auf eine Fläche (wie etwa ein Konferenztisch) gestellt, bevor die Farbe/Lasur/Beize getrocknet ist, kann die Oberfläche beschädigt werden. AT TECHNISCHE DATEN GEWICHT 782 g ABMESSUNGEN 133,0 mm maximale Länge, 91,0 mm maximale Breite, 38,0 mm maximale Höhe EINGANG 3-polige XLRF-Buchse AUSGANG 3-poliger XLRM-Stecker Im Interesse der Entwicklung von Standards stellt A.T.U.S. professionellen Interessenten die kompletten Details bezüglich der angewendeten Test- und Messmethoden auf Anfrage zur Verfügung. Änderungen der Technischen Daten sind ohne vorherige Ankündigung möglich. Audio-Technica U.S., Inc., 1221 Commerce Drive, Stow, Ohio Audio-Technica Limited, Old Lane, Leeds LS11 8AG England P Audio-Technica U.S., Inc. Printed in China Imprimé en Chine Impreso en China Impresso na China Stampato in Cina Gedruckt in China

108 HB VIDEO E-SERIES VIDEO AUDIO 1/4 AUDIO TT AES AUDIO COMP. VIDEO ACCESSORIES INTEGRATED RS-422 PROG. RS-422 ACTIVE AUDIO 1/4" Overview Bittree offers two formats of audio patchbays: Long Frame (1/4 ), described below, and Bantam (TT), described on page 20. Long-Frame patchbays are often considered easier to work with due to their spacious 2 x 24 jack configuration. CHOOSING THE RIGHT AUDIO LONG-FRAME PATCHBAY 489 Series, Programmable, 2 x 24 Our Programmable patchbay allows you to change normaling and grounding for individual circuits simply by changing the shunt arrangement under the designation strips. Available in 1.5 and 2 RU enclosed chassis. 489-S Series, Programmable, 2 x 24 Includes the same features as the 489 Series above, but also allows you to program switched grounds in addition to bussed, isolated and looped grounds as with the original 489 series. 488 Series, Internally Programmable, 2 x 24 Comes with the same programming capability as the 489 Series, but the programming is done internally so it can fit into a 1 RU enclosed chassis. 481 Series, Classic, 2 x 24 Our original Bantam audio patchbay, featuring our most extensive selection of options available, including normals out, grounding, and other internal hard-wiring options, rear panel configurations, stereo/mono spacing, panel color, rack-unit height, and harness configurations. Non-programmable. 521 Series, Classic, 2 x 26 Includes the same extensive selections of available options as the 481 Series above, but in a slightly more condensed 2 x 26 format. 58 Call Toll Free Fax

109 ACCESSORIES INTEGRATED RS-422 PROG. RS-422 ACTIVE AUDIO 1/4" AUDIO TT AES AUDIO COMP. VIDEO E-SERIES VIDEO HB VIDEO 488 SERIES PROGRAMMABLE, 2 X 24 > LONG-FRAME (1/4 ) > AUDIO Programmable Audio Long-Frame (1/4 ) Patchbay Normals and Grounds can be easily reprogrammed by the end-user Spacious 2 x 24 jack configuration; 1 RU size Small size is ideal for mobile production and other applications in tight quarters Rear interface options include E-3, E-90 and D25 Our 488 Series features our innovative Programmable audio patchbays in a 2 x 24 1 RU size, making them ideal for mobile production and other applications in tight quarters. Programmable patchbays allow users to quickly and easily change the normals and grounding of individual circuits. Normals can be changed to full-normal, half-normal or non-normal. Grounding can be changed to bussed, isolated or looped. Because it s programmable, the 488 Series can serve as the foundation for virtually any new, reconfigured or legacy installation. The end result is a patchbay that allows integrators and installers to quickly re-configure patching systems, accommodate customer change-orders, and speed service-calls. Normals and Grounding for individual circuits can be easily changed by the end-user Normals can be programmed to full-normal, halfnormal or non-normal; Grounding can be programmed to bussed, isolated or looped Rear interface options include E-3, E-90 and D25 Gold-plated contacts used in E3 and E90 rear interface Jacks rated to 30,000 minimum insertion cycles Precision-stamped reinforced steel jack frame Copper-nickel-silver alloy leaf springs with goldplated cross bar switching contacts and nickelplated sleeve bushings Wired with low-capacitance, AES/EBU-rated shielded, twisted pair Panels made from 3/16" solid aluminum with a durable powder-coat finish Large user-friendly designation strips Mating connectors, contacts and normals (where applicable) are included with all standard rear interfaces 68 Call Toll Free Fax

110 488 SERIES PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS NORMALS NON NORMALED WITH ISOLATED GROUNDS NORMALS GND GND FULL NORMALED WITH BUSSED GROUNDS How to Identify a 488 Series Programmable Patchbay: 488 Series programmable patchbays can only be identified by removing the top dust cover and looking for the presence of red and white programming shunts inside. How to Change the Programming for a Circuit: 1. Find your desired configuration in the diagram above. 2. Arrange the programming shunts to match the appropriate diagram. Note: Each circuit can be programmed independently. 3. Ample shunts are provided with every programmable patchbay. Red shunts are placed horizontally and are used for normaling options. White shunts (shown as light gray above) are placed vertically and are used for grounding options. 4. Replace the dust cover. NORMALS NON NORMALED WITH BUSSED GROUNDS NORMALS GND GND HALF NORMALED WITH ISOLATED GROUNDS NORMALS GND FULL NORMALED WITH ISOLATED GROUNDS NORMALS GND HALF NORMALED WITH LOOPED GROUNDS NORMALS NORMALS GND FULL NORMALED WITH LOOPED GROUNDS GND HALF NORMALED WITH BUSSED GROUNDS 488 Series Programmable patchbay shown with dust cover removed, exposing red and white internal programming shunts. PROGRAMMING SHUNTS ACCESSORIES INTEGRATED RS-422 PROG. RS-422 ACTIVE AUDIO 1/4" AUDIO TT AES AUDIO COMP. VIDEO E-SERIES VIDEO HB VIDEO Call Toll Free Fax

111 HB VIDEO 488 SERIES PRODUCT NUMBERS DESCRIPTION PRODUCT NUMBER RS-422 ACTIVE AUDIO 1/4" AUDIO TT AES AUDIO COMP. VIDEO E-SERIES VIDEO E-3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7 E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Full-Normal, Bussed B48DC-FNIBS/E3 M2OU7L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Full-Normal, Isolated B48DC-FNIIS/E3 M2OU7L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Full-Normal, Looped B48DC-FNILS/E3 M2OU7L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Half-Normal, Bussed B48DC-HNIBS/E3 M2OU7L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Half-Normal, Isolated B48DC-HNIIS/E3 M2OU7L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Half-Normal, Looped B48DC-HNILS/E3 M2OU7L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Non-Normal, Bussed B48DC-NNIBS/E3 M2OU7L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Non-Normal, Isolated B48DC-NNIIS/E3 M2OU7L E-3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12 E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Full-Normal, Bussed B48DC-FNIBS/E3 M2OU12L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Full-Normal, Isolated B48DC-FNIIS/E3 M2OU12L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Full-Normal, Looped B48DC-FNILS/E3 M2OU12L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Half-Normal, Bussed B48DC-HNIBS/E3 M2OU12L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Half-Normal, Isolated B48DC-HNIIS/E3 M2OU12L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Half-Normal, Looped B48DC-HNILS/E3 M2OU12L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Non-Normal, Bussed B48DC-NNIBS/E3 M2OU12L E3, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Non-Normal, Isolated B48DC-NNIIS/E3 M2OU12L E-90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7 E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Full-Normal, Bussed B48DC-FNIBS/E90 M2OU7L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Full-Normal, Isolated B48DC-FNIIS/E90 M2OU7L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Full-Normal, Looped B48DC-FNILS/E90 M2OU7L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Half-Normal, Bussed B48DC-HNIBS/E90 M2OU7L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Half-Normal, Isolated B48DC-HNIIS/E90 M2OU7L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Half-Normal, Looped B48DC-HNILS/E90 M2OU7L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Non-Normal, Bussed B48DC-NNIBS/E90 M2OU7L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 7" Chassis, Non-Normal, Isolated B48DC-NNIIS/E90 M2OU7L E-90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12 E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Full-Normal, Bussed B48DC-FNIBS/E90 M2OU12L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Full-Normal, Isolated B48DC-FNIIS/E90 M2OU12L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Full-Normal, Looped B48DC-FNILS/E90 M2OU12L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Half-Normal, Bussed B48DC-HNIBS/E90 M2OU12L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Half-Normal, Isolated B48DC-HNIIS/E90 M2OU12L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Half-Normal, Looped B48DC-HNILS/E90 M2OU12L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Non-Normal, Bussed B48DC-NNIBS/E90 M2OU12L E90, 2x24, 1 RU, Black, 12" Chassis, Non-Normal, Isolated B48DC-NNIIS/E90 M2OU12L ACCESSORIES INTEGRATED RS-422 PROG. REAR INTERFACE OPTIONS The 488 Series comes with four rear interface options E-3, E-90, ID (punchdown) and D25. Full views of E3, E90 and ID (punchdown) rear interfaces can be seen throughout this catalog; full view of the D25 rear interface can be seen at Bittree.com. 70 Call Toll Free Fax

112 488 SERIES PRODUCT ORDERING CODES For fast, easy ordering visit bittree.com AUDIO LONG FRAME (1/4") LPC Color 00= Black 02= Red 04= Yellow 05= Green 06= Blue 07= Purple Length in Inches (cm) 24 (61) 36 (92) 48 (122) 60 (153) 72 (184) HB VIDEO E-SERIES VIDEO COMP. VIDEO LPC PATCH CORDS AES AUDIO Our easy-to-use Ordering Codes let you order the exact patching system you need. As shown in the chart below, simply choose the option you want for each specification. B 48 D C FN I B S /E3 M 2OU 12 L Jack Type L = Long Frame (1/4 ) Depth 12 = 12" Deep Chassis 7 = 7" Deep Chassis Designation Strips 2OU = 2 Designation Strips Over/Under Spacing M = Mono Spacing Rear Interface E3 = 3 Pin E90 = 90 Pin D25 = Female 25 Pin Panel Height S = 1RU Grounding B = Bussed L = Looped I = Isolated Normaling I = Internally Programmable Type of Normaling FN = Full-Normal HN = Half-Normal NN = Non-Normal Style C = Chassis Wiring D = Digital compatible wiring Quantity of Patch Ports 48 = 2x24 Color Choice B = Black G = Gray Mating connectors, contacts and normals (where applicable) are included with standard rear interface audio patchbays. Lacing bars are included with all audio patchbays. ACCESSORIES INTEGRATED RS-422 PROG. RS-422 ACTIVE AUDIO 1/4" AUDIO TT Call Toll Free Fax

113

114

115

116 New model information DBP-2012UD Universal Audio/Video Player Enjoy Super Audio CD and Network Content in Realistic Sound and Picture Quality With the Denon DBP-2012UD Blu-ray disc player, you can enjoy not only Blu-ray discs and DVDs in stunning sound and picture quality but Super Audio CDs and DVD-Audio discs, too. And that s not all, because the DBP-2012UD can also play music and video files stored on a PC and let you enjoy online content such as YouTube and Netflix. The DBP-2012UD shares the same structural and electrical design as Denon's high-class models. Coatings of different types have been applied to the surfaces of the disc mechanism and the top cover, and the top cover has been constructed of dual layers, to suppress vibrations that adversely affect sound and picture quality. The electrical circuits have also been carefully laid out in separate blocks to suppress noise caused by the different types of signals and magnetic influences. The DBP-2012UD allows you to enjoy sound and picture quality on a level that only a Denon Blu-ray disc player can give you. Features New Features A Universal Blu-ray disc player that also supports Super Audio CD and DVD-Audio formats Support Blu-ray 3D TM playback (*1) Network functions, to bring you a wealth of online content (*2) - Enjoy YouTube (*3) video distribution services without a PC. - Enjoy music, photo, and video files stored on a network-connected device such as a PC or NAS. Support Deep Color, x.v.color, High-Bit-Rate Audio output and HDMI control function High quality 32-bit/192kHz audio digital to analog converters High quality 12-bit video digital to analog converter USB port on the front Quick play Denon s high picture quality circuitry, to visually enhance your sources Advanced High-bit I/P Scaler, for a more detailed picture and depth in colors 1080p/24 video output, to bring out the full quality of film Deep color support x.v.color support 3-D digital noise reduction HDMI source direct mode to output native resolution of the disc Picture adjustments Gold plated terminals for high sound quality Ease of Use User friendly GUI Glo-key remote controller Denon Technologies for superior sound and picture quality Direct Mechanical Ground Construction, to suppress vibration and ensure high-quality HD sound and video Independent Block Construction, for faithful playback of audio and video signals Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio HDMI output Audio parts strictly selected for high quality sound Pure direct mode Custom Integration Features AMX, Crestron third party control support via RS-232C Remote In/Out connection Remote lock mode

117 Plays disc media, online content, compressed video and music files, and a variety of other content A Universal Blu-ray disc player that also supports Super Audio CD and DVD-Audio formats The DBP-2012UD plays not only Blu-ray discs and DVDs but a wide range of other optical media such as CDs, Super Audio CDs, and DVD-Audio. You can essentially enjoy your entire disc library in high sound and picture quality. Network functions, to bring you a wealth of online content (*3) - Enjoy YouTube (*2) video distribution services without a PC. - Enjoy music, photo, and video files stored on a networkconnected device such as a PC or NAS. - Supports BD-Live to let you enjoy promotional images or other content you download from the Internet to the built-in memory. Plays compressed content such as music and video files The DBP-2012UD plays DivX video files stored on USB memory, DVD-R/RW or other recordable media, MP3 and WMA music files, JPEG files taken with a digital camera, as well as WMV video files and MPEG- AAC music files. Denon Technologies for superior sound and picture quality Direct Mechanical Ground Construction, to suppress vibration and ensure high-quality HD sound and video The disc mechanism, which also absorbs vibration, is mounted at the center of the DBP-2012UD to efficiently release unwanted vibration through the feet to the ground and support high-quality sound and picture playback. Suppress internal and external vibrations and electromagnetic noises for high precision disc playability at all times - Newly designed center-drive mechanism - Disc loader tray coated with protein to absorb vibration - Separated unit structure Independent Block Construction, for faithful playback of audio and video signals The electronic circuits have been mounted in separate locations inside the DBP-2012UD to ensure that the different types of signals do not affect each other and cause electronic or magnetic noise. Ease of Use USB port on the front A USB port has been provided on the front panel for convenience when connecting a device containing compressed music or video files. Versatile Disc Formats Playability BD-Video BD-R (BDMV format) BD-RE (BDMV format) DVD-Video DVD-Audio DVD+R, DVD+RW (Video mode, AVCHD format) DVD-R, DVD-RW (Video mode, AVCHD format) Super Audio CD Audio CD CD-R, CD-RW Kodak Picture CD Other Features HDMI resolution select on front panel Detachable AC cord Notes: *1. Requires connection to 3D-compliant TV via 3D-compliant HDMI cable. *2. Requires contract with Internet service provider. *3. Update distribution via network connection is slated to start Spring, *4. Playable video formats: WMV9, WMV9AP (VC-1) *5. Playable video formats: MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG4 Playable files Ports DVD-R/-RW/ +R/ +RW/ CD-R/ -RW Playable media USB memory device Network MP3 WMA AAC LPCM JPEG DivX MPEG WMV (*4) (*4) AVI (*5) (*5) Main Specifications Video Signal system Audio S/N Total harmonic distortion Dynamic range General Power supply Dimensions W x H x D (incl. protrusions) Weight PAL/NTSC 125 db % (2ch, L/R) 110 db V, 50/60 Hz 434 x 107 x 319 mm 5.2 kg Video HDMI output x 1 Component output x 1 Composite output x 1 Audio Coaxial digital output x 1 Analog output (2ch, L/R) x 1 Analog output (7.1ch audio out) x 1 Control Ethernet x 1 USB port x 1 RS-232C x 1 Remote control (IN / OUT) x 1 / x 1 *Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. *Blu-ray Disc TM and Blu-ray TM are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association * BD-LIVE logo is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association * AVCHD and the "AVCHD" logo are trademark of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation. * x.v.color and the x.v.color logo are trademarks of Sony Corporation. * Dolby and the double-d device are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. *DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of DTS Technology. *HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. *DivX, DivX Certified, DivX Plus TM HD and associated logos are registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. *Java and all other trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. *Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. * KODAK is trademark of Eastman Kodak Company. * BONUSVIEW is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association. *DLNA CERTIFIED TM Audio/Video/Image Player *DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED TM are trademarks, service marks, or certifi cation marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.

118 Extreme Networks Data Sheet Technical Specifications Altitude 4511 Wallplate Access Point Highlights The Altitude 4511 wallplate access point (AP) is an innovative mobility solution which provides powerful Wi-Fi for college campuses and Multiple Dwelling Units (MDUs) such as dormitories, apartment complexes, hotels and hospitals. Its modular design and innovative form factor eases installation, snapping into place in minutes instead of hours. Built on operational and architectural flexibility, the Altitude 4511 AP provides high-performance and powerful coverage as well as scalable deployment options that can lower costs. Key Features Small, compact size Uses existing CAT 5 infrastructure Snaps easily onto existing wallplate Integrated Antennas High-power - 26dBm EIRP IEEE n technology Integrated controller Overview Conventional access points designed to support MDUs require careful planning and often take time to deploy involving the drilling of holes, pulling cables and installing mounting brackets. These APs are typically installed in hallways, with firewalls, concrete, rebar, mirrors, plumbing and bathroom tile contributing to attenuation factors that result in poor signal quality. Additionally, because these APs are functionally limited in terms of service and management scale, most often, IT personnel running smaller MDUs choose to install a few independent APs and use an RF switch to manage them. This results in management complexity and added costs. The Altitude 4511 wallplate access point has been designed specifically to address these challenges with the following unique set of features: Fast, snap-on installation using existing CAT 5/6 cabling and universal mounting bracket Snap-in keystone ports for service scale providing connections for additional wired services such as VoIP phones and coaxial cable SMART RF dynamic channel and radio power adjustment which provides excellent radio performance Intelligent controller AP code that provides scalable centralized management of up to 25 Altitude 4511 access points without the need of a costly wireless controller a/b/g/n 2x2 multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) custom-designed radio which provides 26 dbm EIRP performance with iintegrated antennas Modular Design for Easy Installation and Expansion The Altitude 4511 access point utilizes existing CAT 5/6 cabling in the walls, making installation faster and easier. Using the universal mounting brackets, installation can be performed on any wall surface or a structured wiring telecom box in minutes. Also included with the Altitude 4511 AP is an optional second RJ-45 Ethernet port utilizing a pass-through (keystone) cable. You can also add a three-port Ethernet module (sold separately) to the front of the device. The keystone port can also be used to extend a full-power, Gigabit Ethernet, Power over Ethernet (PoE) port or any other standard keystone-compatible optional cabling including TV-coax, RJ-11, fiber, or Leviton QuickPort modular connectors. These features allow hotels, for example, to provide multiple services such as voice, IPTV Make Your Network Mobile

119 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Altitude 4511 Access Point Technical Specifications and wired LAN access using a single access point. Because the installation process is simple and repeatable across multiple properties and does not require expert training, IT managers can expect to lower their deployment costs. Operational Flexibility for High Performance and Coverage The Altitude 4511 access point comes with the native SMART RF technology that ensures top radio performance and coverage without operator intervention. A single Altitude 4511 AP utilizes the n MIMO technology and through its optimized design, can provide coverage of up to three to ten rooms from any CAT 5/6 wiring location. Seamless and automatic failover capabilities ensure high-quality user sessions, as the access points adjust their power to compensate for the loss of neighboring access points. The Altitude 4511 supports current a/b/g/n devices, providing secure user sessions through role-based access control, support for 802.1x on both wireless and wired ports, intrusion prevention and fast roaming. Scalable Deployment Options that Reduce Costs The Altitude 4511 can operate as an intelligent controller, providing scalable and centralized management of up to 25 Altitude 4511 access points by utilizing the self-optimizing intelligent controller AP software. This allows IT managers to lower their costs by eliminating the need for a dedicated controller to manage the access points. Additionally, each Altitude 4511 can be repurposed to operate as a Motorola AirDefense sensor for advanced spectrum analysis and connectivity troubleshooting in real time. This further reduces costs since it eliminates the need to place separate, dedicated sensors Figure 1: Traditional Wireless Access Point Placement in the Hallway Put the access point near the users for better performance Figure 2: New Altitude 4511 Access Point Placement in the Room 2

120 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Altitude 4511 Access Point Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Physical Specifications Dimensions: 5 x 2.95 x 1 (12.8 cm x 7.5 cm x 2.54 cm) Unit weight: 12 oz (0.34 Kg) Mounting options: Universal mounting bracket for worldwide telecom plates; over a telecom wallplate or flush surface mount Wireless interface: Single radio; a/b/g/n; 2 Ghz or 5.2 Ghz LAN Ethernet port: IEEE 802/3 10/100 Mb auto-sensing via 8-pin header Uplink LAN Ethernet: IEEE 802/3 10/100 Mb auto-sensing Snap-in port: Supports any Keystone or QuickPort style connector Power Specifications AP+1 LAN port ~6.5W typical, AP+4 LAN ports ~9W 802.3af compliant uplink LAN port or 48V external power supply Wireless Specifications Medium: DSSS, OFDM, MIMO Standards: a, b, g, n Data Rates: b: 1,2,5.5, 11 Mbps g: 6,9,12,18,24,36,48,54 Mbps a: 6,9,12,18,24,36,48,54 Mbps n: MCS 0-15 up to 300 Mbps Operating Channels: 2.4 Ghz: Chan 1-13 ( Mhz) 5.2 Ghz: All channels from 5150 Mhz to 5850 Mhz Actual operating frequencies depend on national regulatory limits Transmit Power Settings: 6 dbm to 24 dbm, in 1 db increments; Actual Transmit power dependent on national regulatory limits Receiver Sensitivity: b: 1 Mb, -93 dbm g: 54 Mb, -78 dbm, 2.4Ghz n: MCS15 40 Mhz, -69 dbm; a: 54Mb, -79 dbm, 5.2Ghz; n: MCS15 40 Mhz, -69 dbm Antenna Configuration: Two internal omni-directional antennas, 3.5 dbi peak 1x2 or 2x2 MIMO operation WLAN Networking and Security BSS: 8 BSSIDs, 16 SSIDs Virtual AP: Beacon, en/dis client isolation, SSID, authenc, bitrate, VID 4000 VLANs; VIDs AP Management: Encrypted management protocol WEP statc, WEP Dynamic (802.1x) WPA/TKIP/AES Personal and Enterprise, all EAP types Regulatory Compliance FCC , /EN , EN UL EU EN nd Ed, ANZ C-Tick FCC Part 15 Subpart B, EN55022: A1: 2007, ICES 003 (Class B) EN : A1: A2: 2003 EU RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC CE, IC, FCC, TELEC Environmental 0 40 degrees Celsius, 5% to 90% non-condensing Warranty Ordering Information Part Number Description Altitude 4511 Single radio a/b/g/n Wallplate AP 2x2 MIMO. Low profile. One Ethernet PD uplink port, one FE LAN port included. US-only version supports FCC channel set Altitude 4511 Single radio a/b/g/n Wallplate AP 2x2 MIMO. Low profile. One Ethernet PD uplink port, one FELAN port included. WR version supports individual country channel sets as required. KT D-WR Optional Three-port Fast Ethernet Module for Altitude Make Your Network Mobile Corporate and North America Extreme Networks, Inc Monroe Street Santa Clara, CA USA Phone Europe, Middle East, Africa and South America Phone Asia Pacific Phone Japan Phone extremenetworks.com 2012 Extreme Networks, Inc. All rights reserved. Extreme Networks, the Extreme Networks logo and Altitude are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Extreme Networks, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the trademarks of their respective owners. Specifications and product availability are subject to change without notice. 1808_03 03/2012

121 Extreme Networks Data Sheet Summit X450e Series Summit X450e series switches are based on the revolutionary ExtremeXOS core-class operating system from Extreme Networks. ExtremeXOS highly resilient, modular operating system provides continuous uptime, manageability and operational efficiency. Summit X450e provides high availability and performance with its advanced traffic management capabilities to support a large-scale rollout of a converged network that supports devices such as IP telephones, wireless APs and other devices that require power from a LAN connection. With low-latency line-rate performance, Summit X450e-24p/48p supports the 802.3af standards-based Power over Ethernet (PoE) on every port. Summit X450e supports hardware-based routing for both IPv4 and IPv6 which helps provide investment protection by allowing the rollout of IPv6 in your network now or in the future. The flexible Summit X450e switches provide high-density Gigabit Ethernet ports plus dedicated 40 Gbps high-speed stacking ports and optional 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports in a compact 1RU format, supporting a full range of Layer 2 to Layer 4 functionalities on every port for high productivity. Optional redundant power supplies are offered with each switch to protect against power anomalies, providing a continuous operational network. Target Application PoE and non-poe edge switches providing intelligent 10/100/1000BASE-T connectivity to the desktop in a network running ExtremeXOS from the core to the edge. Summit X450e The industry s first PoE and non-poe edge switches with the revolutionary modular operating system, ExtremeXOS. Voice-Class Availability Modular ExtremeXOS operating system Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching (EAPS) resiliency protocol SummitStack and SummitStack-V highly available, high-speed stacking support Designed for Converged Network Applications High bandwidth, non-blocking architecture for demanding edge applications Exceptional Quality of Service (QoS) with advanced traffic management capabilities for converged applications Convergence-ready connectivity with Voice-over-IP (VoIP) automatic provisioning Efficient management to handle convergence-driven network changes with Power over Gigabit Ethernet Comprehensive Security User policy and host integrity enforcement and Identity Management Universal Port dynamic security profile to provide fine granular security policy in the network Threat detection and response instrumentation to react to network intrusion with CLEAR-Flow Security Rules Engine Common Criteria EAL3+ Certification Make Your Network Mobile

122 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Voice-Class Availability Powered by the ExtremeXOS modular operating system, the Summit X450e switch supports process recovery and application upgrades without the need for a system reboot. Summit X450e provides the high network availability required for converged applications. Modular Operating System for Non-Stop Operation Preemptive Multitasking and Protected Memory Summit X450e switches allow each of many applications such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) and Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) to run as separate Operating System (OS) processes that are protected from each other. This drives increased system integrity and inherently protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. Process Monitoring and Restart The ExtremeXOS modular OS increases network availability using process monitoring and restart. Each independent OS process is monitored in real time. If a process becomes unresponsive or stops running, it can be automatically restarted. Loadable Software Modules The modular design of ExtremeXOS allows the upgrading of individual software modules, should this be necessary, leading to higher availability in the network (see Figure 1). High Availability Network Protocols Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching (EAPS) EAPS allows the IP network to provide the level of resiliency and uptime that users expect from their traditional voice network. EAPS is more adaptable than Spanning Tree or Rapid Spanning Tree protocols and offers sub-second (less than 50 milliseconds) recovery that delivers consistent failover regardless of the number of VLANs, network nodes or network topology. Since EAPS allows the network to recover almost transparently, VoIP calls will not drop and digital video feeds will not freeze or pixelize in most situations. Spanning Tree/Rapid Spanning Tree Protocols Summit X450e switches support Spanning Tree (802.1D), Per VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST+), Rapid Spanning Tree (802.1w) and Multiple Instances of Spanning Tree (802.1s) protocols for Layer 2 resiliency. Software-Enhanced Availability Software-enhanced availability allows users to remain connected to the network even if part of the network infrastructure is down. Summit X450e switches continuously check for problems in the uplink connections using advanced Layer 3 protocols such as OSPF, VRRP and Extreme Standby Router Protocol (ESRP, supported in Layer 2 or Layer 3), and dynamically route traffic around the problem. Equal Cost Multipath Routing Equal Cost Multipath (ECMP) routing allows uplinks to be load balanced for performance and cost savings while also supporting redundant failover. If an uplink fails, traffic is automatically routed to the remaining uplinks and connectivity is maintained. Link Aggregation (802.3ad) Link aggregation allows trunking of up to eight links on a single logical connection, for up to 20 gigabits per second (Gbps) of redundant bandwidth per logical connection. Multi-Switch LAG (M-LAG) M-LAG can address bandwidth limitations and improve network resiliency, in part by routing network traffic around bottlenecks, reducing the risks of a single point of failure, and allowing load balancing across multiple switches. Voice-Grade Stacking with SummitStack Summit X450e offers dual stacking interfaces to provide high-speed 40 Gbps stacking bandwidth. SummitStack stacking architecture is designed to support converged services such as VoIP and video by its highly available, rapid failover capability with n-1 master redundancy, distributed Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching, link aggregation across the stack and distributed uplinks. SummitStack supports up to eight units in a stack and the mixture of the units can be Summit X250e, X450e, X450a, X460, X480, and X650 switches running the same version of ExtremeXOS. It provides sub-second failover for path failure and hitless master/backup failover along with hitless protocol support such as OSPF graceful restart, PoE configuration and Network Login user authentication. 2

123 VIM1-SummitStack VIM1-SummitStack Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Voice-Class Availability SummitStack-V Flexible Stacking Over 10 Gigabit Ethernet SummitStack-V capability utilizes 10 GbE ports as stacking ports, enabling the use of standard cabling and optics technologies used for 10 GbE such as XFP, SFP+, 10GBASE-T and XENPAK. SummitStack-V provides long-distance stacking connectivity of up to 40 km while reducing the cable complexity of implementing a stacking solution. SummitStack-V enabled 10 GbE ports must be physically directconnected. SummitStack-V is compatible with Summit X450e, X450a, X460, X480, X650, X670 and X670V switches running the same version of ExtremeXOS. Summit X450e provides chassis-like management and availability with its SummitStack stacking technology (see Figure 2). 1 Memory protected processes under real-time scheduling that cannot impact each other nor kernel BGP OSPF SSH-2 V1.3.2 SSH-2 V Designed to allow application modules to be upgraded during runtime Third Party Application Processes are monitored and can be restarted or other action taken if necessary Hitless failover infrastructure for dual management systems and stacking 2 Application modules can be added during runtime Single management point for up to eight units 40 Gbps stacking Rapid Failover for converged applications Can mix Summit X250e, Summit X450a/e series, Summit X460, Summit X480 and Summit X650 series switches ExtremeXOS Kernel Kernel Loadable Module Figure 1: ExtremeXOS Modular Design Figure 2: SummitStack Stacking Architecture 3

124 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Designed for Converged Network Applications Summit X450e provides a high bandwidth, non-blocking architecture with tri-speed copper Gigabit Ethernet ports in PoE and non-poe versions for demanding edge applications. High Density Gigabit Ports with Optional 10 Gigabit Uplinks The Summit X450e series provides ideal performance and functionalities for access switches. They eliminate the need to funnel traffic through a low bandwidth gigabit trunk by providing non-blocking 10 gigabit links to the core. As an option module, Summit X450e provides a variety of choices for 10 Gigabit Ethernet uplinks: dual port 10GBASE-T for UTP connectivity, dual port SFP+ for fiber and passive copper connectivity and dual port XFP. Exceptional Policy-based QoS PoE enabled Summit X450e switches provide eight hardware queues per port to support granular traffic classification with bandwidth allocation centralized classifiers per 24 ports can use information from Layers 1 through 4 to prioritize and meter incoming packets at line-rate. When metering traffic, the switches can drop out-of-spec traffic or flag it for later action. To expedite upstream traffic handling, a packet s classification can be carried forward with Layer 2 (802.1p) and Layer 3 (DiffServ) markings. Summit X450e switches provide advanced traffic management features that support the highest-quality triple play of voice, video and data services. Efficient Management to Handle Convergence-Driven Network Changes Universal Port Voice-over-IP Auto-Provisioning PoE enabled Summit X450e switches set the stage for convergence applications by allowing enterprises to add new access devices in a plug-and-play fashion. Voice and wireless services can be easily implemented without major network upgrades. Summit X450e supports automatic provisioning of VoIP using LLDP and event-based command scripting capability. It allows dynamic configuration of voice VLANs and QoS. This auto-configuration capability allows you to configure VoIP phone settings such as voice VLAN settings, call server IP address configuration, etc. This level of simplicity in managing network changes can greatly reduce operating expenses. Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoE) Deployments of IP Telephony depend on reliable, consistent power from the Ethernet jack. Summit X450e-24p/48p is the basis for a reliable LAN telephony infrastructure with fully redundant 15.4 watts per port, and QoS and resiliency to match the failover requirements for latency-sensitive services like VoIP phones. With Summit X450e, deployment of powered LAN devices is quick and easy with its support of the IEEE 802.3af standard and full Class 3 power availability on all ports, backed up 100% by the optional EPS-500 redundant power supply (Summit X450e-24p). Summit X450e-48p can provide up to 370W of PoE power and can be increased up to 740W of PoE power to support full 15.4W Class 3 devices on all 48 ports by adding the External Power System (EPS-C and EPS-600LS). Voice-Grade Connections Summit X450e supports a range of QoS technologies that can prioritize and predictably handle high-priority traffic policing or rate limiting on ingress, 802.1q tagging and DiffServ marking, and shaping on egress with eight queues per port. The Extreme Networks tradition of building products with low latency and jitter continues with Summit X450e. Universal Connectivity Summit X450e-24p/48p switches offer universal connectivity with high-performance gigabit to the desktop, PoE and wireless support from every RJ-45 port. Installing universal services ports everywhere for data and device power greatly simplifies installations and moves, and helps to future-proof your edge network. Summit X450e-24p/48p provides universal attachment at any desktop Ethernet speed, and any power level from none to full 15.4 Watts. Comprehensive Network Management Summit X450e switches support comprehensive network management through Command Line Interface (CLI), SNMP v1, v2c, v3, and an embedded XML-based Web User Interface, ExtremeXOS ScreenPlay. With a variety of management options and consistency across other Extreme Networks modular and stackable switches, Summit X450e series switches provide ease of management for demanding converged applications. 4

125 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Designed for Converged Network Applications Extreme Networks has developed tools that simplify and help in efficiently managing your network. Ridgeline network and service management provides fault, configuration, accounting, performance and security functions, allowing more effective management of Extreme Networks products, solutions and third-party devices, in a converged network. Advanced Routing Capabilities for the Edge Summit X450e switches support advanced protocols for an efficient and productive network. Summit X450e switches provide static and RIP routing for simple IPv4 and IPv6 Layer 3 deployment. An optional ExtremeXOS Advanced Edge license extends the feature set to include other important edge functions such as: Edge OSPF for much greater extensibility than RIP can provide Edge PIM sparse modes for routing of multicast streams Policy-based routing Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) to provide routing redundancy 1 LLDP / LLDP-MED 2 NETWORK CORE IP Phone Administrator defines Universal Port policy for IP phones. Phone is connected. Phone sends vendor, model, detailed power requirements, etc. to switch. Switch automatically configures VLAN, QoS, and PoE on the port. Switch pushes VLAN, QoS, call server details, etc. to the phone Figure 3: Universal Port Voice-over-IP Provisioning 5

126 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Comprehensive Security Management Implementing a secure network means providing protection at the network perimeter as well as the core. Summit X450e uses advanced security functions in protecting your network from known or potential threats. Extreme Networks security offerings encompass three key areas: user and host integrity, threat detection and response, and hardened network infrastructure. Furthermore, with policy-based routing, measures can be taken to provide confidentiality of selective data in transit between internal network nodes. User Authentication and Host Integrity Checking Network Login and Dynamic Security Profile Network Login capability implemented in ExtremeXOS enforces user admission and usage policies. Summit X450e series switches support a comprehensive range of Network Login options by providing an 802.1x agent-based approach, a Web-based (agent-less) login capability for guests, and a MAC-based authentication model for devices. With these modes of Network Login, only authorized users and devices can connect to the network and be assigned to the appropriate VLAN. The Universal Port scripting framework available in Summit X450e lets you implement Dynamic Security Profiles, which in sync with Network Login allows you to implement fine-grained and robust security policies. Upon authentication, the switch can load dynamic ACLs/QoS profiles for a user or group of users, to deny/allow the access to the application servers or segments within the network. Multiple Supplicant Support Shared ports represent a potential vulnerability in a network. Multiple supplicant capability on a switch allows it to uniquely authenticate and apply the appropriate policies and VLANs for each user or device on a shared port. Multiple supplicant support secures IP Telephony and wireless access. Converged network designs often involve the use of shared ports. Media Access Control (MAC) Lockdown MAC lockdown secures printers, wireless APs and servers. The MAC address security/lockdown feature allows Summit X450e to block access to any Ethernet port when the MAC address of a station attempting to access the port is different from the configured MAC address. This feature is used to lock down any device to a specific port. Host Integrity Checking Host integrity checking helps keep infected or non-compliant machines off the network. Summit X450e series switches support a host integrity or endpoint integrity solution that is based on the model from the Trusted Computing Group. Identity Manager Identity Manager allows network managers to track users who access their network. User identity is captured based on NetLogin authentication, LLDP discovery and Kerberos snooping. ExtremeXOS uses the information to then report on the MAC, VLAN, computer hostname, and port location of the user. Further, Identity Manager can create both roles and policies, and then bind them together to create role-based profiles based on organizational structure or other logical groupings, and apply them across multiple users to allow appropriate access to network resources. In addition, support for Wide Key ACLs further improves security by going beyond the typical source/ destination and MAC address as identification criteria access mechanism to provide filtering capabilities. Network Intrusion Detection and Response CLEAR-Flow Security Rules Engine CLEAR-Flow Security Rules Engine provides first order threat detection and mitigation, and mirrors traffic to appliances for further analysis of suspicious traffic in the network. Hardware-based sflow Sampling sflow is a sampling technology that provides the ability to continuously monitor application-level traffic flows on all interfaces simultaneously. The sflow agent is a software process that runs on Summit X450e and packages data into sflow datagrams that are sent over the network to an sflow collector. The collector gives an up-to-the-minute view of traffic across the entire network, providing the ability to troubleshoot network problems, control congestion and detect network security threats. Port Mirroring To allow threat detection and prevention, Summit X450e switches support many-to-one and one-to-many port mirroring. This allows the mirroring of traffic to an external network appliance such as an intrusion detection device for trend analysis or for utilization by a network administrator for diagnostic purposes. Port mirroring can also be enabled across switches in a stack. 6

127 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Comprehensive Security Management Line-Rate ACLs ACLs are one of the most powerful components used in controlling network resource utilization as well as protecting the network. Summit X450e switches support 1,024 centralized ACLs per 24-port block based on Layer 2, 3 or 4 header information such as the MAC or IP source/destination address. ACLs are used for filtering the traffic, as well as classifying the traffic flow to control bandwidth, priority, mirroring, and policy-based routing/switching. Denial of Service Protection Summit X450e switches effectively handle DoS attacks. If the switch detects an unusually large number of packets in the CPU input queue, it will assemble ACLs that automatically stop these packets from reaching the CPU. After a period of time, these ACLs are removed, and reinstalled if the attack continues. ASIC-based LPM routing eliminates the need for control plane software to learn new flows, allowing more network resilience against DoS attacks. Secure Management To prevent management data from being intercepted or altered by unauthorized access, Summit X450e switches support SSH2, SCP and SNMPv3 protocols. The MD5 hash algorithm used in authentication prevents attackers from tampering with valid data during routing sessions. 7

128 2ABC DEF3 MNO6 4GHI 5ABC 7PQRS 8TUV 0+ #+ *U WXYZ9 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Target Application PoE and Non-PoE Edge Switches for High-Bandwidth Applications With line-rate performance and low latency, all Summit X450e switches extend the benefits of the ExtremeXOS operating system to the network edge. This uniformity provides consistent quality and performance throughout your converged network while reducing operational inefficiencies. The Summit X450e-24p/48p PoE edge switches connect wireless devices, LAN telephony, PDAs and other equipment without compromising security, scalability, availability, mobility or management. The Summit X450e-24t/48t non-poe edge switches provide the same uncompromising service when PoE is not a requirement. Summit X450e-24p/48p ` ` NETWORK CORE Summit X450e-24t/48t Supported Protocols and Standards A list of supported protocols and standards is available on the Extreme Networks website at: 8

129 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Technical Specifications Summit X450e-24p/ Summit X450e-24p-TAA/ Summit X450e-24t General Specifications Performance 128 Gbps switch fabric bandwidth 95.2 Mpps frame forwarding rate 9,216 Byte maximum packet size (Jumbo Frame) 128 load sharing trunks, up to 8 members per trunk 8 QoS queues/port 4,094 VLANs (Port, Protocol, IEEE 802.1Q) 1,024 centralized ACL rules per switch Forwarding Tables Layer 2/MAC Addresses: 8K IPv4 LPM Entries: 512 IPv6 LPM Entries: 256 Rate Limiting Ingress bandwidth policing/rate limiting per flow Egress bandwidth rate shaping per egress queue and per port Rate Limiting Granularity: 64Kbps Available Rate Limiters: 1,024 per switch Indicators Per port status LED including power status System Status LEDs: management, fan and power Ports 24 ports 10/100/1000BASE-T PoE with auto-speed and auto-polarity (Summit X450e-24p/ Summit X450e-24p-TAA) 24 ports 10/100/1000BASE-T with auto-speed and auto-polarity (Summit X450e-24t) 4 ports SFP (shared PHY with 4 10/100/1000BASE-T ports) 1 port Serial (control port) 1 10/100BASE-T out-of-band management port Per port status LED including power status Option Slot Slot for XGM2 dual 10 gigabit option module External Power Supply Support EPS-500 Physical Specifications Dimensions Height: 1.73 Inches/4.4 Cm Width: Inches/44.1 Cm Depth: 15.3 Inches/38.7 Cm Weight: 14 lbs/6.35 Kg (Summit X450e-24p/ Summit X450e-24p-TAA) Weight: lbs/6.24 Kg (Summit X450e-24t) Operating Specifications Temperature Operating Temperature Range: 0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F) Operating Humidity: 10% to 93% relative humidity, non-condensing Operational Shock (Half Sine): 30 m/s2 (3g), 11ms, 60 Shocks Operational Random Vibration: g rms Storage & Transportation Conditions (Packaged) Transportation Temperature: -40 C to 70 C (- 40 F to 158 F) Storage and Transportation Humidity: 10% to 95% RH, non-condensing Packaged Shock (Half Sine): 180 m/s2 (18g), 6ms, 600 shocks Packaged Sine Vibration: 5 62 Velocity 5mm/s, G Packaged Random Vibration: ASD w/-3db/oct. from Hz 14 drops min on sides & 42 (<15kg box) Power & Acoustic Sound All Summit X450e 24-port Models Voltage Input Range: V Maximum In-Rush Current: 280V Efficiency: 80% with 60% 100% load Line Frequency Range: Hz Nominal Frequency Range: Hz Power Supply Input Socket: IEC 320 C14 Power Cord Input Plug: IEC 320 C13 Sound Power in accordance with EN ( ) Sound Power: 62 dba per ISO 7779 Declared Sound Power: 6.4 belsa per ISO 7779 & ISO 9296 Bystander Sound Pressure in accordance with NEBS GR-63 Issue 2 Bystander Sound Pressure: 54 dba right Summit X450e-24p/ Summit X450e-24p-TAA Nominal Input Ratings: V, 50/60Hz, 5.25A Nominal Input Current: 115V~ (lowline) 230V~ (highline) Heat Dissipation (with PoE full load): 120W (410 BTU/hr) Power Consumption (with PoE full load): 488W (1,665 BTU/hr) Heat Dissipation (without PoE): 54W (184 BTU/hr) Power Consumption (without PoE): 54W (184 BTU/hr) Summit X450e-24t Nominal Input Ratings: V, 50/60Hz, 1A Nominal Input Current: 115V~ (lowline) 230V~ (highline) Heat Dissipation: 54W (184 BTU/hr) Power Consumption: 54W (184 BTU/hr) 9

130 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Technical Specifications Summit X450e-48p/ SummitX450e-48p-TAA/ Summit X450e-48t General Specifications Performance 256 Gbps switch fabric bandwidth Mpps frame forwarding rate 9,216 Byte maximum packet size (Jumbo Frame) 128 load sharing trunks, up to 8 members per trunk 8 QoS queues/port 4,094 VLANs (Port, Protocol, IEEE 802.1Q) 1,024 centralized ACL rules per 24-ports Forwarding Tables Layer 2/MAC Addresses: 8K IPv4 LPM Entries: 512 IPv6 LPM Entries: 256 Rate Limiting Ingress bandwidth policing/rate limiting per flow Egress bandwidth rate shaping per egress queue and per port Rate Limiting Granularity: 64Kbps Available Rate Limiters: 1,024 per 24-ports Indicators Per port status LED including power status System Status LEDs: management, fan and power Ports 48 ports 10/100/1000BASE-T PoE with auto-speed and auto-polarity (Summit X450e-48p/ Summit X450e-48p-TAA) 48 ports 10/100/1000BASE-T with auto-speed and auto-polarity (Summit X450e-48t) 4 ports SFP (shared PHY with 4 10/100/1000BASE-T ports) 1 port Serial (control port) 1 10/100BASE-T out-of-band management port Option Slot Slot for XGM2 dual 10 gigabit option module External Power Supply Support EPS-C with EPS-600LS (Summit X450e-48p) EPS-500 (Summit X450e-48t) Physical Specifications Dimensions Height: 1.73 Inches/4.4 Cm Width: Inches/44.1 Cm Depth: 17.0 Inches/43.2 Cm Weight: lbs/7.4 Kg (Summit X450e-48p/ Summit X450e-48p-TAA) Weight: lbs/7.14 Kg (Summit X450e-48t) Operating Specifications Temperature Operating Temperature Range: 0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F) Operating Humidity: 10% to 93% relative humidity, non-condensing Operational Shock (Half Sine): 30 m/s2 (3g), 11ms, 60 Shocks Operational Random Vibration: g rms Storage & Transportation Conditions (Packaged) Transportation Temperature: -40 C to 70 C (- 40 F to 158 F) Storage and Transportation Humidity: 10% to 95% RH, non-condensing Packaged Shock (Half Sine): 180 m/s2 (18g), 6ms, 600 shocks Packaged Sine Vibration: 5 62 Velocity 5mm/s, G Packaged Random Vibration: ASD w/-3db/oct. from Hz 14 drops min on sides & 42 (<15kg box) Power & Acoustic Sound All Summit X450e 48-port Models Voltage Input Range: V Nominal Input Ratings: 100~240V, 50/60 Hz, 6.0A Maximum In-Rush Current: 230V Efficiency: 80% with 60% 100% load Line Frequency Range: Hz Nominal Frequency Range: Hz Power Supply Input Socket: IEC 320 C14 Power Cord Input Plug: IEC 320 C13 Sound Power in accordance with EN ( ) Sound Power: 62 dba per ISO 7779 Declared Sound Power: 6.4 belsa per ISO 7779 & ISO 9296 Bystander Sound Pressure in accordance with NEBS GR-63 Issue 2 Bystander Sound Pressure: 54 dba right Summit X450e-48p/ Summit X450e-48p-TAA Nominal Input Current: 100V~ (lowline) 230V~ (highline) Heat Dissipation (with PoE full load): 180W (614 BTU/hr) Power Consumption (with PoE full load): 507W (1,730 BTU/hr) Heat Dissipation (without PoE): 73W (250 BTU/hr) Power Consumption (without PoE): 73W (250 BTU/hr) Summit X450e-48t Nominal Input Current: 115V~ (lowline) 230V~ (highline) Heat Dissipation: 73W (250 BTU/hr) Power Consumption: 73W (250 BTU/hr) 10

131 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Technical Specifications Summit X450e Series All Regulatory/Safety Standards North American Safety of ITE UL st Ed., Listed Device (U.S.) CSA 22.2# st Ed. (Canada) Complies with FCC 21CFR (U.S. Laser Safety) CDRH Letter of Approval (U.S. FDA Approval) European Safety of ITE EN :2001+A11 EN A2:2001 (Lasers Safety) TUV-R GS Mark by German Notified Body 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive International Safety of ITE CB Report & Certificate per IEC : National Differences AS/NZS (Australia/New Zealand) EMI/EMC Standards North America EMC for ITE FCC CFR 47 part 15 Class A (U.S.) ICES-003 Class A (Canada) European EMC Standards EN 55022:2003 Class A EN 55024:A Class A includes IEC , 3, 4, 5, 6, 11 EN ,8-2000(Harmonics) EN A1:2001(Flicker) ETSI EN v1.3.3, (EMC Telecommunications) 2004/108/EC EMC Directive International EMC Certifications CISPR 22: 2005, Class A (International Emissions) CISPR 24:A2:2003 Class A (International Immunity) IEC/EN :2001 Electrostatic Discharge, 8kV Contact, 15 kv Air, Criteria A EC/EN :2002 Radiated Immunity 10V/m, Criteria A EC/EN :2004 Transient Burst, 1 kv, Criteria A IEC/EN :2001 Surge, 2 kv L-L, 2 kv L-G, Level 3, Criteria A IEC/EN :2004 Conducted Immunity, MHz, 10V/m unmod. RMS, Criteria A EC/EN :2004 Power Dips & Interruptions, >30%, 25 periods, Criteria C Country Specific VCCI Class A (Japan Emissions) ACMA (C-Tick) (Australia Emissions) KCC Mark EMC Approval (Korea) Telecom Standards EN/ETSI :2001 (EMC Telecommunications) EN/ETSI (Environmental for Telecommunications) IEEE Media Access Standards IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-X IEEE 802.3ae 10GBASE-X IEEE 802.3an 10GBASE-T Environmental Standards EN/ETSI v2.1.2 ( ) Class 1.2 Storage EN/ETSI v2.1.2 ( ) Class 2.3 Transportation EN/ETSI v2.1.2 ( ) Class 3.1e Operational EN/ETSI ( ) Acoustic Noise ASTM D3580 Random Vibration Unpackaged 1.5G Security Common Criteria EAL3+ Certification Warranty Ltd. Lifetime with express Advanced Hardware Replacement (for products shipped from Extreme Networks on or after June 29, 2009) For warranty details, visit 11

132 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Accessories Summit X450e Series Redundant PSUs EPS-500 EPS-500 is the redundant AC Power Supply for higher power consuming AC PSU-based switches including Power-over-Ethernet enabled switches. EPS-500 is one rack unit height and works in standalone. EPS-500 can be rack mounted in a regular 19 inch rack system. EPS-500 comes with a DC output cable to connect between the Summit switch and EPS-500. Front View Rear View EPS-600LS and EPS-C EPS-600LS is a power module that works with the EPS-C External Power System Chassis. EPS-C has three slots for EPS-600LS and one DC output to connect to high-density PoE Summit switches. Depending upon the number of EPS-600LS installed in EPS-C, it can provide 1) Redundant configuration for up to 370 watts of PoE power with one EPS-600LS installed; 2) Non-Redundant configuration for up to 740 watts of PoE power with two EPS-600LS installed; and 3) Redundant configuration for up to 740 watts of PoE power with three EPS-600LS installed. EPS-C comes with a DC output cable to connect between the Summit switch and EPS-C with EPS-600LS installed. Front View Rear View Configured View Redundant PSU Compatibility Matrix Summit Switch Models Summit Switch Part Number(s) External Redundant PSU options Summit X450e-24t EPS-500 external power supply (10911) Summit X450e-24p EPS-500 external power supply (10911) Summit X450e-48t EPS-500 external power supply (10911) Summit X450e-48p EPS-C (10912) and EPS-600LS (10913) Summit X450e-48p-TAA EPS-C (10912) and EPS-600LS (10913) 12

133 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Accessories Power Supply Units EPS-500 Dimensions and Weight EPS-500 Height: 1.73 Inches/4.4 Cm Width: 17.4 Inches/44 Cm Depth: 7.6 Inches/19.3 Cm Weight: 10.8 Lbs/4.9 Kg Power Voltage Input Range: V Nominal Input Ratings: V~, 50 60Hz, 10A Line Frequency Range: Hz Maximum Input Current: 5.75A at 115 VAC, 2.80A at 230 VAC Maximum Inrush Current: 30A at 115 VAC, 60A at 230 VAC Output: -50 VDC, 7.5A max, 375 Watts 12 VDC, 7.5A max, 90 Watts Power Supply Input Socket: IEC 320 C14 Power Cord Input Plug: IEC 320 C13 Heat Dissipation: 158W (539.1 BTU/h) Power Consumption: 659W ( BTU/h) EPS-C/EPS-600LS Dimensions and Weight EPS-C Height: 1.73 Inches/4.4 Cm Width: Inches/44.0 Cm Depth: Inches/30.0 Cm Weight: 7.17 Lbs/3.16 Kg EPS-600LS Height: 1.69 Inches/4.3 Cm Width: 4.61 Inches/11.7 Cm Depth: Inches/30.9 Cm Weight: 3.74 Lbs/1.70 Kg Power EPS-600LS Voltage Input Range: V Nominal Input Voltage/Hz: 115V~/60Hz & 230V~/50Hz, 10.0A Line Frequency Range: Hz Maximum Input Current Rating: 7.0A at 115 VAC, 3.5A at 230 VAC Maximum Inrush Current: 30A at 115 VAC, 60A at 230 VAC Power Supply Input Socket: IEC 320 C14 Power Cord Input Plug: IEC 320 C13 Heat Dissipation: 219W (747.7BTU/h) Power Consumption: 801W (2733.1BTU/h) External Power Supply Chassis System EPS-C with three EPS-600LS installed Heat Dissipation: 360W (1228.4BTU/h) Power Consumption: 1620W (5527.7BTU/h) XGM2 Dual 10 Gigabit Ethernet Modules XGM2 Dual 10 Gigabit Ethernet Module XGM2-2bt XGM2-2sf XGM2-2xf XGM2-2xn Interface Type 10GBASE-T SFP+ XFP XENPAK Supported Media UTP SFP+ Passive Copper SFP+ Optics XFP Optics XENPAK Optics Distance 100 meters (Category 6a) 55 meters (Category 6 and 5e) 1-10 meters (Passive Copper) 300m-40km 300m-80km 300m-80km Optics Support N/A 10GBASE-SR/LR/ER/LRM 10GBASE-SR/LR/ER/ZR 10GBASE-SR/LR/ER/ZR/LW 13

134 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Ordering Information Part Number Name Description Summit X450e-24t 24 10/100/1000BASE-T; 4 unpopulated 1000BASE-X SFP ports (shared); slot for XGM2 10 Gigabit Ethernet module; 2 SummitStack stacking ports; 1 AC PSU; connector for EPS-500 external redundant PSU; ExtremeXOS Edge license Summit X450e-24p 24 10/100/1000BASE-T Power over Ethernet; 4 unpopulated 1000BASE-X SFP ports (shared); slot for XGM2 10 Gigabit Ethernet module; 2 SummitStack stacking ports; 1 AC PSU; connector for EPS-500 external redundant PSU; ExtremeXOS Edge license 16142T Summit X450e-24p-TAA U.S. Federal TAA; 24 10/100/1000BASE-T Power over Ethernet; 4 unpopulated 1000BASE-X SFP ports; dual 10G option slot; 2 dedicated10g stacking ports; AC PSU; connector for EPS-500 external redundant PSU; ExtremeXOS Edge license Summit X450e-48t 48 10/100/1000BASE-T; 4 unpopulated 1000BASE-X SFP ports (shared); slot for XGM2 10 Gigabit Ethernet module; 2 SummitStack stacking ports; 1 AC PSU; connector for EPS-500 external redundant PSU; ExtremeXOS Edge license Summit X450e-48p 48 10/100/1000BASE-T with PoE; 4 unpopulated 1000BASE-X SFP ports (shared); slot for XGM2 10 Gigabit Ethernet module; 2 SummitStack stacking ports; 1 AC PSU; ExtremeXOS Edge license; connector for EPS-C external power system chassis (Requires EPS-600LS) 16148T Summit X450e-48p-TAA U.S. Federal TAA; 48 10/100/1000BASE-T with PoE; 4 unpopulated SFP ports; option slot for 10 Gigabit option card XGM2; 2 SummitStack stacking ports; 1 AC PSU; ExtremeXOS Edge license; connector for EPS-C external power system chassis (Requires EPS-600-LS) Summit X450 Advanced Edge License ExtremeXOS Advanced Edge License for Summit X450e series switches XGM2-2xf Option Card, Two Unpopulated 10 Gigabit XFP Slots, compatible with Summit X450e, and Summit X450a XGM2-2xn Option Card, Two Unpopulated 10 Gigabit XENPAK Slots, compatible with Summit X450e and Summit X450a XGM2-2sf Option Card, Two Unpopulated 10 Gigabit SFP+ Slots, compatible with Summit X350, Summit X450e and Summit X450a XGM2-2bt Option Card, two 10GBASE-T ports, compatible with Summit X350, Summit X450e and Summit X450a EPS External Power Supply Unit 500 Watts, Power cord ordered separately EPS-C 2 External Power Supply Unit, Power cord ordered separately, Accepts up to three EPS-600LS Power Modules EPS-600LS External Power System Power Module for EPS-C, 600 Watts SR XENPAK 10GBASE-SR XENPAK Transceiver, 850 nm, up to 300 m on Multimode Fiber, SC Connector LR XENPAK 10GBASE-LR XENPAK Transceiver, 1310 nm, up to 10 km on Single-mode Fiber, SC Connector ER XENPAK 10GBASE-ER XENPAK Transceiver, 1550 nm, up to 40 km on Single-mode Fiber, SC Connector ZR XENPAK 10GBASE-ZR XENPAK Transceiver, 1550 nm, up to 80 km on Single-mode Fiber, SC Connector LX4 XENPAK 10GBASE-LX4 XENPAK Transceiver, 1310 nm, up to 300 m on Multi-mode Fiber and up to 10 km on a Single-mode Fiber, SC Connector SR XFP 10GBASE-SR XFP Transceiver, 850nm, up to 300m on Multimode Fiber, LC Connector LR XFP 10GBASE-LR XFP Transceiver, 1310nm, up to 10km on Single-mode Fiber, LC Connector 1 Compatible with Summit X450e-24t, X450e-48t, and X450e-24p 2 Compatible with Summit X450e-48p and Summit X450e-48p-TAA 14

135 Extreme Networks Data Sheet: Summit X450e Series Ordering Information Part Number Name Description ER XFP 10GBASE-ER XFP Transceiver, 1550nm, up to 40km on Single-mode Fiber, LC Connector ZR XFP 10GBASE-ZR XFP Transceiver, 1550nm, up to 80km on Single-mode Fiber, LC Connector GBASE-SR SFP+ 10GBASE-SR SFP+, 850nm, LC Connector, transmission length of up to 300m on MMF GBASE-LR SFP+ 10GBASE-LR SFP+, 1310nm, LC Connector, transmission length of up to 10km on SMF SFP+ LRM Module 10 Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ module, 1310nm, legacy MMF 220m link, LC connector GBASE-ER SFP+ 10GBASE-ER SFP+, 1550nm, LC connector, transmission length of up to 40km on SMF GBASE-CR SFP+ 1m 10GBASE-ER XFP Transceiver, 1550nm up to 40km on Single-mode Fiber, LC Connector GBASE-CR SFP+ 3m 10GBASE-CR SFP+ pre-terminated twin-ax copper cable with link lengths of 3m GBASE-CR SFP+ 5m 10GBASE-CR SFP+ pre-terminated twin-ax copper cable with link lengths of 5m GBASE-CR SFP+ 10m 10GBASE-CR SFP+ pre-terminated twin-ax copper cable with link lengths of 10m SX SFP 1000BASE-SX SFP, 1000BASE-SX, LC Connector LX SFP 1000BASE-LX SFP, 1000BASE-LX, LC Connector ZX SFP 1000BASE-ZX SFP, Extra Long Distance SMF 70 km/21 db Budget, LC Connector BX SFP BX-D 1000BASE-BX-D SFP, SMF (1490 nm TX/1310 nm RX Wavelength) BX SFP BX-U 10GBASE-CR SFP+ pre-terminated twin-ax copper cable with link lengths of 5m Stacking Cable, 0.5M SummitStack/UniStack Stacking Cable, 0.5M Stacking Cable, 1.5M SummitStack/UniStack Stacking Cable, 1.5M Stacking Cable, 3.0M SummitStack/UniStack Stacking Cable, 3.0M Stacking Cable, 5.0M 3 SummitStack Stacking Cable, 5.0M 3 Not supported when using with Summit X650 and UniStack Make Your Network Mobile Corporate and North America Extreme Networks, Inc Monroe Street Santa Clara, CA USA Phone Europe, Middle East, Africa and South America Phone Asia Pacific Phone Japan Phone extremenetworks.com 2012 Extreme Networks, Inc. All rights reserved. Extreme Networks, the Extreme Networks logo, Extreme Standby Router Protocol, ExtremeXOS, ExtremeXOS ScreenPlay, Ridgeline, Summit, SummitStack and UniStack are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Extreme Networks, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. sflow is the property of InMon Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. 1242_23 04/2012

136 Gefen 1:4 Splitter for HDMI with FST and 3DTV FST: Fast Switching Technology (FST) is a Gefen software implementation for HDMI products. FST was created to improve the lengthy HDMI authentication process, based on the HDMI and HDCP specifications. FST allows connecting/disconnecting or turning ON / OFF of HDTV displays without having these activities affect other displays in the same distribution system. Features: One HDMI Input, Four HDMI Outputs with FST and 3DTV The GefenToolBox 1:4 Splitter for HDMI with FST and 3DTV sends a Hi-Def A/V source to up to four (4) HDTV displays at the same time without losing quality or resolution. This product works with any Hi-Def source supporting resolutions up to 1080p Full HD with Deep Color, 3DTV pass-through, and lossless audio formats such as Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. How It Works GTB-HDFST-144 Connect the Hi-Def source to the HDMI input on the product using the supplied HDMI cable. Connect up to four (4) HDTV displays to the four (4) HDMI outputs on the product. Connect the locking power supply to the product and connect the power cable to an available electrical outlet. Apply power to the source and displays. The source signal will now be seen on all four (4) displays at the same time. Simultaneously displays a Hi-Def source on up to 4 HDTV displays Supports resolutions up to 1080p Full HD with 12-bit Deep Color 3DTV pass-through Lip Sync pass-through FST Technology eliminates flashing due to the HDMI and HDCP authentication process Fast and Slow FST Modes Advanced EDID Management for rapid integration Supports LPCM 7.1 audio, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, and DTS-HD Master Audio Supports the use of DVI sources and DVI displays Field-upgradeable firmware using Mini-USB port Locking Power Supply Energy Star compliant Wall-mountable Black or White finish Specifications: Video Amplifier Bandwidth: 225 MHz Input Video Signal: 1.2 Volts p-p Input DDC Signal: 5 Volts p-p (TTL) HDMI Input Connector: Type A 19-pin female HDMI Output Connectors: (4) Type A 19-pin female USB Port: Mini-A Power Supply: 5V DC Power Connector: Locking Power Consumption: 10 Watts (max) Operating Temperature: 0-40 C Dimensions: 3.0 W x 9.0 H x 1.0 D Shipping Weight: 4 lbs. Gefen, LLC Nordhoff Street, Chatsworth CA Tel. (818) (800) Fax (818) *Specifications subject to change without notice. **All trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.

137 Gefen 1:8 Splitter for HDMI with FST and 3DTV FST: Fast Switching Technology (FST) is a Gefen software implementation for HDMI products. FST was created to improve the lengthy HDMI authentication process, based on the HDMI and HDCP specifications. FST allows connecting/disconnecting or turning ON / OFF of HDTV displays without having these activities affect other displays in the same distribution system. Features: One HDMI Input, Eight HDMI Outputs with FST and 3DTV The GefenToolBox 1:8 Splitter for HDMI with FST and 3DTV sends a Hi-Def A/V source to up to 8 HDTV displays at the same time without losing quality or resolution. This product works with any Hi-Def source supporting resolutions up to 1080p Full HD with Deep Color, 3DTV pass-through, and lossless audio formats such as Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. How It Works GTB-HDFST-148 Connect the Hi-Def source to the HDMI input on the product using the supplied HDMI cable. Connect up to eight (8) HDTV displays to the eight (8) HDMI outputs on the product. Connect the locking power supply to the product and connect the power cable to an available electrical outlet. Apply power to the source and displays. The source signal will now be seen on all eight (8) displays at the same time. Simultaneously displays a Hi-Def source on up to 8 HDTV displays Supports resolutions up to 1080p Full HD with 12-bit Deep Color Supports 3DTV pass-through FST Technology eliminates flashing due to the HDMI and HDCP authentication process Fast and Slow FST Modes Advanced EDID Management for rapid integration Supports LPCM 7.1 audio, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, and DTS-HD Master Audio Supports the use of DVI sources and DVI displays Field-upgradeable firmware using Mini-USB port Locking Power Supply Energy Star compliant Wall-mountable Black or White finish Specifications: Video Amplifier Bandwidth: 225 MHz Input Video Signal: 1.2 Volts p-p Input DDC Signal: 5 Volts p-p (TTL) HDMI Input Connector: Type A 19-pin female HDMI Output Connectors: (8) Type A 19-pin female USB Port: Mini-A Power Supply: 5V DC Power Connector: Locking Power Consumption: 10 Watts (max) Operating Temperature: 0-40 C Dimensions: 3.0 W x H x 1.0 D Shipping Weight: 4 lbs. Gefen, LLC Nordhoff Street, Chatsworth CA Tel. (818) (800) Fax (818) *Specifications subject to change without notice. **All trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.

138 Composite to HDMI Scaler GTV-COMPSVID-2-HDMIS User Manual gefentv.com

139 ASKING FOR ASSISTANCE Technical Support: Telephone (818) (800) Fax (818) Technical Support Hours: 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Monday thru Friday PST. Write To: Gefen, LLC c/o Customer Service Nordhoff St Chatsworth, CA Notice Gefen, LLC reserves the right to make changes in the hard ware, packaging, and any accompanying doc u men ta tion without prior written notice. Composite to HDMI Scaler is a trademark of Gefen, LLC 2012 Gefen, LLC. All rights reserved All trademarks are the property of their respective companies. Rev A1

140 CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Operation Notes 3 Features 4 Panel Layout 5 Panel Description 6 Connecting And Operating The Composite to HDMI Scaler 7 Configuring The Composite to HDMI Scaler 12 Specifications 13 Warranty

141 INTRODUCTION Congratulations on your purchase of the Composite to HDMI Scaler. Your complete satisfaction is very important to us. Gefen TV Gefen TV is a unique product line catering to the growing needs for innovative home theater solutions. We specialize in total integration for your home theater, while also focusing on going above and beyond customer expectations to ensure you get the most from your hardware. We invite you to explore our distinct product line and hope you fi nd your solutions. Don t see what you are looking for here? Please call us so we can better assist you with your particular needs. The Gefen TV Composite to HDMI Scaler The new GefenTV Composite to HDMI Scaler takes either Composite Video or S-Video as input and converts it to digital HDMI video, then scales it up to a maximum output of 1080p resolution (or 1920x1200 when used with a computer monitor). How It Works Simply plug in your Composite or S-Video video source to its input jack on the rear of the Scaler. The Scaler will automatically detect the video frequency and resolution of the source signal, then convert that picture to a digital HDMI video signal. You will then choose the best output resolution and viewing format of the picture on your HDTV via the on-screen menu system by using the buttons on the front of the Scaler. 1

142 OPERATION NOTES READ THESE NOTES BEFORE INSTALLING OR OPERATING THE COMPOSITE TO HDMI SCALER The Composite to HDMI Scaler will cross convert between some digital and audio formats. All audio outputs (HDMI, digital TOSLINK, and analog stereo mini-jack) will be active. The Composite & S-video to HDMI Scaler will not, however, down-mix multi-channel audio formats to 2 channel analog stereo. Please see the chart on page 6 for more information. To switch between Composite and S-Video inputs, press the + button Compatible with all HDMI and DVI* displays. 2

143 FEATURES Features Inputs S-Video or Composite Video at 480i or 576i resolutions Outputs HDMI video at resolutions of up to 1080p Input resolution is automatically detected while the output resolution and refresh rate can be selected via the on-screen display (OSD) menu system and front panel push-buttons 48MB frame buffer for frame rate conversion Scales Composite Video and S-Video to HDMI with embedded audio Supports video output resolutions for computer equipment at up to 1920x1200 Package Includes (1) Composite to HDMI Scaler (1) 6 ft. 3 RCA Composite Cable (M-M) (1) 5V DC Power Supply (1) Quick-Start Guide 3

144 PANEL LAYOUT Front Panel Back Panel

145 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1 TOSLINK Audio Output Digital TOSLINK audio output. This port is constantly active. It will output 2 channel PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS formats. Output format is dependant on the chosen input format which can be selected through the on-screen GUI. 2 R/L Analog Audio Stereo analog mini-jack output for analog audio. It will only output a stereo analog signal when the selected input is either from digital or analog stereo source. Multichannel TOSLINK tracks will not be converted to stereo. 3 HDMI Output This connector will accept a standard 19 pin HDMI male cable. Video output is scalable to a maximum resolution of 1080p 60Hz. The output resolution is selected through the on-screen GUI. Audio is permanently active through this connection. Both stereo and multi-channel audio is supported, based on the selected audio input. 4 Menu Button Pressing this button will activate the on-screen GUI. It is also the confi rmation button for all sub menus. Use this button to enter sub menus and to begin adjustment for selected menu items. 5 Down / - Button This button will scroll down through menu selections and will decrease the selected adjustment value. 6 Up / + Button This button will scroll up through the menu system and will increase the selected adjustment value. This button will also switch between the composite and s-video input sources. 7 Analog Audio Inputs Stereo RCA right and left analog audio inputs. Input a stereo analog audio source which will be translated to the digital and analog output ports on the front panel. 8 Composite Video Input Standard composite RCA input. This input will accept a composite input of 480i and 576i for the conversion to HDMI. This source is selectable by the Up / + button located on the front panel. 9 S-Video Video Input Standard 4 pin s-video input. This input will accept a s-video input of 480i and 576i for the conversion to HDMI. This source is selectable This source is selectable by the Up / + button located on the front panel. 10 TOSLINK Audio Input Digital TOSLINK audio input. This port will accept multiple audio formats for translation to the digital and analog audio output ports on the front panel. Multiple audio formats are supported, including 2 channel PCM, multi channel PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS. 11 Power Input Input for the included 5V DC power supply. Please only use the included power supply. 12 Power LED Indicator This LED indicator will become active once the power supply is properly connected. If the light is not active, the power supply may not be the correct one, or the unit may have a fault. Please contact GefenTV technical support. 5

146 CONNECTING AND OPERATING THE COMPOSITE TO HDMI SCALER How to Connect the Composite to HDMI Scaler 1. Connect the composite or s-video source to the scaler using user supplied cables. 2. Connect the audio source (digital or analog) to the scaler using user supplied cables. NOTE: The Composite to HDMI Scaler will cross convert between some digital and audio formats. All audio outputs (HDMI, digital TOSLINK, and analog stereo mini-jack) will be active. Composite to HDMI Scaler will not, however, down-mix multi-channel audio formats to 2 channel analog stereo. Please see the chart below to see if audio will be heard out of a particular output based on the audio input format. INPUT OUTPUT TOSLINK 2 CHANNEL LPCM TOSLINK DOLBY DIGITAL & DTS ANALOG STEREO 2 CHANNEL HDMI YES YES YES TOSLINK YES YES YES ANALOG STEREO MINI-JACK YES NO YES 3. Connect the HDMI display to the scaler using a user supplied HDMI cable. 4. Connect the desired audio output to the desired audio device using user supplied cables. 5. Connect the included 5V DC power supply to the scaler. NOTE: Once the unit is connected and powered, the displays native resolution will be detected and set as the output on the Composite & S-video to HDMI Scaler. OPERATING THE COMPOSITE TO HDMI SCALER Both the Composite and S-Video inputs can be connected at the same time but only one source can be viewed at one time. To switch between the Composite and S-Video inputs, press the - button located on the front panel of the unit. The Composite to HDMI Scaler has a built in GUI for navigating the various functions. The GUI is navigated by the front panel buttons. 6

147 CONFIGURING THE COMPOSITE TO HDMI SCALER Entering the Menu System Pressing the Menu button on the front panel will display the GUI (graphical user interface) for adjustment options. The GUI is overlaid onto the outgoing video to the display. Therefore, the source must be outputting a compatible resolution for viewing on the display. If video is not visible on the display, the GUI will also fail to be displayed. To correct this, please reset the unit by following the steps below follow the steps below. Reset 1. Verify that the source is on and outputting a video signal. 2. Verify that the display is connected and powered on. 3. Press and hold the menu button, located on the front panel. 4. While holding the menu button, remove the power supply connector from the unit and wait 5 seconds. 5. While continuing to hold the menu button, re-insert the power supply into the unit and then release the menu button. This will reset the unit and allow it to detect the display s native resolution based on its EDID. If an image is still not being displayed, it is possible that either the display s EDID is corrupt or the Composite to HDMI Scaler cannot output the display s native resolution. Please call Gefen s technical support line. Navigation Navigation of the GUI is accomplished using the front panel buttons. Please see the chart below for the functions of each panel button. Button MENU Function Shows the On Screen Menu and acts as the confi rmation button in all menus + Moves menu cursor DOWN the menu / Increases adjustment values (Also Switches between the Composite and S-Video Inputs) - Moves menu cursor UP the menu / Decreases adjustment values 7

148 CONFIGURING THE COMPOSITE TO HDMI SCALER MAIN MENU The following are the main menu options. Use the - and + buttons to choose your desired subcategory and press Menu to enter it. CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS FINE TUNE COLOR OUTPUT OSD AUDIO INFORMATION CONTRAST Press the - and + buttons to select the CONTRAST option and press the MENU button to select it. Use the - and + buttons to adjust the CONTRAST setting. When you are finished adjusting the CONTRAST press the MENU button to return to the previous menu. BRIGHTNESS Press the - and + buttons to select the BRIGHTNESS option and press the MENU button to select it.. Use the - and + buttons to adjust the BRIGHTNESS setting. When you are finished adjusting the BRIGHTNESS press the MENU button to return to the previous menu. FINE TUNE Press the - and + buttons to select the FINE TUNE option and press the MENU button to select it.. There are several sub-categories that are available for adjustment. Select the desired option using the - and + buttons and press the MENU button to begin adjustment. Use the - and + buttons to adjust the selected option and press the MENU button when you are finished. The following options are available: HUE Use this option to adjust the image HUE. SATURATION Use this option to adjust the color SATURATION. SHARPNESS Use this options to adjust the image SHARPNESS. NR Use this option to adjust the amount of NOISE REDUCTION to be applied to the video signal. EXIT Pressing the MENU button when this option is selected will return you to the MAIN MENU. COLOR Press the MENU button to select the COLOR option. There are several subcategories that are available for adjustment. Select the desired option using the - and + buttons and press the MENU button to begin adjustment. Use the - and + buttons to adjust the selected option and press the MENU button when you are finished. The following options are available: 8

149 CONFIGURING THE COMPOSITE TO HDMI SCALER COLOR Press the MENU button to select the COLOR option. There are several subcategories that are available for adjustment. Select the desired option using the - and + buttons and press the MENU button to begin adjustment. Use the - and + buttons to adjust the selected option and press the MENU button when you are finished. The following options are available: RED Use this option to adjust the amount or RED in the video signal. GREEN Use this option to adjust the amount or GREEN in the video signal. BLUE Use this option to adjust the amount or BLUE in the video signal. EXIT Pressing the MENU button when this option is selected will return you to the MAIN MENU. SIZE Press the - and + buttons to select the SIZE option and press the MENU button to select it.. There are several sub-categories that are available for adjustment. Select the desired option using the - and + buttons and press the MENU button to begin adjustment. Use the - and + buttons to adjust the selected option and press the MENU button when you are finished. The following options are available: 4:3 Source Full - Stretches the image to fill the screen Pan Scan - Stretches the image to 4:3 aspect ratio without underscan Letterbox - Stretches the image to 16:9 aspect ratio without underscan Underscan - Stretches the image to fullscreen and just within the border of the screen Overscan - Stretches the image to fullscreen and just beyond the border of the display 9

150 CONFIGURING THE COMPOSITE TO HDMI SCALER OUTPUT Press the - and + buttons to select the OUTPUT option and press the MENU button to select it.. There are several sub-options that are available for selection. Select the desired option using the - and + buttons and press the MENU button to select it and exit. The following options are available: VGA UXGA 1080i p 50 WSXGA SVGA 480i 1080p i 50 WUXGA XGA 480p 576i 1080p 50 Native SXGA 720p p WXGA AUDIO Press the MENU button to select the AUDIO option. There are several subcategories that are available for adjustment. Select the desired option using the - and + buttons and press the MENU button to begin adjustment. Use the - and + buttons to adjust the selected option and press the MENU button when you are finished. The following options are available: SOURCE Use this option to select the audio SOURCE. Options are L/R (analog stereo input) and OPTICAL (digital audio input). DELAY Use this option to adjust the audio DELAY. Options are 40, 110, and 150 milliseconds of DELAY. SOUND Use this options to mute all SOUND from the output. EXIT Pressing the MENU button when this option is selected will return you to the MAIN MENU. OSD Press the MENU button to select the OSD option. There are several sub-categories that are available for adjustment. Select the desired option using the - and + buttons and press the MENU button to begin adjustment. Use the - and + buttons to adjust the selected option and press the MENU button when you are finished. The following options are available: H-POS Use this option to select the HORIZONTAL POSITION of the onscreen display. V-POS Use this option to select the VERTICAL POSITION of the onscreen display. TIMER Use this options to adjust how long the on-screen display will remain on the display, in seconds, when there is no user input. After this time period the menu will automatically close. BACKGROUND Use this options to adjust the opacity of the on-screen display s background. EXIT Pressing the MENU button when this option is selected will return you to the MAIN MENU. 10

151 CONFIGURING THE COMPOSITE TO HDMI SCALER FACTORY RESET This option will reset the entire unit to factory settings. Press the MENU button to select the FACTORY RESET option. Press the MENU button once and a confirmation will appear with the word YES. Press the MENU button once more to confirm a FACTORY RESET. INFORMATION Press the MENU button to view information on the current status of the unit. The following categories are displayed: SOURCE This will display the currently selected source. INPUT This will display the resolution of the currently selected source. OUTPUT This will display the current output resolution. VERSION This will display the current firmware revision. Pressing the MENU button will return you to the MAIN MENU. 11

152 SPECIFICATIONS Digital Video Amplifi er Bandwidth MHz VGA Amplifi er Bandwidth MHz Input DDC Signal... 5 Volts p-p (TTL) S-Video Connector... Mini-DIN Composite Connector... RCA Jack Power Consumption Watts (max) Power Supply... 5V DC Dimensions... 5 W x 1 H x 3.5 D Shipping Weight... 2 lbs. 12

153 WARRANTY Gefen warrants the equipment it manufactures to be free from defects in material and workmanship. If equipment fails because of such defects and Gefen is notifi ed within two (2) years from the date of shipment, Gefen will, at its option, repair or replace the equipment, provided that the equipment has not been subjected to mechanical, electrical, or other abuse or modifi cations. Equipment that fails under conditions other than those covered will be repaired at the current price of parts and labor in effect at the time of repair. Such repairs are warranted for ninety (90) days from the day of reshipment to the Buyer. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied, including without limitation, any implied warranty or merchantability or fi tness for any particular purpose, all of which are expressly disclaimed. 1. Proof of sale may be required in order to claim warranty. 2. Customers outside the US are responsible for shipping charges to and from Gefen. 3. Copper cables are limited to a 30 day warranty and cables must be in their original condition. The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate. However, Gefen assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this manual. In no event will Gefen be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages resulting from any defect or omission in this manual, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. The technical information contained herein regarding the features and specifi cations is subject to change without notice. For the latest warranty coverage information, refer to the Warranty and Return Policy under the Support section of the Gefen Web site at PRODUCT REGISTRATION Please register your product online by visiting the Register Product page under the Support section of the Gefen Web site. 13

154 *ma-compsvid-2-hdmis* Rev A Nordhoff St., Chatsworth CA fax: Pb This product uses UL or CE listed power supplies.

155 Convert audio encoded in Dolby Digital down to 2 channel LR GTV-DD-2-AA Convert up to 5.1-channel audio encoded in Dolby Digital Surround to L/R analog audio -- without additional costly equipment The GefenTV Digital Audio Decoder takes audio encoded in Dolby Digital (at up to 5.1 channels) from your multichannel S/PDIF or TOSLINK digital audio source and converts it to L/R analog audio -- without the need for any other external equipment! With the GefenTV Digital to Analog Decoder you can listen to digital audio sources such as DVD and CD players or digital computer audio on your legacy analog sound system, preserving your current investment. How It Works A coaxial or optical audio output on your digital audio source connects into the input on the Digital to Analog Decoder. The input type is chosen with the Decoder's selector button. The Decoder is connected to power. Analog RCA connectors on the Decoder output L/R analog audio to powered speakers. Note: This product is manufactured under license from Features: Converts S/PDIF or TOSLINK digital audio to L/R analog audio Digital interpolation filter and digital to analog converter (DAC) Supports up to 6 channels (up to 5.1 Surround) of audio encoded in Dolby Digital Auto samples at frequencies of 32, 44.1, 48 KHz 24-bit incoming bitstream on left and right channels Allows listening to digital audio sources on legacy analog sound systems Specifications* Inputs: Coaxial and Optical digital audio ports Outputs: Right and Left RCA-type Stereo analog output ports Output Impedance: 500 Ohms Output Voltage: 1.8V Max Input (0dBFS) Frequency Response: <+/-0.5dB Signal to Noise Ratio: >90dB (20Hz - 20kHz A Weighting) Power Supply/Power Consumption: 5V DC / 5W max. Operating Temperature: 0 C - 70 C Dimensions: 1.8" W x 1.8" H x 0.9" D Shipping Weight: 1 lb. Gefen, LLC Nordhoff Street, Chatsworth CA Tel. (818) (800) Fax (818) Gefen, LLC. All Rights Reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. *Specifications subject to change without notice.

156 HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler GTV-HDMI-2-COMPSVIDS User Manual

157

158 ASKING FOR ASSISTANCE Technical Support: Telephone (818) (800) Fax (818) Technical Support Hours: 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Monday thru Friday Pacific Time Write To: Gefen, LLC c/o Customer Service Nordhoff St Chatsworth, CA Notice Gefen, LLC reserves the right to make changes in the hardware, packaging and any accompanying documentation without prior written notice. HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler is a trademark of Gefen, LLC 2012 Gefen, LLC, All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Rev A11

159 CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Operation Notes 3 Features 4 Panel Layout 5 Panel Descriptions 6 Connecting And Operating Instructions 6 HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler 7 Specifications 8 Warranty

160 Congratulations on your purchase of the HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler. Your complete satisfaction is very important to us. GefenTV GefenTV is a unique product line catering to the growing needs for innovative home theater solutions. We specialize in total integration for your home theater, while also focusing on going above and beyond customer expectations to ensure you get the most from your hardware. We invite you to explore our distinct product line and hope you find your solutions. We will be happy to assist you in finding a solution for your particular needs. Please call us so we can better assist you with your particular needs. The GefenTV HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler The new GefenTV HDMI to Composite Scaler lets you transform HDMI video of resolutions from 480p to 1080p into Composite video or S-Video, properly sized to view optimally on your display. How It Works INTRODUCTION Simply connect your HDMI video source to the HDMI input jack of the GefenTV HDMI to Composite Scaler. Connect your Composite or S-Video display cable to the correct video output jack on the Scaler s rear panel. RCA-type analog audio output jacks and Coaxial S/PDIF digital audio output jacks allow for the connection of an audio Receiver or other device to receive the audio signal embedded in the HDMI signal. Power-cycle all connected components. You will then have HDMI video playing on your Composite or S-Video display with simultaneous audio out. Note regarding 480i / 576i resolutions on the inputs: The main purpose for the GTV-HDMI-2-COMPSVID is to downscale high definition digital video to standard definition NTSC / PAL analog signals. The GTV-HDMI-2-COMPSVID does not accept input video resolutions of 480i and 576i due to a limitation of the internal circuitry. A workaround is to connect devices with these output resolutions directly to displays. Source devices operating at resolutions of 480i / 576i will almost always have analog outputs such as Component, S-Video or Composite Video jacks. 1

161 operation notes READ THESE NOTES BEFORE INSTALLING OR OPERATING THE HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler The HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler converts HDTV input resolutions of / 60Hz, / 60Hz, / 60Hz, 1080i and 1080p at 50/60Hz to either NTSC 480i or PAL 576i. Supported PC input resolutions include 800x600@60Hz, 1280x1024@60Hz, and The HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler will cross-convert between some digital audio formats. Both the digital and analog audio outputs are active at all times. The HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler will not, however, downmix multi-channel digital audio formats to 2 channel analog stereo. Please see the chart on page 6 for more info. This device supports both NTSC and PAL video standards. This device maintains the aspect ratio of the original signal. Please be sure to set the proper output format for your television. NTSC 60Hz is commonly used in the United States and Japan, while PAL 50Hz is commonly used in European countries. Using the improper format will result in a unrecognizable picture and may damage your TV set. The HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler is HDMI 1.2 Compliant. HDCP encrypted HDMI sources are not supported by this device. If a connected HDMI source requires HDCP the outgoing video signal will result in a black screen. 2

162 features Features HDMI to Composite / S-Video conversion plus scaling HDMI pass-through Supports 480p to 1080p HDMI input resolutions at 50/60 Hz. Outputs 480i / 576i signal for Composite/S-Video Display devices Supports both NTSC and PAL formats Package Includes (1) HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler (1) 6 ft. HDMI Cable (M-M) (1) 5V DC Power Supply (1) User Manual 3

163 panel Layout Front Panel Back Panel

164 panel descriptions 1 Stereo Analog Audio Output 2 RCA stereo analog audio outputs. Connects to the display or a audio Receiver. Only 2 channel LPCM from the HDMI input can be passed to these outputs. Multi-channel bit-stream such as Dolby Digital will not be passed to this output. 2 Composite Analog Video Output RCA composite video output. Connect to a composite input on a television. 480i and 576i are the only resolution output options. 3 S-Video Analog Video Output S-Video video output. Connect to a s-video input on a television. 480i and 576i are the only resolution output options. 4 Digital Audio Output Coaxial digital audio output. Connects to the display or a audio Receiver. 2 channel LPCM and multi-channel bitstream can be output from this connector. 5 Video Format Output Switch Switch between NTSC (60Hz) and PAL (50Hz) output. Please ensure that you use the proper output for you television. Using the wrong format will result in a unrecognizable picture and may damage your television. 6 Under/Over Scan Switch Most analog television sets were designed to accept an over-scanned signal. If the resulting video signal displays a black border around the edges, use the over-scan option. If the resulting video signal is stretched far beyond the television s edge, use the under-scan option. 7 HDMI Input Connect the HDMI source to this input connector. This will accept both video and audio through the HDMI connector. 8 5V DC Power Supply Input Connect the included 5V DC power supply to this input. 9 Power LED This LED will become active once the included power supply is properly connected. 5

165 CONNECTING and OPERATING instructions How to Connect the HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler 1. Connect the HDMI source to the HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler s HDMI input using the supplied HDMI cable. 2. Connect the display to the HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler s composite or s-video outputs using user supplied cables. 3. Connect the HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler s stereo analog audio output to the display or audio Receiver. Optionally, you can connect the digital coaxial output to the display or an audio Receiver. 4. Ensure that the proper video output format is set using the NTSC/PAL format switch on the rear panel of the unit. Please consult your television s manual for the proper input format type. 5. Connect the included 5V DC power supply to the HDMI To Composite/S- Video Scaler. 6. Once you have a video image on-screen, use the under/over scan switch to adjust the image s size. NOTE: The HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler will cross convert between some digital audio formats. Both the digital and analog audio outputs are active at all times. The HDMI To Composite/S-Video Scaler will not, however, down-mix multichannel digital audio formats to 2 channel analog stereo. Please see the chart below for supported input and output formats. INPUT OUTPUT DIGITAL COAXIAL ANALOG STEREO MINI-JACK HDMI MULTICHANNEL LPCM YES *2 CHANNEL HDMI 2 CHANNEL LPCM YES HDMI DOLBY DIGITAL & DTS YES NO YES NO *2 channels are the front right and front left speakers. It will not down-mix multi-channel to 2 channel audio 6

166 specifications Input Video Signal V p-p Input Sync Signal... 5V p-p (TTL) Horizontal Frequency Range KHz Vertical Frequency Range KHz Power Supply... 5V DC A/V Input... (1) HDMI Type A, 19-pin female Video Outputs... (1) Composite RCA / (1) S-Video Audio Outputs... (2) L/R RCA analog audio, (1) S/PDIF digital audio Power Consumption Watts (max) Power Supply... 5V DC Shipping Weight... 4 lbs. 7

167 warranty Gefen warrants the equipment it manufactures to be free from defects in material and workmanship. If equipment fails because of such defects and Gefen is notified within two (2) years from the date of shipment, Gefen will, at its option, repair or replace the equipment, provided that the equipment has not been subjected to mechanical, electrical, or other abuse or modifications. Equipment that fails under conditions other than those covered will be repaired at the current price of parts and labor in effect at the time of repair. Such repairs are warranted for ninety (90) days from the day of reshipment to the Buyer. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied, including without limitation, any implied warranty or merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose, all of which are expressly disclaimed. 1. Proof of sale may be required in order to claim warranty. 2. Customers outside the US are responsible for shipping charges to and from Gefen. 3. Copper cables are limited to a 30 day warranty and cables must be in their original condition. The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate. However, Gefen assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this manual. In no event will Gefen be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages resulting from any defect or omission in this manual, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. The technical information contained herein regarding the features and specifications is subject to change without notice. For the latest warranty coverage information, refer to the Warranty and Return Policy under the Support section of the Gefen Web site at PRODUCT REGISTRATION Please register your product online by visiting the Register Product page under the Support section of the Gefen Web site. 8

168

169

170

171 Rev A Nordhoff St., Chatsworth CA fax: Pb This product uses UL listed power supplies.

172 / rev 8g / Middle Atlantic Products EXCEPTIONAL SUPPORT & PROTECTION MRK Series Enclosure EIA/TIA Compliant SEISMIC CERTIFIED The MRK Series 19 gangable enclosures Narrow design for large multi-bay jobs Features Fully welded construction provides the following weight capacities: UL Listed load capacity: 2,500 lbs., Static load capacity: 10,000 lbs., seismic certified capacity - 1,050 lbs. 1/8 thick structural steel internal braces 22 OD width with multiple depths available 1/2, 3/4, 1 & 1-1/2 electrical knockouts on split rear plates top & bottom, easily removable for cable pass-through, top plates additionally include UHF/VHF knockouts Two wide pairs of 11-gauge, threaded rackrail with numbered rackspace increments Optional solid, fully vented, plexi and vented plexi front doors available Open top with configurable top panel options Durable black textured powder coat finish Seismic certified (when used with MRK-Z4 option) with an Ip value of 1.5 UL Listed in the US and Canada MRK-4426 Architects and Engineers Specifications EIA compliant 19 gangable equipment rack shall be Middle Atlantic Products model # MRK- (refer to chart). Overall dimensions shall be H x W x D (refer to chart). Useable height shall be rackspaces, useable depth shall be (refer to chart). Fully welded construction shall provide a static capacity of 10,000 lbs. and a UL Listed load capacity of 2,500 lbs. Rack shall be constructed of the following materials: top and bottom shall be 14-gauge steel, horizontal braces shall be 16-gauge steel and all structural elements shall be finished in a durable black powder coat. Rack shall include a locking, latching rear door. Rack shall come equipped with two pairs of 11-gauge steel rackrail with tapped mounting holes in universal EIA spacing, black e-coat finish and numbered rackspaces. Rack shall have removable split rear knockout panels with 1/2, 3/4, 1 and 1-1/2 electrical knockouts and top knockouts for UHF/VHF antennae. Grounding and bonding stud shall be 1/4-20 threaded, installed in base of enclosure. MRK Series enclosures shall satisfy the 2007 & 2010 CBC; 2006, 2009 & 2012 IBC; ASCE 7-05 (2005 Edition) & ASCE 7-10 (2010 Edition) and the 2006 & 2009 editions of NFPA 5000 for use in areas of high seismicity, Seismic Use Group III, Zone 4 or Seismic Design Category (SDC) D with lateral force requirements for protecting 1,050 lbs. of essential equipment in locations with the highest level of seismicity and top floor or rooftop installations with an Importance factor (Ip) of 1.5 when used with MRK-Z4 seismic floor anchor bracket. Rack shall be OSHPD approved for fixed equipment anchorage in California healthcare facilities. Rack shall be UL Listed in the US and Canada. MRK shall be GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified for Children and Schools. MRK enclosure shall be RoHS EU Directive 2002 / 95 / EC compliant. MRK shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 and ISO registered company. MRK enclosure shall be warrantied to be free from defects in material or workmanship under normal use and conditions for the lifetime of the rack. OPTIONS Front doors shall be reinforced 16-gauge steel, model # FD-x (solid), VFD-x (vented, 25% open area), LVFD-x (vented, 64% open area), PFD-x (plexi), PVFD-44 (vented plexi) (x = # of rackspaces) Vented rear doors shall be 16-gauge steel, model # MW-VRD-44 (vented top and bottom), MW-LVRD-x (vented, 64% open area, excludes 24 and 37 space rack) (x = # of rackspaces), MW-CLVRD-44 (split rear door, vented, 79% open area) Removable keylocked side panels shall be model # SPN-x-(267/312/36/423) (x = # of rackspaces), 267 = 26-1/2 cabinet depth, 312 = 31-1/2 cabinet depth, 36 = 36 cabinet depth, 423 = 42 cabinet depth Top panels shall be 16-gauge steel, multiple styles available including model # MW-ST (solid), MW-10FT (10 fan), MW-4FT (four 4-1/2 fans), MW-6FT (three 6 fans), MW-VT (vented), MW-LA (accepts 6 and 12 wide cable ladders) and MV-PVT (26/31/36/42) (Vented pagoda adds 1.41 to top of rack) Caster base shall add 1 to overall height, featuring four casters with a 1,300 lb. weight capacity, UL Listed in the US and Canada. Model # CBS-MRK-x (x = cabinet depth) Fine floor friendly caster base shall have a 700 lb. weight capacity. Model # CBS-MRK-xR (x = cabinet depth) Rail bracket adapters shall allow for mounting of panels vertically between rackrail brackets. Available for 44 space enclosures. Model # RBA-MV44-x (x = 1, 2 or 3 rackspaces) Seismic Zone-4 and Seismic Use Group III compliancy floor anchor kit shall be model # MRK-Z4 Slide-out AXS enclosure option available (See AXS Spec sheet # S) / rev 8g / / MRK Series Enclosure C U S TO M I Z A B L E S P E C I F I C AT I O N C L I P S AVA I L A B L E AT M I D D L E AT L A N T I C.COM US: New Jersey California Illinois Voice: Fax: middleatlantic.com Canada: Ontario British Columbia Voice: Fax: middleatlantic.ca

173 MRK Configured A/V Enclosure EIA/TIA Compliant SEISMIC CERTIFIED Configured A/V enclosure ships complete with the most commonly used accessories Includes Integrated fan top with proportional speed fan controller Configurable rear door with bottom vent, solid locking front door 3-1/4 wide, 44 space vertical lacer strip Six horizontal lacer bars Twelve 8 Velcro cable management straps Thin power strip, 20 Amp, 20 outlet with cord Leveling feet 100 qty mounting hardware Available with or without sides Ganging hardware available for add-a-bay models without sides 26-1/2 or 31-1/2 MRK-4426-AV-AB Architects and Engineers Specifications EIA compliant 19 gangable equipment rack shall be Middle Atlantic Products model # MRK- - AV (refer to chart). Overall dimensions of rack shall be 83-1/8" H x 22" W x " D (refer to chart). Useable height shall be 44 rackspaces, useable depth shall be " (refer to chart). Fully welded construction shall provide static capacity of 10,000 lbs. and aul Listed load capacity of 2,500 lbs. Rack shall be constructed of the following materials: top and bottom shall be 14-gauge steel, horizontal braces shall be 16-gauge steel, solid front door shall be 18-gauge steel and all structural elements shall be finished in a durable black powder coat. Rack shall include a locking, latching rear door. Rack shall come equipped with two pairs of 11-gauge steel rackrail with tapped mounting holes in universal EIA spacing, black e-coat finish and numbered rackspaces. Rack shall include 100 qty mounting screws. Rack shall be equipped with one vertical lacer strip, Middle Atlantic Products model # LACE-44-OP. The LACE-44-OP is 3-1/4 wide and the useable height is 44 rackspaces. Rack shall also include four L shaped straight and two 4 offset horizontal lacer bars and twelve, 8 Velcro straps for cable management. Models intended for ganging (MRK- -AV-AB) (refer to chart) shall include ganging hardware for multi-bay installations. Rack shall feature integrated fan top, Middle Atlantic Products model # MW-10FT-FC for active thermal management. MW-10FT-FC shall feature proportional speed fan control and maximum airflow shall be 550 CFM. Rack shall have removable split rear knockout panels with 1/2, 3/4, 1 and 1-1/2 electrical knockouts and top knockouts for UHF/VHF antennae. Grounding and bonding stud shall be 1/4-20 threaded, installed in base of enclosure. MRK Series enclosures shall satisfy the 2007 & 2010 CBC; 2006, 2009 & 2012 IBC; ASCE 7-05 (2005 Edition) & ASCE 7-10 (2010 Edition) and the 2006 & 2009 editions of NFPA 5000 for use in areas of high seismicity, Seismic Use Group III, Zone 4 or Seismic Design Category (SDC) D with lateral force requirements for protecting 1,050 lbs. of essential equipment in locations with the highest level of seismicity and top floor or rooftop installations with an Importance factor (Ip) of 1.5 when used with MRK-Z4 seismic floor anchor bracket. Rack shall be OSHPD approved for fixed equipment anchorage in California healthcare facilities. Rack shall include a high-density thin power distribution and shall be Middle Atlantic Products model # PDT-2020C-NS with 20 outlets and 20 amps. Thin power distribution shall be 72-3/4 long x 1 deep x 1.9 wide. J-Box shall be 2 deep x 2 wide. Thin power distribution shall feature 20 NEMA 5-20R outlets. Corded power strip includes 20-amp protection and mounting hardware. Corded model shall be terminated with 10 foot power cord and NEMA 5-20P plug. PDT Series shall feature a black anodized finish. MRK and PDT Series shall be UL Listed in the US and Canada. MRK- -AV shall be GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified for Children and Schools. MRK- -AV shall be RoHS EU Directive 2002/95/EC compliant. MRK- -AV shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 and ISO registered company. PDT-2020C-NS and MW-10FT-FC shall be warrantied to be free from defects in material or workmanship under normal use and conditions for a period of 3 years. MRK enclosure shall be warrantied to be free from defects in material or workmanship under normal use and conditions for the lifetime of the rack. US: New Jersey California Illinois Voice: Fax: middleatlantic.com Canada: Ontario British Columbia Voice: Fax: middleatlantic.ca

174 Complete NVR / DVR enclosure addresses the cable and thermal management needs of both network and digital video recording devices Includes Two pairs cage nut style rackrail (NVR enclosure) Two pairs threaded rackrail (DVR enclosure) One pair of cage nut style Z-rail adapters (NVR enclosure) Fully vented top Fully perforated vented front door and vented split rear door 3-1/4 wide, 44 space vertical lacer strip Six horizontal lacer bars Twelve 8 Velcro cable management straps Thin power strip, 20 Amp, 20 outlet with cord One each 1 space and 2 space brush grommet Leveling feet 100 qty. 6mm threaded cage nuts and rack screws (NVR enclosure) 50 qty threaded cage nuts and rack screws (NVR enclosure) 100 qty mounting hardware (DVR enclosure) MRK Configured NVR / DVR Enclosures EIA/TIA Compliant SEISMIC CERTIFIED Available with or without sides Ganging hardware available for add-a-bay models without sides 31-1/2 or 36 MRK-4436-NVR-AB Architects and Engineers Specifications EIA compliant 19 gangable equipment rack shall be Middle Atlantic Products model # MRK- - DVR (NVR) (refer to chart). Overall dimensions of rack shall be 83-1/8" H x 22" W x " D (refer to chart). Useable height shall be 44 rackspaces, useable depth shall be " (refer to chart). Fully welded construction shall provide a static capacity of 10,000 lbs. and a UL Listed load capacity of 2,500 lbs. Rack shall be constructed of the following materials: top and bottom shall be 14-gauge steel, horizontal braces shall be 16-gauge steel, perforated vented front door shall be 18-gauge steel and all structural elements shall be finished in a durable black powder coat. Rack shall include a locking, latching rear door. Rack shall come equipped with two pairs of 11-gauge steel rackrail with tapped mounting holes in universal EIA spacing, black e-coat finish and numbered rackspaces. Rack shall include 100 qty mounting screws (DVR enclosure) or 100 qty. 6mm cage nuts and rack screws with 50 qty threaded cage nuts and rack screws (NVR enclosure). Rack shall be equipped with one vertical lacer strip, Middle Atlantic Products model # LACE-44-OP. The LACE-44-OP is 3-1/4 wide and the useable height is 44 rackspaces. Rack shall also include four L shaped straight and two 4 offset horizontal lacer bars and twelve, 8 Velcro straps for cable management. Models intended for ganging (MRK- - -AB) (refer to chart) shall include ganging hardware for multi-bay installations. Rack shall have removable split rear knockout panels with 1/2, 3/4, 1 and 1-1/2 electrical knockouts and top knockouts for UHF/VHF antennae. Grounding and bonding stud shall be 1/4-20 threaded, installed in base of enclosure. MRK Series enclosures shall satisfy the 2007 & 2010 CBC; 2006, 2009 & 2012 IBC; ASCE 7-05 (2005 Edition) & ASCE 7-10 (2010 Edition) and the 2006 & 2009 editions of NFPA 5000 for use in areas of high seismicity, Seismic Use Group III, Zone 4 or Seismic Design Category (SDC) D with lateral force requirements for protecting 1,050 lbs. of essential equipment in locations with the highest level of seismicity and top floor or rooftop installations with an Importance factor (Ip) of 1.5 when used with MRK-Z4 seismic floor anchor bracket. Rack shall be OSHPD approved for fixed equipment anchorage in California healthcare facilities. Rack shall include a high-density thin power distribution and shall be Middle Atlantic Products model # PDT-2020C-NS with 20 outlets and 20 amps. Thin power distribution shall be 72-3/4 long x 1 deep x 1.9 wide. J-Box shall be 2 deep x 2 wide. Thin power distribution shall feature 20 NEMA 5-20R outlets. Corded power strip includes 20 amp protection and mounting hardware. Corded model shall be terminated with 10 foot power cord and NEMA 5-20P plug. PDT Series shall feature a black anodized finish. MRK and PDT Series shall be UL Listed in the US and Canada. MRK- -DVR (NVR) shall be GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified for Children and Schools. MRK- -DVR (NVR) shall be RoHS EU Directive 2002/95/EC compliant. MRK- -DVR (NVR) shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 and ISO registered company. PDT-2020C-NS shall be warrantied to be free from defects in material or workmanship under normal use and conditions for a period of 3 years. MRK enclosure shall be warrantied to be free from defects in material or workmanship under normal use and conditions for the lifetime of the rack. US: New Jersey California Illinois Voice: Fax: middleatlantic.com Canada: Ontario British Columbia Voice: Fax: middleatlantic.ca

175 MRK basic dimensions REAR ViEW Top & BoTToM 5.94 [151].78 [20] 1.5 [38] 3.44 [87] 1.5 [38] 1.72 [44] [559] 1 [25] & 1.5 [38] EKo 1/2 [13] & 3/4 [19] EKo 5/8 [16] DiA Ko 1/2 [13] DiA D Ko (UHF/VHF Antenna EKo) 1 [25] & 1.5 [38] EKo All dimensions in inches unless otherwise noted [All dimensions in brackets are in millimeters] Top ViEW 1.56 [40] REAR ViEW [581] SiDE ViEW [495] FRonT ViEW 2.13 [54] 8.41 [214] 1.50 [38] removable EKo plates [489] Top ViEW of MRK SiDE SECTionAL DETAiL.90 [23] C D max. rear rail setback rackrail to front door clearance (with rackrail in forward-most position) 2.23 [57] solid/vented 2.04 [52] plexi door B A front rail setback 1.50 [38] A B C D Part # Overall Height Useable Height Overall Depth Useable Depth MRK [2112] [1959] [671] [610] MRK-4426-AV-AB* [2112] [1959] [671] [610] MRK [ [1781] [671] [610] MRK [1800] [1648] [671] [610] MRK [1223] [1070] [671] [610] MRK [2112] [1959] [798] [737] MRK-4431-AV-AB* [2112] [1959] [798] [737] MRK-4431-DVR-AB* [2112] [1959] [798] [737] MRK [1934] [1781] [798] [737] MRK [1800] [1648] [798] [737] MRK [1223] [1070] [798] [737] MRK [2112] [1959] [914] [853] MRK-4436-NVR-AB* [2112] [1959] [914] [853] MRK [1934] [1781] [914] [853] MRK [1800] [1648] [914] [853] MRK [1223] [ [914] [853] MRK [2112] [1959] [1067] [1006] MRK [1934] [1781] [1067] [1006] * Denotes that AV, DVR and NVR models are also available configured with optional side panels (remove AB suffix for part no. e.g. MRK-4426-AV). Side panels add 1-5/16 [33mm] to overall width of rack [559] 1/4-20 X 1 grounding stud (1 place only) BoTToM ViEW [479] FLooR MoUnTinG LoCATionS Ø0.44 [Ø11] - 8x 0.79 [20] REAR 2.07 [53] [505] C 2.07 [53] 3.00 [76] MRK-XX26=21.50 [546] MRK-XX31=26.50 [673] MRK-XX36=31.10 [790] MRK-XX42=37.10 [942] FRonT [435] MRK-XX26=24.29 [617] MRK-XX31=29.29 [744] MRK-XX36=33.89 [861] MRK-XX42=39.89 [1013] Top options ( ) removable plate opening accommodates 2 space panel MW-10FT accepts 10 fanmw-10ft-550cfm includes 10 fan MW-10FT-FC includes 10 fan and fan controller (included with A/V enclosures) MW-6FT accepts 6 fans MW-6FT-660CFM includes 6 fans MW-4FT accepts 4-1/2 fans MW-4FT-380CFM includes 4-1/2 fans MW-4QFT-FC includes 4-1/2 quiet fans and fan controller MW-LA accepts 6, 9 and 12 width cable ladder MW-ST solid US: New Jersey California Illinois Voice: Fax: middleatlantic.com Canada: Ontario British Columbia Voice: Fax: middleatlantic.ca MW-VT slot vent MW-LVT large perf vent Middle Atlantic Products, Inc. Middle Atlantic Products

176

177 Small and Powerful: An Easy-to-Use Camera Controller with Great Features Full rack size with the AW-RP50 and AW Actual Size Remote Camera Controller AW-RP50 NEW Simple to connect and operate, with both IP and Serial control functions Up to a hundred AW-HE50S/H units can be controlled via IP connections when using network hub (switching hub). IP addresses are automatically assigned to the AW-HE50S/H or AW-HS50 by the Automatic IP Address Setup function. One remote camera can be controlled simultaneously by up to five AW-RP50 units via an IP connection. Connection settings for the AW-RP50 can be configured with a PC. (configuration software supplied) IP-control performance depends on network conditions. Video signals cannot be transmitted via IP. Connection is not available with using the public network. Serial Control also Supported Controlled Via Serial Ports Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 2 Camera 5 Camera 1 Controller Controlled Via IP/ Serial Mixed Camera 1 Number of cameras when Serial and an IP are used together: Up to 100 Conventional Controlled Via IP Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Controller Controller Each camera could not be operated by multiple controllers Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3... Up to 100 cameras can be HUB connected. Controller Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 2 Camera 5 Camera 1 Camera 2 Controller Controller Each camera can be operated by multiple controllers Up to 5 existing Panasonic pan-tilt heads*, integrated cameras** and box cameras*** such as the AW-HE50S/H, etc. can be linked using the serial control (RS-422 protocol). * Compatible models: AW-PH405, AW-PH400 (AW-IF400 is required), AW-PH360, AW-PH650 ** Compatible model: AW-HE100 *** Compatible models: AK-HC1800, AK-HC1500, AW-HE870, AW-E860, AW-E750, AW-E655, AW-E650, AW-E350 5 RS-422 Ports Linking the AW-HS50 to IP control enables highly efficient and stress-free operations The camera setting information (such as iris and gain) acquired by the unit is displayed through the AUX output of the switcher or on the split-screen of MultiViewer. Acquires the ON AIR tally information of the switcher and lights the tally LED on the panel. Bus images can be changed by linking them to the camera selection. (Control bus targets : AUX, PVW, PinP, KEY-F) The switcher's MultiViewer screen can be changed to the camera image full screen with a one-touch button operation. (Control bus target : AUX only) Parameters such as the PinP position of the switcher can be changed with the pan/tilt lever. AW-RP50 Main Specifications Remote Camera Control Switcher Control Protocol Connection Adjustment functions Preset Memory Connection Switcher supported Linkage IPv4, RS-422 (Panasonic AW series protocol) Serial : Up to 5 cameras IP : Up to 100 cameras (Up to 100 when Serial and IP are used together) Pan/Tilt, Zoom, Focus, Iris, Gain, Pedestal, Shutter, Detail,White Balance (Auto, R/B Gain), Black Balance (Auto, R/B Pedestal), Switch scene files Up to 100 sets IP : 1 AW-HS50 Camera information display, Tally information imported, Bus material selection (AUX/PVW/PinP/KEY-F), Parameter Changes (Pan/Tilt lever, Zoom button) Interface Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Power Supply/ Power Consumption Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight Standard Accessories Conventional HUB Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Switcher Controller Previously, single operator system control was hard to achieve. Controlled Via IP HUB Controller Switcher 50 Series Switcher and Controller linked for streamlined operation. PC UP to 95 AW-HE50 units RS-422 LAN Multi-interface Cable (AW-CA20T6) Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3... Up to 100 cameras can be connected. LAN 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (for IP control) TO PAN/TILT HEAD RS-422 (for Serial control) TALLY INPUT x 5 channels TALLY/GPI GPI INPUT x 4 channels GPI OUTPUT x 4 channels 0 to +40 (32 F to 104 F) 10 % to 90 % (no condensation) DC12 V ±10 % (AC adapter provided), 0.5 A 210 mm x 67 mm x 177 mm (8-1/4 " x 2-5/8 " x 6-15/16 ") (excluding protrusions) Approx. 1.1 kg (2.4 lbs.) (without options) AC Adaptor, Power Cable RJ45 x 1 RJ45 x 5 D-sub 15 pin (female) x 1 DC IN x 1 Be sure to use the included AC adaptor and power cable 177 mm (6-15/16 ") 67 mm (2-5/8 ") 210 mm (8-1/4 ")

178 AD-CI52ST/CI52T AcousticDesign Ceiling Speakers Features Wide bandwidth, high fidelity performance ensures a full, rich, musical sound with low distortion Shares driver technology with AD-S (surface mount) loudspeakers for seamless sonic integration provides the ability to mix speaker models within zones for the best possible coverage AD-CI52ST employs shallow can can be mounted in ceilings and standard architectural walls True high fidelity, 2-way design speakers feature a 1" titanium HF dome tweeter for exceptional sound quality from a ceiling format loudspeaker QSC s new AcousticDesign C Series represents the state-of-the-art for in-ceiling speakers. Delivering exceptional sound quality and value for background music and paging systems, the AD-CI52T and AD-CI52ST are ideal for a wide range of business applications, including hotels, restaurants and pubs, corporate offices, retail spaces, convention centers, recreation facilities, churches, airports, etc. Featuring an unusually wide frequency range and the ability to deliver higher SPLs, the AcousticDesign Series loudspeakers provide natural sounding lows and transparent highs for a truly musical sound with very low distortion. Coupled with wide and even dispersion, the AD-CI52T and AD-CI52ST deliver outstanding coverage. The AcousticDesign C Series ceiling speakers employ a 5.25" weather-resistant LF transducer incorporating a low-distortion fiberglass cone, a 25 mm voice coil, and a rubber surround. The HF driver is a 1" pure titanium dome tweeter utilizing a neodymium magnet structure. With its larger, ported enclosure, the AD-CI52ST provides greater low-frequency extension and makes an excellent choice for installations requiring shallow install depth such as cruise ships. By contrast, the AD-CI52T has a smaller footprint enabling this speaker to be less visually intrusive. While both models are weather resistant, the AD-CI52T, by not being a ported enclosure, carries the added benefit of being a fully sealed speaker system. The AcousticDesign ceiling speakers are packaged with the backcan, support bracket, tile rails, and a grille. For integration with any décor, the trim and grille can be painted. Additionally, these speakers are well suited for use in air handling spaces per UL2043 and UL1480. There is also a seismic tab provided for secondary support. Specifications AD-CI52ST AD-CI52T Configuration Transducers Shallow can, 2-way, ported enclosure Compact 2-way, sealed enclosure Low-frequency Transducers 5.25" (13 cm) weather resistant, 5.25" (13 cm) weather resistant, low distortion fiberglass cone woofer, low distortion fiberglass cone woofer, 25 mm voice coil, rubber surround 25 mm voice coil, rubber surround High-frequency Transducer 1" titanium dome tweeter, 1" titanium dome tweeter, neodymium magnet neodymium magnet Frequency Range 1 Frequency Response (-6 db) 63 Hz 20 khz 85 Hz 20 khz Useable Frequency Range (-10 db) 53 Hz 20 khz Maximum Output 2 65 Hz 20 khz Calculated Peak Output 109 db SPL 108 db SPL Calculated Continuous Output 103 db SPL 102 db SPL Nominal Impedance 8Ω 8Ω Power Rating RMS Power Handling 3 40 W (100 hours IEC) 40 W (100 hours IEC) Recommended Max Amp Power 80 W RMS 80 W RMS Sensitivity 87.5 db, 2.83V, 1 m, 86 db, 2.83V, 1 m, flush mounted (2π) flush mounted (2π) Nominal Coverage 100 conical pattern 90 conical pattern Bass Loading Ported, tuned to 70 Hz Sealed Transformers Type Taps Insertion Loss Distortion Bandwidth Enclosure Material Finish Grille Connectors Mounting Hardware Custom low distortion laminated core, wide bandwidth design 70/100 V: 30, 15, 7.5, 3.8 W and 8Ω selected by switch 0.8 db, averaged over 50 Hz 20 khz bandwidth (30 W tap) <.01% THD above 100 Hz, 0.2% at 50 Hz (30 W tap) 40 Hz 20 khz (-1 db, all taps) Injection molded, high impact polystyrene baffle on a steel enclosure White (paintable) Heavy duty powder coated steel 4-pin Euro terminals in fire protective sub-chamber Rails and brackets for ceiling tile installation Weight - Net / Shipping (pair) 8 lb (3.6 kg) / 27 lb (12.2 kg) 7.5 lb. (3.4 kg) / 24 lb (10.9 kg) Available Accessories ADC-MRS Mud ring bracket ADC-MR Mud ring bracket ADC-NCS New construction bracket ADC-NC New construction bracket 1) All frequency ranges specified refer to measured free field response (half space, 2π). 2) Calculated SPL at 1m, (half space, 2π), speaker operating at rated RMS power with pink noise within specified frequency range 3) Maximum input power tested in accordance with IEC recommendations, 50 Hz 20 khz band limiting, 6 db signal crest factor.

179 AD-CI52ST/CI52T Dimensions Frequency Response AD-CI52ST AD-CI52T Top 11.45" mm.18" with ring mm.24" without ring mm Top.18" with ring mm.24" without ring mm Side 9.28" mm 7.35" mm.28" 7.11 mm.28" 7.11 mm Side 12.63" mm 3.75" mm 8.5" mm Front Front AD-CI52ST Frequency Response (2π, 8Ω) AD-CI52T Frequency Response (2π, 8Ω) dbspl dbspl Hz K 2K 5K 10k 20K Frequency (Hz) Hz K 2K 5K 10k 20K Frequency (Hz) 0 degrees 45 degrees 0 degrees 45 degrees Specifications subject to change without notice. QSC and the QSC logo are registered trademarks of QSC Audio Products, LLC in the U.S. Patent and Trademark office and other countries. AcousticDesign is a trademark of QSC Audio Products, LLC. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Patents may apply or be pending MacArthur Boulevard Costa Mesa, CA Ph: 800/ or 714/ Fax: 714/ AD-CI52ST/CI52ST Spec Sheet - 06/18/08 qscaudio.com

180 Core 250i Core 500i Integrated System Platform Core 250i Core 500i Features Centralized processing architecture using Intel processing Eight on board slots accommodate all Q-Sys I/O cards Abundant DSP capacity Uses standard Gigabit Ethernet hardware and protocols for audio transport and control Control and interface to external devices using TCP/IP, GPIO and RS-232 Powerful and intuitive design GUI System seamlessly integrates with QSC amplifiers and loudspeakers Supports multiple levels of system redundancy Q-Sys technical support is available 24/7 worldwide The Integrated Core 250i and 500i bring the power and elegance of the larger Q-Sys Integrated Cores to applications requiring fewer channels. Integrated Cores have the capability of directly accommodating eight Q-Sys input and/or output cards for a total onboard channel capacity of 32 channels (more if AES or CobraNet cards are used). Channel count may be further expanded by the addition of Q-Sys I/O Frames and other peripheral devices. Applications The Integrated Q-Sys Cores are an ideal choice for boardrooms, conferencing, convention centers, entertainment venues, hospitality, houses of worship, legislative installations, performing arts, sports bars, stadiums and arenas, theme parks and transportation facilities. Platform Using a customized Linux OS and running on Intel microprocessors, the Core 250i and 500i are amazingly powerful. Because Q-Sys doesn t depend on proprietary DSP hardware, it directly benefits from advancements driven by the entire global Computing / IT industry, and software improvements don t require new hardware. New capabilities are added on a regular basis. Visit or contact your QSC representative for the latest updates. Network Q-Sys utilizes our IT-friendly Layer-3 Gigabit Ethernet implementation. The audio transport is low-latency (fixed at 2.5 ms from any input to any output) and based on accepted IP standards. Q-Sys will operate using a variety of available, off-theshelf Gigabit switches (see the QSC website for a list of qualified switches). Because it is standards based it can easily run on a shared network without segregating audio traffic via tedious VLAN configuration. Design GUI Q-Sys cores are configured using an intuitive object-based drag and drop user interface that provides for the creation of nearly any imaginable signal flow. Control logic objects are provided and custom scripting may also be used to accomplish a wide range of interface or control tasks. The design GUI is capable of quickly and easily generating graphical control screens that may be run on network-connected computers, tablet devices or QSC touch-screen controllers. Scalable Redundancy While QSC is known for and dedicated to building the most reliable products, some applications call for additional assurance. Any element of a Q-Sys system Cores, networks, I/O Frames and even amplifiers may be deployed in a redundant configuration. The system designer has the choice of making one or all system elements redundant. Peripherals Q-Sys capabilities are further enhanced by a growing suite of peripheral devices including page stations, touch screen controllers and specialized I/O cards. Q-Sys is a suite of powerful tools that make any project s requirements simple to achieve. It provides rock-solid performance backed by the unrivaled service and support QSC has built its reputation on. For more information please visit: network/qsys. PRELIMINARY

181 Core 250i Core 500i Specifications System Hardware Core 250i Core 500i Description Front Panel Controls Front Panel Indicators Rear Panel Controls Rear Panel Connectors Available peripherals System processor and control engine LCD page forward momentary switch Unit ID button momentary switch Clear settings momentary switch Power On: Blue LED; Device Status: Tri-color LED Audio Signal: 32 Tri-color LEDs Card Status: 8 tri-color LEDs 240 x 64 monochrome LCD graphics display Power Switch RS-232: DE-9 (male 9-pin D shell connector) Video Out: HD-15 (female 15-pin D shell connector); DVI-D, HDMI (500i only) Aux USB ports: USB host (type A) x4 Aux Network Port: RJ45 10/100/1000 Mbps (switchable between Q-Sys LAN B or Aux Network Port on 250i model) GPIO ports: DA-15 (female 15-pin D shell connector) x2 Q-Sys Network LAN A: RJ Mbps only Q-Sys Network LAN B: RJ Mbps only (switchable between Q-Sys LAN B or Aux Network Port 10/100/1000 Mbps on 250i model) IEC inlet: AC mains power connector Page Station (H)&(G), I/O Frame, I/O-22, TSC-8, TSC-3 Network Channel Capacity Audio I/O Capacity Line Voltage Requirements 8 card slots, up to 32 channels; Requires purchase of Q-Sys Type 2 audio I/O cards: CB, CIML4, CIML4-HP, COL4, CODP4, CAES4, CCN VAC VAC, Hz Current Draw 1.5A (120V mains) 1.7A (120V mains) Thermal 500 BTU/h (typical) 650 BTU/h (typical) Dimensions (HWD) Included Accessories 3.5 x 19 x 15 (89 mm x mm x 381 mm) 6 ft UL/CSA/IEC line cord, User Manual, Software CD PRELIMINARY 1675 MacArthur Boulevard Costa Mesa, CA Ph: 800/ or 714/ Fax: 714/ please recycle 2012 QSC Audio Products, LLC. All rights reserved. QSC and the QSC logo are registered trademarks of QSC Audio Products, LLC in the U.S. Patent and Trademark office and other countries. Q-Sys is a trademark of QSC. Intel and the Intel logo are registered trademarks of the Intel corporation. Core 250i/500i Spec Sheet 01/16/12

182 CX 2-channel Professional Power Amplifiers CX302 CX502 CX702 CX902 CX1102 CX302V CX602V CX1202V All models include an integrated security cover for tamper-proof installations The CX Series is designed to meet the specialized needs of sound contractors. Eight 2-channel models have been designed from the ground up, combining the exclusive QSC PowerLight technology with specific features to meet the requirements of fixed installations. With high-output power, versatile loading options, high thermal capacity and unmatched reliability, the CX Series is the perfect solution to any permanently installed sound system. CX 2-channel Amplifiers Watts per channel Model 70 V* 8Ω** 4Ω** 2Ω CX CX CX CX CX CX302V 250 CX602V CX1202V *1 khz, 0.05% THD **20 Hz 20 khz, 0.05% THD 1 khz, 1% THD Features 8 models to meet your exact power requirements Exclusive PowerLight switch-mode power supply technology for high performance and compact size Custom integrated security cover for tamper proof installations Variable speed fan for low noise 1 db detented gain controls for fast and accurate gain settings Active inrush limiting eliminates AC inrush current, removing the need for expensive power sequencers XLR and detachable Euro-style input connectors HD15 DataPort connector for QSControl computer control or signal processing accessories Dip switch control for clip limiters, high-pass filters, bridge-mono and parallel operation Selectable high-pass filters protect speakers and prevent speaker transformer saturation with minimal effect on program material (33 Hz or 75 Hz on non-v models, 50 Hz or 75 Hz on V models) Comprehensive front panel indicators including signal, clip, protect and QSC s exclusive bridge-mono and parallel input LEDs Barrier strip output connector Comprehensive protection circuitry including DC, infrasonic, thermal overload and short circuit protection Class H complementary bipolar output circuitry for high efficiency (CX702, CX902, CX1102 & CX1202V) Optional external transformer accessory pack for isolated 70 and 100 volt outputs (converts CX302 to 400 watts per channel isolated output) Compact size all models only 2 RU and 14" deep for reduced rack cost and floor space Lightweight all models only 21 pounds (9.5 kg) for easier racking and shipping 3-year warranty plus optional 3-year extended service contract

183 CX 2-Channel Specifications Stereo Mode (both channels driven) CX302 CX502 CX702 CX902 CX1102 CX302V CX602V CX1202V Continuous average output power per channel 8Ω / 20 Hz 20 khz / 0.05% THD 200 W 300 W 425 W 550 W 700 W 550 W 700 W 4Ω / 20 Hz 20 khz / 0.05% THD 325 W 500 W 700 W 900 W 1100 W 1100 W 2Ω / 1 khz / 1% THD 600 W 800 W 1200 W 1500 W 1700 W - 70V / 20 Hz 20 khz / 0.05% THD 400 W 800 W 200 W 400 W 800 W 70V / 1 khz / 0.05% THD 440 W 1000 W 250 W 440 W 1000 W 70V / 1 khz / 1% THD 600 W 1200 W 300 W 600 W 1200 W Bridge-Mono Mode Bridge-mono mode operation 16Ω / 20 Hz 20 khz / 0.1% THD 400 W 600 W 850 W 1100 W 1400 W 1100 W 1400 W 8Ω / 20 Hz 20 khz / 0.1% THD 700 W 1100 W 1500 W 2000 W 2200 W 2200 W 4Ω / 1 khz / 1% THD 1200 W 1600 W 2400 W 3000 W 3400 W 140V / 20 Hz 20 khz / 0.1% THD 800 W 1600 W 400 W 800 W 1600 W 140V / 1 khz / 0.05% THD 880 W 2000 W 500 W 880 W 2000 W 140V / 1 khz / 1% THD 1200 W 2400 W 600 W 1200 W 2400 W Signal to Noise (20 Hz 20 khz) > -107 db > -107 db > -106 db > -106 db > -106 db > -106 db > -106 db > -106 db Input Sensitivity at 8Ω 1.26 Vrms 1.23 Vrms 1.16 Vrms 1.17 Vrms 1.35 Vrms 1.26 Vrms 1.26 Vrms 1.26 Vrms Gain at 8Ω 30 db 32 db 34 db 35 db 35 db 35 db 35 db 35 db Output Circuitry Class AB+B Class AB+B 2-tier Class H 2-tier Class H 2-tier Class H Class AB+B Class AB+B 2-tier Class H Distortion (SMPTE-IM) < 0.02% Distortion (typical) 20 Hz 20 khz: 10 db below rated power < 0.01% THD 1.0 khz and below: full rated power < 0.01% THD Frequency Response Damping Factor > 500 Input Impedance Input Clipping Cooling Connectors Amplifier Protection Load Protection Dimensions (HWD) Weight - Net / Shipping 20 Hz - 20 khz, ± 0.2 db 6k ohms unbalanced, 12k ohms balanced 10 Vrms (+22 dbu) Variable-speed fan, rear-to-front air flow Input: 3-pin XLR & 3-pin detachable terminal blocks (1 each per channel) Output: Safety shrouded barrier strip Full short circuit, open circuit, thermal, ultrasonic, RF protection. Stable into reactive or mismatched loads On/off muting, DC-fault power supply shutdown 3.5" (8.9 cm) 2 RU x 19" (48.3 cm) rack mounting x 14" (35.6 cm) from front mounting rails 21 lb (9.5 kg) / 27 lb (12.3 kg) 120V Current Consumption Idle 0.8 A 0.9 A 0.9 A 0.9 A 0.9 A 0.8 A 0.9 A 0.9 A 1/8 power pink noise 8Ω 3.8 A 5.6 A 5.0 A 6.0 A 7.6 A (typical of program material at maximum unclipped power) 4Ω 6.0 A 9.0 A 7.9 A 9.5 A 11.6 A 2Ω 9.6 A 14.0 A 11.8 A 14.0 A 16.6 A 70V 5.7 A 8.7 A 12.0 A 1/3 power pink noise 8Ω 5.4 A 8.0 A 8.4 A 11.0 A 13.1 A (typical of program material with severe clipping) 4Ω 8.9 A 13.3 A 13.5 A 17.0 A 20.0 A 2Ω 14.3 A 21.0 A 22.0 A 27.0 A 70V 8.0 A 13.0 A 19.0 A Specifications subject to change without notice. please recycle QSC, the QSC logo and PowerLight are registered trademarks of QSC Audio Products, LLC in the U.S. Patent and Trademark office and other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Patents may apply or be pending MacArthur Boulevard Costa Mesa, CA Ph: 800/ or 714/ Fax: 714/ CX 2-channel Spec Sheet - 05/15/09 qscaudio.com

184 Integrated System Platform I/O Frame I/O Cards Features I/O Frames may be equipped with a variety of audio input and output cards Premium 24-bit AD and DA conversion used throughout I/O Frames may be located with the Core or remotely whichever best suits the needs of the installation Intuitive and easy to use design GUI Uses standard Gigabit Ethernet hardware for audio transport and control System seamlessly integrates with QSC amplifiers and loudspeakers Q-Sys technical support is available 24/7 - worldwide Q-Sys is a complete integrated system that encompasses everything from the audio input to the output of the loudspeakers; it provides all the routing, processing, control and monitoring, while maintaining the audio quality and reliability QSC has come to be known for. Physically located near audio sources and destinations, I/O Frames provide the points of connection used to interface Q-Sys with other components of the audio system, such as mixers and power amplifiers. Each I/O Frame enables up to 16 channels of input and/or output by housing up to four of the following I/O cards, which may be mixed and matched in a single unit: Mic/ Line Input card Four channels of switchable mic/line-level analog audio input with 48V phantom power (available with standard or premium pre-amps and A/D converters). Line Output card Four channels of balanced, line-level analog output. DataPort Output card Four audio output channels (2 DataPorts) for connection to DataPort equipped QSC amplifiers. AES Input/Output card Four input and four output channels of AES-3 digital audio. CobraNet Input/Output card Up to 32 input and 32 output channels available when used in a core, up to 16 x 16 in an I/O Frame. One of the primary development goals was to create a platform that had nearly unlimited resources; Q-Sys truly lives up to that goal with unrivaled processing breadth and depth. The design interface was created specifically to harness its unmatched power while remaining intuitive and easy to use. The processing tools are extensive and simple to apply. Once the system is designed, you will find that Q-Sys also offers a useful suite of trouble shooting and measurement tools. The strength of the centralized architecture used by Q-Sys is that it facilitates the implementation of total or partial system redundancy. A system can be created with Core, Network, I/O Frame and even amplifier redundancy. In a redundant Q-Sys system, a problem with any of the primary devices will result in the back-up device taking over. If, for example the Core experiences a failure, the backup core automatically takes over ensuring continued flawless operation. Q-Sys is a powerful and reliable unified system that features rock-solid performance backed by the unrivaled service and support QSC has built its reputation on. For more information please visit products/network/q-sys.

185 I/O Card Specifications I/O Cards Mic/Line Input CIML4 High-Performance Mic/ Line Input CIML4-HP Line Output COL4 DataPort Output CODP4 Description Four channels of microphone / linelevel analog audio input with 48V phantom power Four channels of microphone / line-level analog audio input with 48V phantom power and high performance pre-amplifiers and A/D converters Four channels of balanced, linelevel analog output Four audio output channels (2 DataPorts) for connection to DataPort equipped QSC amplifiers Performance Dynamic Range Unweighted Dynamic Range A-weighted > 105 db > 108 db > 112 db > 115 db > 112 db > 115 db > 114 db > 117 db Distortion 20 Hz 20 khz +4 dbu (nominal input) Distortion 20 Hz 20 khz 2 db below clip (max) < 0.009% THD+N < 0.08% THD+N < 0.004% THD+N < 0.06% THD+N < 0.004% THD+N < 0.004% THD+N Crosstalk 20 Hz 20 khz Inter-channel (max) Inter-channel (typ) Intra-channel (max) Intra-channel (typ) > 100 db > 110 db > 100 db > 110 db > 110 db > 110 db > 110 db > 110 db > 100 db > 110 db > 100 db > 110 db > 95 db > 100 db > 100 db > 110 db Frequency Response 20 Hz 20 khz (max) Frequency Response 20 Hz 20 khz (typ) ± 0.5 db ± 0.2 db ± 0.5 db ± 0.2 db ± 0.5 db ± 0.2 db ± 0.5 db ± 0.2 db Input Impedance Balanced (nominal) Unbalanced (nominal) 10 k ohms 10 k ohms 10 k ohms 10 k ohms Common Mode Rejection 20 Hz 20 khz (max) Common Mode Rejection 20 Hz 20 khz (typ) > 45 db > 50 db > 45 db > 50 db Max Input Level 0.123, 2.25, 8.70, Vrms -16, 10, 21, 27 dbu -18.2, 7.04, 18.8, dbv (4 selections) 1.23 to Vrms -56 to 27 dbu to 24.8 dbv (continuously variable) Mute Infinite attenuation (via digital mute) Infinite attenuation (via digital mute) Infinite attenuation (via electromechanical relays) Infinite attenuation (via electromechanical relays) Audio Converters Analog to Digital Conversion (ADCs) Digital to Analog Conversion (DACs) 24-bit delta-sigma at 48 or 96 khz sample rate 24-bit delta-sigma at 48 or 96 khz sample rate 24-bit delta-sigma at 48 or 96 khz sample rate 24-bit delta-sigma at 48 or 96 khz sample rate Group Delay < 13 FS ( 271 µs) at 48 khz < 13 FS ( 271 µs) at 48 khz < 10 FS ( 196 µs) at 48 khz < 13 FS ( 271 µs) at 48 khz Connectors Four 3-terminal Euro- style detachable terminal blocks Four 3-terminal Euro-style detachable terminal blocks Four 3-terminal Euro-style detachable terminal blocks Two 15-pin HD15 connectors User-configurable Options (software enabled) Phantom Power +48 V phantom power (meets IEC 1938 [1996] spec) +48 V phantom power (meets IEC 1938 [1996] spec) Output Trim Vrms (max) dbu (max) dbv (max) 8.7 V 21 dbu 18.8 dbv Amplifier Standby Set or clear amplifier in standby mode Mute Set or clear individual channel mutes Enable Meters Enable data collection of meters for each channel Audio Output Levels Adjust individual audio channel levels Amplifier Model Support CX, PowerLight 3 Series, DCA, and legacy V1 models

186 I/O Card Specifications I/O Cards AES-3 Input/Output CAES4 CobraNet Input/Output CCN32 Description Four input and four output channels of AES-3 digital audio Up to 32 input and 32 output channels of CobraNet digital audio Frequency Response ± 0.2 db ± 0.2 db Mute Infinite attenuation (via digital mute) Infinite attenuation (via digital mute) Group Delay 37 Samples (0.760 ms actual) with Sample Rate Converter enabled Selectable: 64 Samples (2.687 ms actual) 128 Samples (4.020 ms actual) 256 Samples (6.686 ms actual) I/O Capacity 4x4 Selectable: 4x4 8x8 16x16 32x32 (in Core only) Bundle Packing 0 to 8 channels Network Transmitters 4 Network Recievers 4 Management CobraNet management via SNMP Connectors Four 3-terminal Euro-style detachable terminal blocks Dual RJ-45

187 I/O Frame Specifications Q-Sys Core Gigabit Switch AES Digital Audio I/O Frame I/O Frame I/O Frame Up to 16 Audio Channels QSC DataPort Amplifiers QSC Loudspeakers QSC DataPort Amplifiers QSC Loudspeakers System Hardware Description Front Panel Controls I/O Frame System audio input and output device LCD page forward momentary switch Unit ID button momentary switch Clear settings momentary switch Front Panel Card Receptacle Front Panel Indicators Rear Panel Connectors I/O Capacity Line Voltage Requirements Current Draw Thermal Dimensions (HWD) Accessories Included Power On: Blue LED Device Status: Tri-color LED Audio Signal: Five tri-color LEDs /per I/O card slot 240 x 64 monochrome LCD graphics display RS-232: DE-9 (male 9-pin D shell connector) GPIO A: DA-15 (female 15-pin D shell connector) Q-Sys Network LAN A: RJ MBps only Q-Sys Network LAN B: RJ MBps only Up to 16 x 16. Requires purchase of I/O cards. 100 VAC 240 VAC, Hz 625mA (120V mains) 205 BTU/h (typical) 1.75" x 19" x 15" (44.45 mm x mm x 381 mm) 6 ft UL/CSA/IEC line cord User manual Optional audio I/O ship kit please recycle 2011 QSC Audio Products, LLC. All rights reserved. QSC and the QSC logo are registered trademarks of QSC Audio Products, LLC in the U.S. Patent and Trademark office and other countries. Q-Sys is a trademark of QSC Audio Products, LLC MacArthur Boulevard Costa Mesa, CA Ph: 800/ or 714/ Fax: 714/ Q-Sys I/O Frame Spec Sheet - 05/12/11 qscaudio.com

188 O U T P U T I S O L A T I O N T R A N S F O R M E R IT-42 COM CH 1 70V 100V 100V CH 2 70V COM The IT-42 is an output isolation transformer accessory for the QSC CX302 amplifier, allowing it to drive two 25-, 70- and 100-volt distributed lines in stereo or parallel or a single 140- or 200-volt line in bridged mono. The IT-42 is pre wired for quick and convenient mounting to the back of the CX302 amplifier and requires no additional rack space. Output Voltage 25V 70V 100V 140V 200V Maximum Distributed Line Power, Midband 300W x2 400W x2 400W x2 800W (Bridged Mono) 800W (Bridged Mono) Specifications Fully isolated secondary Dual channel: 25V, 70V, or 100V lines Bridged mono: 140V or 200V line Up to 400 watts per channel or 800 watts in bridged mono Frequency response: 75 Hz 12 khz +0, -3 db, loaded with 12.2 ohms (70V) or 25 ohms (100V) non-inductive load. (using 75 Hz filter on amplifier) Output regulation: < 1 db at midband frequencies, no-load to full-load (3 db for 25V loads) Weight 3.6 pounds (1.6 kg) Overall depth (amplifier + IT-42) 17.3 inches (440 mm) Harmonic distortion: less than 0.05%, 75 Hz, -3 db less than 0.5%, 150 Hz 12 khz at 0 db 1675 MacArthur Boulevard Costa Mesa, CA Ph: 800/ or 714/ Fax: 714/

189 10/9/12 Home > PC / Peripherals / Printer > Monitor > Large Format Display > ME55B ME55B 0 review s WHERE TO BUY Print-friendly OVERVIEW FEATURES TECH SPECS GALLERY REVIEWS SUPPORT Table view Display H-Scanning Frequency 30 ~ 81kHZ Maximum Pixel Frequency 148.5MHz V-Scanning Frequency 48 ~ 75HZ Panel Diagonal Size 139.7cm (55) Type 120Hz LED BLU Resolution 1920 x 1080 (16 : 9) Pixel Pitch(mm) 0.21 (H) x 0.63 (V) Active Display Area (H) x (V) Brightness 380nit Contrast Ratio (Dynamic) 100,000 : 1 (AV Mode) Viewing Angle(Horizontal/Vertical) 178 : 178 Response Time (G-to-G) 8ms Display Color 10bit Dithering Billion Color Gamut 72% Contrast Ratio 5,000 : 1 Connectivity Input RGB Analog D-SUB, DVI-D, Display Port Video Audio Component(CVBS Common), HDMI Stereo mini Jack Output RGB DVI-D Audio Stereo mini Jack External Control RS232C (in/out) thru stereo jack, RJ45 External Sensor IR, Ambient Light 1/3

190 10/9/12 Mechanical Specification Dimension Set Dimension (WxHxD) 1,246.4 x x 29.9mm Package Dimension (WxHxD) 1,364.0 x x 199.0mm Weight Set Weight 17.1Kg Package Weight 22.2Kg VESA Mount 400 x 400mm Protection Glass Optional Stand Type Foot Stand (Optional) Media Player Option Type Embedded Operation Operating Temperature 0 C ~ 40 C Humidity 10 ~ 80% General Feature Key Slim & Light LFD with Built-in MagicInfo Lite Special Built in MagicInfo Lite, Built in Speaker (10 watts + 10 watts), Plug and Play (through USB), Narrow Bezel, Slim Depth (29.9mm), Video Wall (10 x 10) Power Power Supply AC V ~ (+/- 10%), 50/60Hz Power Consumption Off Mode Less than 1 watts On Mode Sleep Mode 143 (Max), 117 (Typical), (BTU) Less than 1 watts Type Internal Accessory Included Quick Setup Guide, Warranty Card,Application CD, D-Sub cable, Power Cord,Remote Controller, Batteries Optional Mount WMN4270SDWMN2000BD Specialty Stand CML450D (Ceiling Mount) STN-L4055AD Certification EMC FCC (USA) FCC Part 15, Subpart B class ACE (Europe) EN55022, EN55024VCCI (Japan) V-3 (CISPR22) KCC (Korea): KN22, KN24BSMI (Taiwan): CNS13438 (CISPR22) C-Tick (Australia): AS/NZS3548 (CISPR22) CCC (China): GB , GB Environment ENERGY STAR 5.0 (USA) Safety CUL (USA+Canada): UL60065 TUV (Germany): EN60065CB (Europe): IEC60065/EN60065EK (Korea): K60065 CCC (China): GB8898PSB (Singapore ): IEC60065 GOST (Russia ): IEC60065, EN55022 SIQ (Slovenia ): IEC60065, EN55022 PCBC (Poland ): IEC60065, EN55022 NOM (Mexico ): NOM-001-SCFI-1993IRAM (Argentina ): IRAMSASO (Saudi Arabia ): IEC60065 Features and specifications are subject to change without prior notification. print this page 2/3

191 10/9/12 Copyright SAMSUNG All rights reserved 3/3

192 10/9/12 Home > PC / Peripherals / Printer > Monitor > Large Format Display > ME65B ME65B 0 review s WHERE TO BUY Print-friendly OVERVIEW FEATURES TECH SPECS GALLERY REVIEWS SUPPORT Table view Display H-Scanning Frequency 30 ~ 81KHz Maximum Pixel Frequency 148.5MHz V-Scanning Frequency 56 ~ 75Hz Panel Diagonal Size 165.1cm (65) Type Edge LED BLU Resolution 1920 x 1080 Pixel Pitch(mm) (H) x (V)mm Active Display Area (H) x (V)mm Brightness 450cd/ m2 Contrast Ratio (Dynamic) 100,000:1 (AV Mode) Viewing Angle(Horizontal/Vertical) 89/89 Response Time (G-to-G) 5.5ms Display Color 1.07Billion Color Gamut 72% Contrast Ratio 5,000:1 Light Source Type LED Connectivity Input RGB Analog D-SUB, DVI-D, Display Port Video Audio Component (CVBS Common), HDMI Stereo Mini Jack Output RGB DVI-D Audio Stereo Mini Jack External Control RS232C(in/out) thru Stereo Jack, RJ45 1/3

193 10/9/12 External Sensor IR, Ambient Light Network PIM Mechanical Specification Dimension Set Dimension (WxHxD) 1,480.5 x x 32.2mm Package Dimension (WxHxD) 1,641 x 220 x 988mm Weight Set Weight 25.1Kg Package Weight 32.2Kg VESA Mount 400 x 400mm Protection Glass Optional Stand Type Foot Stand (Optional) Media Player Option Type PIM Operation Operating Temperature 0 ~ 40 C Humidity 10 ~ 80% General Feature Touch Screen Module Overlay Touch (Optional) Key Special Slim & Light LFD with Built-in MagicInfo Lite Built in MagicInfo Lite, Built in Speaker (10W + 10W), Plug and Play (through USB), Narrow Bezel, Slim Depth (29.9,mm), Video Wall (10 x 10) Internal Player Processor Cortex-A8 Single Core CPU with NEON DSP On-Chip Cache Memory Clock Speed Main Memory Interface Graphics Storage (FDM) Multimedia L1 (I/D) : 32KB/32KBL2 (Unified) : 512KB Up to 800MHz Dual 32bit DDR3-667 (1,333MHz) 2D & 3D Graphics Engine - Up to 1920 x bpp - Supports OpenGL ES 4GB (1.2GB Occupied by O/S, 2.8GB Available) Video Decoder - MPEG-1/2, H.264/AVC (Dual) - VC-1, JPEG, PNG Audio DSP (Decoder) - AC3 (DD), MPEG, DTS and etc. Host Bus PCIEx 2.0 IO Ports USB 2.0 Operating System Linux Power Power Supply AC V ~ (+/- 10%), 50/60 Hz Power Consumption Off Mode less than 1 watts On Mode Sleep Mode 290 watts (Max)/128 watts (Typ) less than 1 watts Type Internal Accessory Included Quick Setup Guide, Warranty Card, Application CD, Power Cord, Remote 2/3

194 10/9/12 Included Controller, Batteries, D-Sub cable RS232C to Stereo Gender in/out Cable, External IR Sensor Optional Mount WMN250MD Certification EMC FCC (USA) FCC Part 15, Subpart B class ACE (Europe) EN55022, EN55024VCCI (Japan) V-3 (CISPR22) KCC (Korea): KN22, KN24BSMI (Taiwan): CNS13438 (CISPR22) C-Tick (Australia): AS/NZS3548 (CISPR22) CCC (China): GB , GB Environment ENERGY STAR 5.0 (USA) Safety CUL (USA + Canada): UL60950 TUV (Germany): EN60950CB (Europe): IEC60950/EN60950EK (Korea): K60950 CCC (China): GB8898PSB (Singapore ): IEC60950 GOST (Russia ): IEC60950, EN55022 SIQ (Slovenia ): IEC60950, EN55022 PCBC (Poland ): IEC60950, EN55022 NOM (Mexico ): NOM-001-SCFI-1993IRAM (Argentina ): IRAMSASO (Saudi Arabia ): IEC60950 Features and specifications are subject to change without prior notification. print this page Copyright SAMSUNG All rights reserved 3/3

195 420 Series Desktop Monitor It can double as office artwork. 18.5", 19" or 22" LED Screens The 18.5" 420 Series gives you brilliant color and sharp text on a 1366 x 768 LED screen; the 19" LED screen gives you 1440 x 900 resolution; and the 22 LED screen offers a resolution of 1680 x And a fast response time of 5ms (GTG) ensures motion graphics are clear and crisp. Adjustable and Affordable 18.5", 19" and 22" LED Desktop Monitors The Samsung 420 Series monitors are ideal for general business. But that in no way means they re one size fits all. In addition to remarkable LED image quality and eco-conscious features that enable users to lower power consumption and save money, the 420 Series 4-way stand lets users customize the monitors to their personal preferences. The monitors swivel, tilt, pivot and are heightadjustable, allowing for greater ergonomics. And greater productivity. Of course, that s not the only thing keeping users satisfied. There s also a zerowatt off mode for even more energy savings, and a slim, stylish design that adds to a clean, clutter-free work environment. The Samsung 420 Series. Very accommodating. Business. Innovated. Ergonomic, Adjustable Stand Adjust the monitor to you, not the other way around. The Samsung 420 Series monitors swivel, tilt, pivot and are height-adjustable. Mega Infinity Dynamic Contrast Ratio Details in the blacks. Details in the whites. The Samsung 420 Series monitors deliver both through Mega Infinity dynamic contrast ratio. Power-Efficient Samsung LED panels use up to 36% less energy than traditional CCFL displays. And with the Eco Saving feature, enterprise customers can better manage power usage and reduce energy consumption by as much as 50%. Clean, Simple, Stylish Design The 420 Series monitors feature a slim, stylish design that makes any desktop look better. Wall-Mountable Vesa wall-mount compatibility gives users the option of eliminating the stand altogether and mounting the monitors on the wall. Learn more } SAMSUNG SAM4BIZ samsung.com/monitor or samsung.com/business Follow us on Twitter@SamsungBizUSA

196 B420 Series Desktop Monitor KEY SPECIFICATIONS For complete product specifications, visit samsung.com/monitor Display Model Number S19B420B S19B420M S19B420BW S22B420BW Video Input Signal Screen Size 18.5" Wide 18.5" Wide 19" Wide 22" Wide Display Type LED TN LED TN LED TN LED TN Resolution 1366 x x x x 1050 Aspect Ratio 16:9 16:9 16:10 16:10 Brightness 250 cd/m cd/m cd/m cd/m 2 Contrast Ratio (Typical/Dynamic) 1000:1/Mega Infinity 1000:1/Mega Infinity 1000:1/Mega Infinity 1000:1/Mega Infinity Viewing Angle (Horizontal/Vertical) 170 /160 (CR>10) 170 /160 (CR>10) 170 /160 (CR>10) 170 /160 (CR>10) Speakers 1W x 2 Embedded Speaker, Audio In/Out Response Time 5ms (GTG) 5ms (GTG) 5ms (GTG) 5ms (GTG) Analog VGA, DVI VGA, DVI VGA, DVI VGA, DVI Digital DVI DVI DVI DVI Power Voltage AC VAC (+/- 10 %), 60/50 Hz +-3Hz AC VAC (+/- 10 %), 60/50 Hz +-3Hz AC VAC (+/- 10 %), 60/50 Hz +-3Hz AC VAC (+/- 10 %), 60/50 Hz +-3Hz Power Supply Type Built-In Built-In Built-In Built-In Power Consumption (Max) 20W 20W 20W 25W Power Consumption (Standby) 0.3W 0.3W 0.3W 0.3W Features Special Eco Saving, Samsung MagicAngle, Samsung MagicBright, Samsung MagicColor, Off Timer, Image Size, Key Repeat Time Supported, MagicTune, Multi-Screen Eco Saving, Samsung MagicAngle, Samsung MagicBright, Samsung MagicColor, Off Timer, Image Size, Key Repeat Time Supported, MagicTune, Multi-Screen Eco Saving, Samsung MagicAngle, Samsung MagicBright, Samsung MagicColor, Off Timer, Image Size, Key Repeat Time Supported, MagicTune, Multi-Screen Stand HAS (100mm) HAS (100mm) HAS (100mm) HAS (100mm) Wall Mount (Size mm) 100 x x x x 100 Cabinet Design Matte Black Matte Black Matte Black Matte Black Dimensions Product Dimensions (W x H x D) 17.5" x 16.5" x 7.5" 17.5" x 16.5" x 7.5" 17.5" x 16.5" x 7.5" 19.9" x 18.1" x 8.7" Packaging Dimensions (without stand) 17.5" x 10.5" x 2.4" 17.5" x 10.5" x 2.4" 17.5" x 11.4" x 2.4" 19.9" x 13.1" x 2.4" Shipping Carton 20.5" x 13.5" x 7.6" 20.5" x 13.5" x 7.6" 20.3" x 14.4" x 7.6" 22.9" x 16" x 7.6" Weight With Stand 8.36 lbs lbs lbs lbs. Without Stand 5.83 lbs lbs lbs lbs. Shipping Weight lbs lbs lbs lbs. Eco Saving, Samsung MagicAngle, Samsung MagicBright, Samsung MagicColor, Off Timer, Image Size, Key Repeat Time Supported, MagicTune, Multi-Screen Service Standard Warranty 3 Years Parts, Labor and Backlight 3 Years Parts, Labor and Backlight 3 Years Parts, Labor and Backlight 3 Years Parts, Labor and Backlight Accessories Included VGA Cable, DVI Cable VGA Cable, DVI Cable VGA Cable, DVI Cable VGA Cable, DVI Cable Green Management Energy Star Compliant 5.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes TCO Packaging Recyclability Packing Materials Recyclable Packing Materials Recyclable Packing Materials Recyclable Packing Materials Recyclable EPEAT Rating Gold Gold Gold Gold CONNECTIVITY 1. DVI 2. VGA 1 2 For complete product information and accessories, visit samsung.com/monitor or samsung.com/business Follow us on Twitter@SamsungBizUSA Product Support: SAMSUNG SAM-4BIZ 2012 Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Samsung is a registered mark of Samsung Electronics Corp., Ltd. Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Non-metric weights and measurements are approximate. All brand, product, service names and logos are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers and companies. Simulated screen images. See samsung.com for detailed information. Printed in USA. MON-420SERIESB2BDSHT-JUL12T ENERGY STAR

197 SPECIFICATIONS Band Range Transmitter power (Nominal mw) Handheld UR2 BodyPack UR1 G MHz 10 / / 100 G1E MHz 10 / / 50 G7C MHz 10 / / 50 H MHz 10 / / 100 H4E MHz 10 / / 50 J , MHz 10 / / 100 J5E MHz 10 / / 50 K4E MHz 10 / / 50 L MHz 10 / / 100 L3E MHz 10 / / 50 M5E MHz 10 / / 50 P MHz 10 / / 50 P MHz 10 / / 50 Q MHz 10 / / 50 R MHz 10 / / 50 Q MHz A / MHz JBX MHz Q10A MHz 10 / / 50 R MHz 10 / / 50 R MHz 10 only 10 only X MHz 10 / / 100 NOTE This Radio equipment is intended for use in musical professional entertainment and similar applications. This Radio apparatus may be capable of operating on some frequencies not authorized in your region. Please contact your national authority to obtain information on authorized frequencies and RF power levels for wireless microphone products. RF Carrier Frequency Range , MHz depending on region Working Range UR1, UR2 150 m (500 ft.), under typical conditions 500 m (1600 ft) line-of-sight, outdoors for a single system. NOTE: Actual working range depends on RF signal absorption, reflection and interference. Audio Frequency Response 40 18,000 Hz, (+1 db, 3 db). NOTE: Overall system frequency response depends on the microphone element Gain Adjustment Range UR1: 20 to +35 db 10 db recommended for guitar UR2: 10 to +20 db Modulation FM (45 khz max. deviation), compander system with pre- and de-emphasis RF Power Output See table above. Dynamic Range >105 db, A-weighted Image Rejection >110 db typical RF Sensitivity English Spurious Rejection >90 db typical Ultimate Quieting (ref. 45 khz deviation) >100 db, A-weighted Signal Polarity Positive pressure on microphone diaphragm (or positive voltage applied to tip of WA302 phone plug) produces positive voltage on XLR output pin 2 with respect to XLR pin 3 and on the tip of the 1/4-inch output jack. System Distortion (ref. ± 45 khz deviation, 1 khz modulation) <0.3% Total Harmonic Distortion typical Power Requirements UR1, UR2: Two 1.5V AA batteries UR4+:100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Current Drain UR1, UR2: 180 ma max. (normal RF power setting) 240 ma max. (high RF power setting) UR4D+, UR4S+: 0.8 Amps max. Battery Life (Typical) UR1, UR2: 9.5 hours (normal RF power), 6 hours (high RF power) Operating Temperature Range 18 to +57 C (0 to +135 F) NOTE: Battery characteristics may limit this range NOTE: Electrical safety approval is based on a maximum ambient temperature of 35 C (95 F). Overall Dimensions UR1: 98 mm L x 60 mm W x 17 mm D (3.84 x 2.38 x 0.66 in.) UR2/SM58: 261 mm L x 51 mm Dia. (10.27 x 2 in.) UR2/SM86: 261 mm L x 51 mm Dia. (10.27 x 2 in.) UR2/SM87A: 254 mm x 51 mm Dia. (10 x 2 in.) UR2/KSM9/BK, UR2/KSM9/SL: 250 mm x 49 mm Dia. (9 7/8 x 1 15/16 in.) UR2/BETA 58: 258 mm L x 51 mm Dia. (10.15 x 2 in.) UR2/BETA 87A, UR2/BETA 87C: 254 mm x 51 mm Dia. (10 x 2 in.) UR4S+/UR4D+: 44 mm H x 483 mm W x 366 mm D (1.72 x x in.) Net Weight UR1: 97 g (3.4 oz.) without batteries UR2/SM58: 356 g (12.6 oz.) without batteries UR2/BETA 58: 314 g (11.1oz.) without batteries UR2/SM86: 317 g (11.2 oz.) without batteries UR2/SM87A: 298 g (10.5 oz.) without batteries UR2/KSM9/BK, UR2/KSM9/SL: 410 g (14.5 oz.) without batteries UR2/BETA 87A, U2/BETA 87C: 325 g (11.5 oz) without batteries UR4S+: 5.0 kg (10.9 lbs) UR4D+: 5.1 kg (11.2 lbs) Housing: UR1: Cast magnesium UR2: Aluminum die-cast handle and aluminum machined battery cup UR4S+, UR4D+: Galvanized steel Wiring for TA4F: MICROPHONE ELEMENT TA4F Connector TA4M Connector UR1 MIC JACK BOARD UR4S+ 110 dbm Typical 12 db SINAD 105 dbm Typical 30 db SINAD UR4D+ 107 dbm Typical 12 db SINAD 102 dbm Typical 30 db SINAD Active Load Audio Ground NOTE: LAVALIER MIC TIES PINS 3 AND 4 TOGETHER GUITAR CABLE DOES NOT. 17

198 Shure UHF-R Wireless Inputs and Outputs UR1 Transmitter Audio Input Connector: Input Configuration: Maximum Input Level: (1 khz, 1% THD) TA4M Connector Pin Assignments: UR2 Transmitter Audio Input Input Configuration: Actual Impedance: Maximum Input Level: 1 khz, 1% THD UR1 Transmitter RF Output Connector: Actual Impedance: Pin Assignments: RF Distribution Ports 4-Pin male mini connector (TA4M) Unbalanced, active +10 dbu (sensitivity 0 db) +20 dbu (sensitivity 10 db) Pin 1: Ground Pin 2: +5 Vdc bias Pin 3: Audio, 200 k Pin 4: Tied through active load (on main board) to Ground. (On instrument adapter cable, Pin 4 floats) RF IN Unbalanced, active >1 M +4.8 dbu SMA 50 Shell = Ground Center = Signal RF OUT Connector Type Vdc Bias ma N/A Receiver Input Antenna Power Connector Type: IEC Actual Impedance: 50 - Nominal Input Level: 95 to 30 dbm VAC, 50/60 Hz Maximum Input Level: 20 dbm 240 VAC, + 10%, 50/60 Hz Pin Assignments: Shell = Ground Center = Signal Bias Voltage* ma maximum * For remote antenna amplifiers Receiver Audio Output Output Configuration: Monitor (1/4 Headphone) Unbalanced mono, 1/4 inch IEC Standard N/A 1/4 Phone XLR Impedance Balanced Electrically Balanced Actual Impedance: (active balanced) (150 mic) Maximum Output Level: dbu +24 dbu ( 6 dbu mic) with 100 Hz modulating tone Pin Assignments: Phantom Power Protection: Tip = Hot Ring = Hot Sleeve = Gnd Computer/Network Interface Tip = Hot Ring = no signal Sleeve = Gnd No Yes Yes 1 = Ground 2 = Audio + 3 = Audio Ethernet USB* RJ45 USB Series B Receptacle * USB-IF logo is a trademark of Universal Serial Bus Implementers Forum, Inc. 1/4" Monitor/headphone XLR 1/4" Phone 18

199 Replacement Parts and Accessories Furnished Accessories Microphone Stand Adapter (UR2) Threaded locking Adapter (with TA4F), UR1 Zipper Bag (UR1) Zipper Bag (UR2) Antenna Extension Cables (2) RF Distribution Cables (2) Antenna (UR1) MHz Antenna (UR1) MHz Antenna (UR1) MHz Antenna (UR1) MHz Antenna (UR1) MHz Two Antennas (UR4+), Band Dependent (see table) Transmitter Carrying Case Optional Accessories SM58 Head with Grille SM86 Head with Grille BETA 58 Head with Grille BETA 87A Head with Grille BETA 87C Head with Grille SM87A Head with Grille KSM9/SL Head with Grille KSM9/BK Head with Grille Matte Silver Grille (SM58) Matte Silver Grille (SM86) Matte Silver Grille (BETA 58) Black Grille (SM87) Matte Silver Grille (BETA 87A) Matte Silver Grille (BETA 87C) Black Grille (BETA 58) Black Grille (BETA 87A/BETA 87C) Champagne Grille (KSM9/SL) Black Grille (KSM9/BK) Popper Stopper Windscreen Belt Clip (UR1) Bodypack Pouch (Black), UR1 Bodypack Pouch (White), UR1 WA371 WA340 26A13 26A14 95B N2035 UA700 UA710 UA720 UA730 UA740 UA820 95C9053 RPW112 RPW114 RPW118 RPW120 RPW122 RPW116 RPW180 RPW184 RK143G RPM266 RK265G RK214G RK312 RK312 RK323G RK324G RPM260 RPM264 A85WS 44A8031 WA580B WA580W Architects' and Engineers' Specifications 19 Antenna Combiners and Accessories English Antennas and receivers must be from the same frequency band. The supplied 1/2 wave antennas can be remotely mounted or mounted directly to the UA845. Antennas and cables for use with the UA845 can also be used with stand-alone UHF-R receivers. Passive Antenna/Splitter Combiner Kit UA221 (recommended for 2 receivers) UHF Antenna Power Distribution Amplifier UA845- U.S.A. ( MHz) UA845SWB Europe UA845E UK UA845UK 1/2 Wave, Omnidirectional, UA860SWB Wideband Antenna ( MHz) Active Directional Wideband Antenna UA870USTV ( MHz) Active Directional Narrowband Antenna UA870X ( MHz) Wideband In-Line RF Amplifier ( MHz) UA830USTV Narrowband In-Line RF Amplifier ( MHz) UA830X Passive Unidirectional Wideband Antenna PA805SWB ( MHz) Passive Unidirectional Narrow band Antenna PA805X ( MHz) 1/2 wave antennas (2) G1 Band UA820G H4E, H4 Bands UA820H4 J5E, J5 Bands UA820J L3E, L3 Bands UA820L3 Q5, Q6, Q10A Bands UA820Q R9, ABJ Bands UA820A X1 Band UA820X 10 Antenna Cable PA Antenna Cable (RG-8/X) UA Antenna Cable (RG-8/X) UA Antenna Cable UA8100 The wireless system shall operate in the UHF band between MHz and MHz, with the specific range being dependent on the user's locale. The system shall include the option of changing the operating frequency in order to avoid RF interference, enabling up to 160 systems to operate simultaneously in the same location. Preconfigured group, channel and frequency setups shall be available to ensure that multiple systems in use do not interfere with one another. All transmitters shall be powered by 2 AA batteries and shall have a power on/off switch. The bodypack will have an LED indicating that power is on. Available transmitters shall include: a body pack for use with electric guitars, basses, and other electric instruments, and a handheld microphone for vocals. The transmitters shall have a DC/DC converter to ensure consistent performance, even if battery voltages change. The receiver shall have a user-programmable, menu-driven LCD showing group, channel, frequency, name, squelch level, and locked/unlocked status. The system shall use technology such as MARCAD signal combining circuitry to improve reception, minimize signal dropouts, and achieve the best possible signal-to-noise ratio. An equalizer, tone key squelch, and noise squelch circuitry shall be built into the system to provide optimal sound quality and minimize unwanted noise. The receiver shall include dual RF meters (one for each antenna), an audio level meter, and a Networking Interface connector for computer control and monitoring. The receiver shall have a volume control and an adjustable noise squelch control. The system shall be the Shure UHF-R Wireless.

200 Shure UHF-R Wireless CERTIFICATION UR1, UR2, UR4S+, UR4D+ This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Meets requirements of EMC standards EN Parts 1 and 2 and EN Parts 1 and 9. Meets essential requirements of European R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC, eligible to bear the CE mark. UR1, UR2 Certified under FCC Part 74. (FCC ID: DD4UR1, DD4UR2). Certified by IC in Canada under RSS-123 and RSS-102. (IC: 616A-UR1, 616A-UR2, 616A-UR1G, 616A-UR2G). Emission Designator: 120KF3E UR4S+, UR4D+ Approved under the Declaration of Conformity (DoC) provision of FCC Part 15. Certified in Canada by IC to RSS-123. (IC: 616A-UR4P). Conforms to Australian EMC requirements and is eligible for C-Tick marking. Have been granted the following Country Safety Approvals: culus Mark for US and Canada: Meets UL6500 and CSA/CAN E UL GS-Certified to EN Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. The CE Declaration of Conformity can be obtained from Shure Incorporated or any of its European representatives. For contact information please visit The CE Declaration of Conformity can be obtained from: Authorized European representative: Shure Europe GmbH Headquarters Europe, Middle East & Africa Department: EMEA Approval Wannenacker Str. 28 D Heilbronn, Germany Phone: Fax: EMEAsupport@shure.de LICENSING INFORMATION Licensing: A ministerial license to operate this equipment may be required in certain areas. Consult your national authority for possible requirements. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Shure Incorporated could void your authority to operate the equipment. Licensing of Shure wireless microphone equipment is the user s responsibility, and licensability depends on the user s classification and application, and on the selected frequency. Shure strongly urges the user to contact the appropriate telecommunications authority concerning proper licensing, and before choosing and ordering frequencies. INFORMATION TO USER This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer. Note: EMC conformance testing is based on the use of supplied and recommended cable types. The use of other cable types may degrade EMC performance. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate the equipment. 20

201 H Wireless Receiver With Audio Reference Companding SYNC Wireless Receiver With Audio Reference Companding SYNC RF Audio OL A B RF Audio OL XX YYY-ZZZ MHz Navigate RF Audio XX YYY-ZZZ MHz A OL A B B XX YYY-ZZZ MHz Navigate Navigate ENTER EXIT push ENTER EXIT push Control Control Monitor OFF ON push Monitor Clip Monitor 1 2 push Monitor Clip POWER POWER UHF-R Wireless System Specifications UR1 DESCRIPTION The UHF-R is a professional, wireless technology engineered for the most demanding touring environments and installations. UHF-R wireless systems offer unprecedented flexibility and versatility. Using multiple frequency bands, up to160 compatible systems can be used simultaneously. Individual frequency bands deliver up to 60 compatible systems per band. The UHF-R also includes infrared synchronization that allows you to configure transmitter settings from the receiver. With multiple system operation and interchangeable components, UHF- R systems also offer a choice of Single or Dual Channel Diversity Receivers. SYSTEM FEATURES Shure UHF-R Wireless Systems offer many exceptional features, including: Auto Frequency Selection/Scan Locates a clear channel instantly UR4S+ UR4D+ Auto Transmitter Sync Infrared (IR) sync automatically synchronizes the transmitter and receiver Networking Each receiver has an RJ-45 port on the back that lets you connect to an Ethernet network. Networking receivers provides the following benefits: Makes channel setup faster and easier Allows you to monitor and control multiple receivers using the Shure Wireless Workbench PC Software RF Distribution Ports Use the RF distribution ports to share the signal from a single pair of antennas with up to 10 single or dual receivers within the same frequency band. The RF ports eliminate the need for antenna splitters or distribution amplifiers. Active circuitry minimizes insertion losses, preserving signal quality. Input filtering keeps the signal free from outof-band interference. Distribution circuitry is active only when additional receivers are connected to the RF distribution ports. When not used, the port circuitry is bypassed, allowing the receiver to be used as a stand-alone component. Shure s Wireless Workbench Software Key benefits of current Wireless Workbench software include: Fast network setup of large groups of wireless systems: Scans current RF environment. Plots RF history, using an individual transmitter to identify potential areas of weak signals and dropouts. Remote monitoring and control of multiple wireless systems. Wireless Workbench provides faster setup and more complete control. Automatic Frequency Selection Wizard: Will scan and select open frequencies, applying them to all Shure UHF-R receivers in network (and ultimately to connected networks of current UHF series receivers as well). Comprehensive Infra-Red (IR) Auto Sync/Automatic Transmitter Setup: PC control of transmitter sync with corresponding receiver. Syncs frequency, lockouts, power setting, custom groups. Frequency Compatibility Calculator Wizard: By scanning the RF environment and then considering all networked hardware models, Wireless Workbench recommends frequencies for all specified wireless systems (including PSM systems, and competitive product). While this feature has a proprietary slant, a generic hardware template will be available for those users who insist on networking with non-shure products) The Band Limiting feature allows manufacturer or service center to set Network frequency band parameters, to align with any country/regional RF usage guidelines that might conflict with the available bandwidth. Custom Frequency Group Creation allows customization of frequency groups to be used in specific locations. May require advanced wireless aptitude, or assistance from Shure s Applications departments. Q MHz UR2 UR4S+ UR4D+ Shure s patented Audio Reference Companding Delivers a crystal clear audio transmission, superior to conventional wireless technology UR4S+ & UR4D+ DIVERSITY RECEIVER FEATURES: Up to 2,400 selectable frequencies across up to 60 MHz bandwidth Track Tuning Filtering Technology (on all 60 MHz or greater products). Up to 40 preset compatible systems/band (up to 160 with multiple bands). Network Automatic Frequency Selection Automatic Transmitter sync (including custom Group Upload) Flash memory to store six 60-channel custom frequency groups Shure s Patented Audio Reference Companding Multi-function bit-mapped backlit LCD Built-in USB & Ethernet network Control/Monitoring AMX/Crestron Compatible Remoteable 1/2 wave antenna Temperature-activated fan ensures top performance in high temperature environments. Clean fan screen as needed to remove dust. MARCAD diversity HANDHELD AND BODYPACK TRANSMITTERS FEATURES Switchable RF Power (10/50 & 10/100 mw), country dependent Low profile, compact bodypack design Frequency and Power Lockout Bit-mapped Backlit LCD 2 AA Batteries - Up to 9.5 hours continuous use (low power) Automatic Transmitter Setup All-metal die-cast construction Light-weight magnesium bodypack Flexible bodypack antenna Reversible Belt Clip UHF-R Wireless System Specifications Frequency Range and Transmitter Output Power Band Range Transmitter power (Nominal mw) Handheld Bodypack G MHz 10 / / 100 G1E MHz 10 / / 50 H MHz 10 / / 100 H4E MHz 10 / / 50 J , / / 100 J5E MHz 10 / / 50 K4E / / 50 L MHz 10 / / 100 L3E MHz 10 / / 50 M5E MHz 10 / / 50 P MHz 10 / / 50 P MHz 10 / / 50 Q MHz 10 / / 50 R MHz 10 / / 50 Q MHz A / MHz JBX MHz Q10A MHz 10 / / 50 R MHz 10/50 10/50 R MHz 10 Only 10 Only X MHz 10/50 10/100 NOTE This Radio equipment is intended for use in musical professional entertainment and similar applications. This Radio apparatus may be capable of operating on some frequencies not authorized in your region. Please contact your national authority to obtain information on authorized frequencies and RF power levels for wireless microphone products Shure Incorporated TL1067 (Rev. 5) Printed in U.S.A.

202 RF Carrier Frequency Range MHz, depending on region Working Range UR1, UR2:150 m (500 ft.), under typical conditions 500 m (1600 ft) line-of-sight, outdoors for a single system NOTE: Actual working range depends on RF signal absorption, reflection and interference Audio Frequency Response 40 18,000 Hz,(+1 db, 3 db). NOTE: Overall system frequency response depends on microphone element Gain Adjustment Range UR1: 20 to +35 db UR2: 10 to +20 db Modulation FM (45 khz max. deviation), compander system with pre- and de-emphasis RF Power Output See table above. Dynamic Range >105 db, A-weighted Image Rejection >110 db typical RF Sensitivity Spurious Rejection >90 db typical Ultimate Quieting (ref. 45 khz deviation) >100 db, A-weighted Signal Polarity Positive pressure on microphone diaphragm (or positive voltage applied to tip of WA302 phone plug) produces positive voltage on XLR output pin 2 with respect to XLR pin 3 and on the tip of the 1/4-inch output jack. System Distortion (ref. ± 45 khz deviation, 1 khz modulation) <0.3% Total Harmonic Distortion typical Power Requirements UR1, UR2: Two 1.5V AA batteries UR4: 100 to 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz Current Drain UR1, UR2: 180 ma max. (normal RF power setting) 240 ma max. (high RF power setting) UR4D+, UR4S+: 0.8 Amps max. Battery Life (Typical) UR1, UR2: 9.5 hours (low power) 6 hours (high power) Operating Temperature Range 18 to +57 C (0 to +135 F) NOTE: NOTE: UR4S+ 110 dbm Typical 12 db SINAD 105 dbm Typical 30 db SINAD UR4D+ 107 dbm Typical 12 db SINAD 102 dbm Typical 30 db SINAD Battery characteristics may limit this range Electrical safety approval is based on a maximum ambient temperature of 35 C (95 F). Overall Dimensions UR1: UR2/SM58: UR2/SM86: UR2/SM87A: UR2/BETA 58: UR2/BETA 87A, UR2/BETA 87C: 254 mm x 51 mm Dia. (10 x 2 in.) UR2/KSM9/BK, 98 mm L x 60 mm W x 17 mm D (3.84 x 2.38 x 0.66 in.) 261 mm L x 51 mm Dia. (10.27 x 2 in.) 261 mm L x 51 mm Dia. (10.27 x 2 in.) 254 mm x 51 mm Dia. (10 x 2 in.) 258 mm L x 51 mm Dia. (10.15 x 2 in.) UR2/KSM9/SL: 250 mm x 49 mm Dia. (9 7/8 x 15/16 in.) UR4S+/UR4D+: 44 mm H x 483 mm W x 366 mm D (1.72 x x in.) Net Weight UR1: 97 g (3.4 oz.) without battery UR2/SM58: 356 g (12.6 oz.) without battery UR2/BETA 58: 314 g (11.1oz.) without battery UR2/SM86: 317 g (11.2 oz.) without battery UR2/SM87A: 298 g (10.5 oz.) without battery UR2/BETA 87A, U2/BETA 87C: 325 g (11.5 oz) without battery UR2/KSM9/BK, UR2/KSM9/SL: 410 g (14.4 oz.) without battery) UR4S+: 4.8 kg (10.6 lbs) UR4D+: 5.0 kg (11.0 lbs) 2 Housing: UR1: UR2: UR4S+, UR4D+: Cast magnesium Aluminum die-cast handle and aluminum machined battery cup Galvanized steel CERTIFICATION UR1, UR2, UR4S+, UR4D+ This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Meets requirements of EMC standards EN Parts 1 and 2 and EN Parts 1 and 9. Meets essential requirements of European R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC, eligible to bear the CE mark. UR1, UR2 Certified under FCC Part 74. (FCC ID: DD4UR1, DD4UR2). Certified by IC in Canada under RSS-123 and RSS-102. (IC: 616A-UR1, 616A-UR2, 616A-UR1G1, 616A- UR2G1). Emission Designator: 120KF3E UR4S+, UR4D+ Approved under the Declaration of Conformity (DoC) provision of FCC Part 15. Certified in Canada by IC to RSS-123. (IC: 616A-UR4P). Conforms to Australian EMC requirements and is eligible for C-Tick marking. Have been granted the following Country Safety Approvals: culus Mark for US and Canada: Meets UL6500 and CSA/CAN E UL GS-Certified to EN Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. The CE Declaration of Conformity can be obtained from Shure Incorporated or any of its European representatives. For contact information please visit The CE Declaration of Conformity can be obtained from: Wiring MICROPHONE ELEMENT FET NOTE: LAVALIER MIC TIES PINS 3 AND 4 TOGETHER; GUITAR CABLE DOES NOT. INPUTS AND OUTPUTS UR1 Transmitter Audio Input Connector: Input Configuration: Actual Impedance: Maximum Input Level: 1 khz, 1% THD TA4M Connector Pin Assignments: UR1 Transmitter RF Output Connector: Actual Impedance: Pin Assignments: UR2 Transmitter Audio Input Input Configuration: Actual Impedance: Maximum Input Level: 1 khz, 1% THD TA4F Connector TA4M Connector UR1 MIC JACK BOARD 500Ω 500Ω 27 pf 4-Pin male mini connector (TA4M) Unbalanced, active >1 M +10 dbu (sensitivity 0 db)) +20 dbu (sensitivity 10 db) Pin 1: Ground Pin 2: +5 Vdc bias Pin 3: Audio Pin 4: Tied through active load (on main board) to Ground. (On instrument adapter cable, Pin 4 floats) SMA 50 Shell = Ground Center = Signal Unbalanced, active >1 M +4.8 dbu 27 pf 20K Ω +5 V ACTIVE LOAD AUDIO GROUND

203 UR2 Transmitter RF Output Connector: Actual Impedance: Pin Assignments: * For remote antenna amplifiers RF Distribution Ports SMA 50 Shell = Ground Center = Signal Receiver Input Antenna Power Connector Type: IEC Actual Impedance: 50 - Nominal Input Level: 95 to 30 dbm VAC,50/60 Hz Maximum Input 20 dbm 240 VAC, + 10%, 50/60 Hz Level: Pin Assignments: Shell = Ground IEC Standard Center = Signal Bias Voltage* ma N/A maximum RF IN RF OUT Receiver Audio Output Output Configuration: Monitor (1/4 Headphone) Unbalanced mono, 1/4 inch Computer/Network Interface Ethernet USB* RJ45 USB Series B Receptacle 1/4 Phone XLR Impedance Balanced Electrically Balanced Actual Impedance: (active balanced) (150 mic) Maximum Output Level dbu +24 dbu ( 6 dbu mic) with 100 Hz modulating tone Pin Assignments: Phantom Power Protection? Tip = Hot Ring = Hot Sleeve = Gnd Tip = Hot Ring = no signal Sleeve = Gnd No Yes Yes 1 = Ground 2 = Audio + 3 = Audio * USB-IF logo is a trademark of Universal Serial Bus Implementers Forum, Inc. Connector Type Vdc Bias ma N/A XLR 1/4 Monitor/headphone 1/4 Phone 3

204 REPLACEMENT PARTS AND ACCESSORIES Furnished Accessories Microphone Stand Adapter (UR2) Zipper Bag (UR1) Zipper Bag (UR2) Antenna Extension Cables (2) RF Distribution Cables (2) Hardware Kit, Locking Connector Antenna (UR1), MHz Antenna (UR1), MHz Antenna (UR1), MHz Antenna (UR1), MHz Antenna (UR1), MHz Two Antennas (UR4), Band Dependent (see table) Transmitter Carrying Case WA371 26A13 26A14 95A N2035 WA340 UA700 UA740 UA710 UA720 UA730 UA820 95A9053 Optional Accessories SM58 Head with Grille RPW112 SM86 Head with Grille RPW114 BETA 58 Head with Grille RPW118 BETA 87A Head with Grille RPW120 BETA 87C Head with Grille RPW122 SM87A Head with Grille RPW116 KSM9/SL Head with Grille RPW 180 KSM9/BK Head with Grille RPW184 Matte Silver Grille (SM58) RK143G Matte Silver Grille (SM86) RPM266 Matte Silver Grille (BETA 58) RK265G Black Grille (SM87) RK214G Matte Silver Grille (BETA 87A) RK312 Matte Silver Grille (BETA 87C) RK312 Black Grille (BETA 58) RK323G Black Grille (BETA 87A/BETA 87C) RK324G Belt Clip 44A8031 Body-Pack Pouch (Black), UR1 WA580B Body-Pack Pouch (White), UR1 WA580W Popper Stopper Windscreen A85WS Antenna Combiners and Accessories Antennas and receivers must be from the same frequency band. The supplied 1/2 wave antennas can be remotely mounted or mounted directly to the UA845. Antennas and cables for use with the UA845 can also be used with stand-alone UHF-R receivers. Passive Antenna/Splitter Combiner Kit UA221 (recommended for 2 receivers) UHF Antenna Power Distribution Amplifier UA845- U.S.A. UA845SWB Europe UA845E UK UA845UK 1/2 Wave, Omnidirectional, Wideband Antenna UA860SWB Active Directional Wideband Antenna UA870USTV and UA870X* Wideband In-Line RF Amplifier UA830USTV and UA830X* Passive Unidirectional Wideband Antenna PA805SWB 1/2 wave antennas (2) H4E, H4 Bands UA820H4 J5E, J5 Bands UA820J L3E, L3 Bands UA820L3 Q5, Q6, Q10 Bands UA820Q R9, ABJ, Bands UA820A G1 Band UA820G X1 Band UA820X 10 Antenna Cable PA Antenna Cable (RG-8/X) UA Antenna Cable (RG-8/X) UA Antenna Cable UA8100 Note: USTV: MHz. X: MHz Architect s and Engineer s Specifications The wireless system shall operate in the UHF band between MHz and MHz, with the specific range being dependent on the user's locale. The system shall include the option of changing the operating frequency in order to avoid RF interference, enabling up to 160 systems to operate simultaneously in the same location. Preconfigured group, channel and frequency setups shall be available to ensure that multiple systems in use do not interfere with one another. All transmitters shall be powered by 2 AA batteries and shall have a power on/off switch. The bodypack will have an LED indicating that power is on. Available transmitters shall include: a body pack for use with electric guitars, basses, and other electric instruments, and a handheld microphone for vocals. The transmitters shall have a DC/DC converter to ensure consistent performance, even if battery voltages change. The receiver shall have a user-programmable, menu-driven LCD showing group, channel, frequency, name, squelch level, and locked/unlocked status. The system shall use technology such as MARCAD signal combining circuitry to improve reception, minimize signal dropouts, and achieve the best possible signal-to-noise ratio. An equalizer, tone key squelch, and noise squelch circuitry shall be built into the system to provide optimal sound quality and minimize unwanted noise. The receiver shall include dual RF meters (one for each antenna), an audio level meter, and a Networking Interface connector for computer control and monitoring. The receiver shall have a volume control and an adjustable noise squelch control. The system shall be the Shure UHF-R Wireless. United States, Canada, Latin America, Caribbean: Shure Incorporated 5800 West Touhy Avenue Niles, IL USA Phone: Fax: (USA) Fax: info@shure.com 2011 Shure Incorporated Europe, Middle East, Africa: Shure Europe GmbH Jakob-Dieffenbacher-Str. 12, Eppingen, Germany Phone: Fax: info@shure.de Asia, Pacific: Shure Asia Limited 22/F, 625 King s Road North Point, Island East Hong Kong Phone: Fax: info@shure.com.hk 4

205 The 500 series offers Your choice of an 18.5" (47 cm) or 24" (61 cm) widescreen highdefinition (HD) display Native 16:9 aspect ratio with flexible scaling options to support 16:10 and 4:3 resolutions Revision 1.3 high-bandwidth digital content protection (HDCP) compliance DVI or VGA connections Four high-speed USB 2.0 ports to connect computers and peripheral devices The ability to write notes in digital ink and save everything to a single file The ability to write within Microsoft Office applications and save notes in the original files SMART Podium 500 series interactive pen display Create dynamic collaborative work sessions and engaging presentations with the SMART Podium 500 series interactive pen display. SMART Podium connects to your computer so you can display, interact with and write over digital content, all while sharing that content on a large screen in the same room or from a remote location. Flexible and versatile The versatile interactive pen display supports collaboration in virtually any workspace, from small meeting rooms or home offices to large auditoriums. Open documents, presentations, applications, websites and multimedia files, write notes over them in digital ink and save your work for distribution or later reference. In meeting rooms equipped with SMART Board interactive whiteboards or displays, you can work with content from anywhere in the room and share it on the interactive whiteboard or display. Remote or home office workers can use SMART Podium with SMART Bridgit conferencing software to share screens and write over content as if they were in the room. A powerful presentation tool With the SMART Podium interactive pen display, you have control over your digital resources while facing your audience. Because all of your content is in front of you and projected onto a large screen, you can focus on keeping your audience engaged. The display s tethered pen acts as a mouse to navigate content on your screen control computer applications and write notes over applications, slides, websites and videos. The Smooth Tilt Stand helps support a natural writing posture. The intuitive function buttons illuminated for dimly lit rooms enable you to change ink colors, erase, highlight and emphasize content, access the mouse function, and save and share your work instantly.

206 USB 2.0 ports high-speed connections for peripherals such as USB drives, document cameras or personal mobile devices 2 Application tool buttons launch SMART Meeting Pro software, capture screenshots Pen tool buttons launch the On-Screen Keyboard, pointer or right-click function and select the eraser or pen colors Support tool buttons launch help and orient the screen Magnetic pen rest rest the tethered pen here for easy access Key features DViT (Digital Vision Touch) technology SMART Podium features SMART s own DViT technology. With cameras incorporated in the bezel to detect pen touch and movement, DViT provides a responsive, accurate writing experience. Widescreen HD interactive display View your content in sharp detail with an 18.5" (47 cm) or 24" (61 cm) HD progressive-scan LCD display. The 18.5" display features 720p resolution. The 24" display features 1080p (full HD) resolution. Elegant design SMART Podium features a slim profile, a minimized bezel with a magnetic pen rest and a reduced overall footprint, complementing virtually any workspace. Console buttons Access the right-click button, select pen colors or the eraser, or launch the On-Screen Keyboard, Screen Capture tool or SMART Meeting Pro software. The buttons are illuminated for use in dimly lit rooms. They are also preconfigured but can be programmed to suit the shortcuts you use most. Tethered pen Control your computer from SMART Podium and comfortably write over any application with the battery-free tethered pen. Because the pen is the point of contact on the interactive screen, you can rest your hand on the screen while writing notes. SMART Ink SMART Ink smooths out your handwriting to improve legibility. You can write notes over any application and save them into several common applications, including Microsoft Office 2010 programs or Adobe Acrobat Pro. You can also turn handwritten notes into text objects that you can manipulate. Integration with Microsoft PowerPoint Presenter view Maintain a private view of your presentation material, including all slides and speaking notes, while controlling what your audience sees on the screen or interactive whiteboard or display. Use the controls on SMART Podium to switch ink colors, move back and forth between slides and write speaking notes as you present. Smooth Tilt Stand Smoothly and easily adjust the position of your SMART Podium, so you can comfortably rest your hand on the display while you make notes and maintain eye contact with the people around the table or in the audience. HDCP compliant Ensures that HDCP-encrypted content can be displayed. High-speed USB 2.0 ports Access three high-speed USB 2.0 ports to connect peripherals such as a USB drive, document camera or personal mobile device. A fourth USB 2.0 on the rear connection panel is provided to connect a computer. USB disabling Prevent unauthorized USB data transfers by mechanically disabling the USB port functionality. SMART Meeting Pro software included Use SMART Meeting Pro software, which is included, to write notes in digital ink over any document, application or website, or capture notes as a screenshot and save them as a PDF or PPT file. SMART GoWire auto-launch cable included The cable enables guest laptops without SMART software to connect to SMART Podium. Warranty Receive a two-year limited warranty on your SMART Podium. Technical specifications Operating systems The 500 series supports Microsoft Windows operating systems. SMART Podium Size Size with adjustable stand Display area Weight (with stand) 18.5" display 18 3/8" W 13" H 3" D (46.7 cm 33 cm 7.6 cm) 18 3/8" W 12 5/8" H 11 3/4" D (46.7 cm 32.1 cm 29.8 cm) 16 1/2" W 9 1/2" H (41.9 cm 24.1 cm) 18 1/2" (47 cm) diagonal 19 lb. 11 oz. (8.9 kg) 24" display 23 5/16" W 15 13/16" H 3" D (59.3 cm 40.1 cm 7.6 cm) 23 5/16" W 15 3/8" H 10 3/4" D (59.3 cm 39 cm 27.3 cm) 21 5/16" W 12 3/16" H (54.1 cm 30.9 cm) 24" (61 cm) diagonal 27 lb. 6 oz. (12.5 kg) Authorized reseller: SMART Technologies Toll Free (U.S./Canada) or smarttech.com 2011 SMART Technologies. All rights reserved. SMART Podium, SMART Board, SMART Bridgit, SMART Meeting Pro, DViT, SMART Ink, SMART GoWire, smarttech, the SMART logo, all SMART taglines and product logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SMART Technologies in the U.S. and/or other countries. Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other third-party product and company names are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective owners. Contents are subject to change without notice. MKTG-048-REV01-POD

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233 Written by: Kevin Gross Date: October 7, 2009 Q-LAN The Architecture and Network Redundancy Q-LAN is a third-generation networked media distribution technology providing higher quality, lower latency and greater scalability when compared to its third generation peers and previous-generation audio networks. Q-LAN operates over gigabit and higher rate Ethernet variants. Q-LAN is a central component of QSC s comprehensive Q-Sys integrated system platform. Interactive integration with Q-Sys means that Q-LAN can be configured and monitored using the graphical and scripting tools available on the Q-Sys platform. Q-Sys Since Q-LAN is an integral part of the Q-Sys platform, some background on Q-Sys is required to fully appreciate Q-LAN. Q-Sys is comprised of three principal component types: I/O Frames (and other I/O devices), Cores and User control interfaces. The components are interconnected via an Ethernet and/or IP network. WHITE PAPER I/O devices are the entry and exit points for audio in the Q-Sys system. Audio signals presented to the I/O devices are packetized and sent over the network to the Core where the audio data is processed, re-packetized and sent back to the same or different I/O devices for output to power amplifiers or other audio destinations. Each I/O device has two Ethernet connections for use in fault-tolerant networking. The Core connects to an I/O device via Q-LAN. The number of I/O devices in a system is limited only by the size of your Core. The I/O frame supports up to a total of 16 channels in and 16 channels out through up to four modular audio I/O cards installed in the Frame. Future I/O devices may have different I/O capacity. The Core is Q-Sys central processing unit and is where audio signals for the system are processed and combined. Different Core models (e.g. Core 1000, Core 3000, Core 4000) are available with different network I/O and processing capacity. At least one Core is required in a system. Addition of a second Core for fault tolerance is a design option. Wireless Remote Laptop Q-Sys Core Gigabit Switch AES Digital Audio I/O Frame I/O Frame I/O Frame Up to 16 Audio Sources QSC DataPort Amplifiers QSC Loudspeakers QSC DataPort Amplifiers QSC Loudspeakers Q-Sys architecture 1

234 The Core s connection to the rest of the system is primarily through the Q-LAN network. Each Core has four gigabit Ethernet connections: two for fault-tolerant Q-LAN and another two for running control communication though connections physically separate from Q-LAN if desired. Q-LAN audio and control data can peacefully coexist (see Quality of Service) so this second set of connections is not used in typical installations. Q-LAN allows the network to be shared between audio distribution, system control and monitoring and traditional network applications. A Windows PC running Q-Sys Designer software is an optional component of a Q-Sys system. The PC exists on the same network with the other components. Multiple instances of Q-Sys designer can monitor the same Q-Sys system from multiple PCs. Multiple instances of Q-Sys designer running on a single PC can control and monitor multiple systems. Other control components such as touch screens and third-party control systems (e.g. AMX, Crestron ) may be connected to the same network and to the same system(s). Standard commodity gigabit Ethernet switches serve as the interconnect points for Q-LAN networking. To ensure reliable, low-latency audio delivery, these switches must meet Q-LAN performance and feature requirements (see Q-LAN Network Requirements). User interface and control components of the system may also be connected to these switches or may be connected to lower-performance segments of the network (e.g. fast Ethernet, WiFi, WAN). Q-LAN Capacity and Quality Q-LAN can safely use up to 90% of gigabit Ethernet link capacity. This is enough bandwidth to carry up to 512 lowlatency, high-resolution audio channels. The largest Q-Sys Core utilizes this maximum capacity at 512 channels in and 512 channels out through one network connection. There is no limit to the total number of channels carried by a network. It is possible to build systems of systems and this way, system capacity is virtually unlimited. Latency is the delay of a signal through a system or component. In audio, latency is most critical in live sound applications. Where latency is critical, generally speaking, lower latency equates to better performance. Q-LAN latency is 1 ms. Time alignment of audio signals is assured by a high-performance hardware-assisted precision time protocol implementation (see Clock Distribution). The path through Q-Sys comprises analog-to-digital conversion, a first pass through the network to the Core, processing in the Core, a second pass through the network to the destination and finally, digital-to-analog conversion. Total system latency is 2-1/2 ms. All audio processing and transport is carried out in floatingpoint format. Processing is handled at up to 64-bit resolution. Network transport uses 32-bit resolution. Resolution in excess of the performance of the 24-bit input and output interfaces, DACs and ADCs assures that Q-Sys processing and networking is sonically transparent. The floating-point format preserves dynamic range throughout the signal path making gain structure and intermediate overload considerations inconsequential 1. The inputs and outputs of the system are the only places where attention to gain structure is required. 1 Gain structure refers to the normalization of gain elements though the signal path from input to output so as to assure a constant amount of headroom. Configuring the gain structure in this way has the benefit of optimizing signal-to-noise ratio for the system. Because of the self-scaling attributes of the exponential representation used for floating-point audio data in Q-Sys, signal-to-noise ratio is inherently optimized at any gain setting or signal level. 2

235 Fault Tolerance Q-LAN supports all standard Ethernet and layer-3 fault tolerance strategies: Spanning tree protocol (including rapid spanning tree), link aggregation, IP routing, vendor-specific meshing and fail-over schemes, self-monitoring systems and redundant power supplies. Q-Sys accommodates a fully redundant networking configuration. When this capability is utilized, two distinct and parallel networks are built. The dual network configuration can withstand any single network component or link failure by automatically switching to the secondary network. The switch over is accomplished quickly and without interrupting audio. Q-Sys also supports fault tolerance through dual connections to the same network. This configuration is, in some regards, more IT friendly 2. This alternative configuration potentially improves fault tolerance in the presence of multiple failures but does require additional backbone bandwidth and is susceptible to adverse interaction in some fault scenarios 3. White Switch Inputs Core Gray Switch Outputs Fully redundant network configuration Primary Inputs Primary Core White Switch Secondary Inputs Secondary Core Gray Switch Primary Outputs Secondary Outputs Fully redundant network with redundant Cores and redundant I/O Frames 2 Mainstream IT professionals and departments tend to think in terms of The network. The idea of multiple independent networks is not always readily accepted. 3 In some failure modes, it is possible for one piece of malfunctioning equipment to adversely affect everything connected to the same network. 3

236 In addition to support for fault tolerance in the network, fault tolerance for Q-Sys components is supported. A system can be populated with two Cores. Cores are designated primary and backup by the designer. The primary Core initially comes up in the online state and establishes audio streams to and from the I/O devices on the network. The backup Core initially comes up in the offline state and does not transmit or request to receive any audio streams. The two Cores are designated to perform identical signal processing. Redundancy awareness in Q-Sys control communications keep operating parameters synchronized. I/O devices may be doubled up either throughout the system or only where deemed critically necessary. Analog and digital audio sources to and from I/O Frames are wired in parallel to primary and backup input devices. Analog and digital outputs are bridged together and wired to downstream equipment. Internal relays open on the backup device to prevent contention. Microphone inputs configured to supply phantom power may be safely wired in parallel. The Core uses the following logic to select between primary and backup I/O devices operating as a redundant pair: 1. On startup select the primary. 2. Core continuously polls both primary and backup during operation. 3. If selected I/O device reports a fault or fails to respond and cannot be discovered and other device has recently reported good health, switch to the other device. The above rules ensure that when a failure is detected in a primary device, the system switches to the backup. To avoid unnecessary interruption of audio and respond appropriately to intermittent failure scenarios, the system does not automatically switch back to the primary when the primary recovers from its failure. User interface controls allow manual switch over between primary and backup devices. AV Networks Comparison The OSI reference model is a useful tool for understanding how networks are organized. The model is arranged from network hardware specific at layer-1 to abstract connectivity at the higher layers. Networked audio distribution technologies can be categorized based on where they insert themselves in the OSI network reference model. Layer-1 communications technologies operate at a basic hardware level. Protocols are unsophisticated and cannot be readily translated to other network hardware. Layer-1 technology is often focused on point-to-point communications. The network only comes into existence through the addition of purpose-built switching and routing equipment. EtherSound, AES50, A-Net and Rocknet are examples of layer-1 audio distribution technologies. Layer-2 systems cooperate with their respective native network technology. Ethernet is, by far, the most widelyused layer-2 network. Although layer-2 systems are bound to their chosen network hardware and do not scale beyond it, insertion at this higher layer allows the use of standard network switches and often allows for the coexistence of multiple services on the same physical infrastructure: audio mixed with more traditional network applications. AVB is a layer-2 network solution. AVB not only requires an uninterrupted layer-2 connection between devices but it requires that connection be made through special AVBcapable switches and network equipment. CobraNet was first introduced as a first-generation network requiring a separate physical infrastructure. CobraNet evolved to become a full-featured layer-2 technology. CobraNet has not evolved to compete with greater capacity and performance of the third-generation gigabit technologies. Layer-3 networking, also commonly known as IP or TCP/IP networking, is the basis for the Internet. The layer-3 systems operate at an abstract level above dependencies on the particular network hardware on which they run. On a private network such as used in audio installations, a layer-3 protocol such as Q-LAN offers increased interoperability and scalability and access to advanced capabilities in modern network equipment and tools. A layer-3 protocol operates without impediment on a layer-2 network. The reverse is not true a layer-3 network will refuse to carry layer-2 traffic. Even if the scope of your current projects fit within layer-2 networking, there is little overhead associated with inclusion of the layer-3 capability. Q-LAN and DANTE are both layer-3 real-time audio distribution technologies. Telephony through VoIP and Audio over IP used in broadcast applications are examples of lower performance layer-3 technologies. 4

237 Audio Delivery Q-LAN audio is transmitted in streams. A stream is an ongoing series of packets transmitted at a rate of 3000 per second. Each packet contains 16 audio samples for each of up to 16 audio channels. An arbitrary mixture of streams with different channel counts is permitted on a Q-LAN network. Samples are conveyed in 32-bit floating point format. The maximum payload size for an audio stream packet is 1024 bytes. The minimum payload is 64 bytes. Total packet size including all headers is in the range 1078 to 118 bytes. Bandwidth consumed per stream is 3.3 to 26.4 Mb per stream for streams with 1 to 16 audio channels respectively. The organization of multiple audio channels into streams improves bandwidth efficiency (a single 16-channel stream uses half the bandwidth of 16 single-channel streams). Streams also remove the need to route related channels independently. Streams do not affect routing flexibility. All audio passes through the core and is processed there on a channel-by-channel basis. The Core supports a generous number of streams (up to 128 streams received and 128 transmitted). Audio streams are transported via UDP/IP. As part of stream setup, a UDP port number is negotiated between transmitter and receiver. Transmitters and receivers find each other through a separate handshake sequence which occurs when a stream is first established. A receiver will open a UDP port in the range 6511 to The receiver has learned the IP address of its respective transmitter through the separate discovery mechanism (see Discovery). The receiver sends a UDP subscribe request packet to the transmitter from that port. The transmitter responds with a subscription acknowledgement packet and then begins sending audio data packets. Streams are unidirectional from transmitter to receiver with regular, though less frequent (1 acknowledgment per 100 stream packets) acknowledgments from receiver to transmitter. The periodic acknowledgments ensure that the transmitter promptly discontinues transmission in the event of receiver or receiver connection failure. All stream transmissions are done with unicast IP addressing. Separate streams are used to route the same audio to multiple destinations. The I/O Frames feature the ability to replicate the same audio channel multiple times on multiple outputs of an I/O Frame. In this scenario, the number of channels on the network is reduced with respect to the total number of output channels available from the system. Discovery Discovery is the process of enumerating and identifying devices and resources on a network. Without discovery, the only way to make connections is by using cumbersome network addresses. Instead of exposing these addresses to users, Q-Sys devices are identified by name. Q-Sys implements its own discovery protocol called QDP which uses multicast IP messaging on a dedicated registered address of Discovery can be accomplished anywhere on the network where this multicast address is routed. QDP used IGMP to constrain delivery of discovery messages only to where they are needed. QDP streamlines the process of setting up a Q-Sys system. Simply attach the Cores and I/O devices to the network and the components promptly appear in Q-Sys Configurator (a component of Q-Sys Designer). Click on each item to configure and name it. Discovery combined with system integration supported by Q-Sys designer means that audio connections across the network are specified graphically. Unlike other distribution systems, with Q-LAN, there is no requirement to assign and remember names or numbers for signals. Simply drag wires from source to destination and the connection is made for you. Clock Distribution Any digital audio and/or video distribution system must deliver both the media data and its corresponding clock. Q-LAN accomplishes clock distribution using the IEEE 1588 Precision time protocol (PTP). A variation of PTP is used in AVB. PTP is under consideration for use in next-generation video distribution systems standards under development by SMPTE. Under PTP, one device on the network is elected Grandmaster. The Grandmaster transmits periodic time updates to all other PTP participants on the network. Participants also periodically do timed interrogation of the Grandmaster. These measurements are used to compensate the time base at each participant for any fixed latency introduced by the network. Q-LANs 48-kHz sample clock runs synchronously with respect to the PTP-distributed clock. All audio streams operate synchronously with respect to this master clock. 5

238 This common sample clock approach maximizes routing and processing flexibility with all audio represented according to the same clock, it can be readily routed and combined without synchronization or alignment issues. The master clock scheme does however require that any digital audio sources to the network be pre-synchronized to the network s clock or that sample-rate conversion be employed to accommodate digital signals to the network s clock. The AES3 digital interfaces in the I/O Frames feature integrated high-quality sample-rate conversion. Network Management Q-Sys is a comprehensive and integrated system platform. The capabilities of the platform include audio distribution, audio processing and system control and monitoring. The control and monitoring capabilities of Q-Sys include control and monitoring of Q-Sys hardware as well as external components. With these comprehensive capabilities built into Q-Sys, the system is self monitoring. A separate network monitoring system is unnecessary in most Q-LAN installations. The Q-Sys system and thus Q-LAN also features the ability to be controlled and monitored over the network by external entities or systems. If desirable, Q-Sys and Q-LAN can be integrated into larger network management platforms. Q-LAN Network Requirements Q-LAN is a high-performance real-time audio distribution system and as such requires real-time performance from the network which hosts it. The performance is achieved through the following means: Use of gigabit Ethernet throughout Gigabit Ethernet provides 10 times the bandwidth compared to previous generation 100 Mb fast Ethernet. Significantly, it does so at one tenth the latency. Even if the channel count of your application does not justify using gigabit Ethernet, the reduced latency will. Q-LAN requires use of gigabit Ethernet end-to-end for all paths carrying audio through the network design guidelines limiting the physical extent of the network assure that data is not unduly delayed in long cable or fiber runs or by accumulated latency of a multitude of network switches. Quality of Service Quality of service enables the network to distinguish different traffic types and for these different types of traffic to receive different treatment depending on their priorities. QoS capability is required by Q-LAN. QoS is the mechanism which allows Q-LAN to comingle with other network applications, (including other network audio distribution technologies such as CobraNet), on the same infrastructure. Q-LAN does not require a separate infrastructure. It does not require audio traffic be segregated through Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) configurations. The QoS mechanisms do this globally for the network and with minimal configuration requirements. Q-LAN uses layer-3 DiffServ QoS support. Q-LAN operates three distinct traffic classes (46) Expedited forwarding (EF) for clock transport (34) Assured forwarding (AF41) for audio transport (0) Default classification for control communications. In support of this scheme, the QoS mechanism on a switch used in a Q-LAN network must feature a minimum 4 egress queues per port. Once traffic has been separated into different classes and placed into respective queues, the switch must determine an appropriate transmission ordering. Switches typically offer several choices as to transmission strategy such as round robin, weighted round robin, weighted fair queuing or strict priority. Q-LAN requires strict priority selection. Under strict priority, the switch transmits all high priority traffic before any lower-priority traffic is transmitted. Use of Quality of service (QoS) capabilities in network equipment QoS allows network equipment to expedite delivery of time-sensitive traffic such as Q-LAN audio and timing signals over non-real-time traffic such as file transfers. Without QoS, network performance is indeterminate. Limiting the physical extent of the network Network 6

239 Q-Sys Node 1 Ethernet Switch Ethernet Switch Q-Sys Node 2 Ethernet Switch 1 Ethernet Switch 2 Ethernet Switch 3 Ethernet Switch 4 Ethernet Switch 5 Q-Sys Node 4 Ethernet Switch 6 Ethernet Switch 7 Q-Sys Node 3 7-hop network Network Size Limiting the size of the network helps ensure that performance required by Q-LAN is achieved. Network performance is limited by delays occurring in network equipment and, to a lesser extent, delays in wiring and fiberoptic cables due to the finite speed of light. Total latency through Q-LAN is 1 ms. About one quarter of that time is budgeted to network delays (the other half is budgeted to buffering and packetizing). 1 km of twisted pair or optical cable imparts almost 5 µs delay. The minimum delay through a standard gigabit Ethernet switch is 12 µs; Maximum delay can be several times higher 4. Q-LAN network design guidelines describe allowable network size in terms of hop count and network diameter. Hop count is the maximum number of switches any audio data must pass through between its source and destination. Diameter is the accumulated cable distance between the furthest two endpoints on the network. Table 1 shows allowed network diameter as a function of hop count. Allowed network diameter as a function of hop count Table 1 Hops Diameter 2 35 km 3 29 km 4 22 km 5 15 km 6 9 km 7 2 km 4 Standard gigabit switches use store-forward switching. Exotic switches use cut-through switching and can have lower latencies. This discussion assumes QoS is deployed. Without QoS, delay can be unbounded. 7

240 Q-Sys Node 1 Ethernet Switch 2 Q-Sys Node 2 Ethernet Switch 1 Core Switch Ethernet Switch 3 Q-Sys Node 4 Ethernet Switch 4 Q-Sys Node 3 3-hop core-switched network Q-Sys Node 1 Ethernet Switch 2 Q-Sys Node 2 Ethernet Switch 1 Core Switch 3 Core Switch 3 Ethernet Switch 3 Q-Sys Node 4 Ethernet Switch 4 Q-Sys Node 3 4-hop redundant core switched network 8

241 Switch Performance The high performance required by Q-LAN implies performance requirements for the Ethernet switches in the network that hosts it. Internal bandwidth Q-LAN expects non-blocking wirespeed gigabit Ethernet bridging: No dropped packets due to internal bandwidth constraints; no flow control invoked or required. Buffer capacity At least 80 Kbyte total egress buffering available for audio class of service with minimum of 40 Kbyte available per port for this class. Forwarding decision time The time from receipt of the last bit of the packet at the ingress port to the transmission of the first bit of the forwarded packet at the egress port must be 10 µs or less. Layer-3 Networking Q-LAN operates well with conventional layer-2 Ethernet networking. Many high-performance networking components now include layer-3 capabilities such as IGMP, WAN multicast management protocols, wire speed IP routing and support for internet routing protocols. Unlike most other networked audio distribution systems, Q-LAN can take advantage of these capabilities should you choose to activate them. These provisions make for a more scalable, robust and manageable network. Jumbo Packets Data on Ethernet is transmitted in packets. Ethernet packet size is limited by the IEEE standards to 1522 bytes. A larger packet size has the potential to reduce overhead in some communications protocols. Although the IEEE has refused to condone an increase in the Ethernet packet size, many vendors, bowing to customer demand, have implemented support for jumbo packets. Jumbo packets are generally defined as having a total length between 1523 and 9216 bytes. Network performance criteria for Q-LAN require no jumbo packet through all audio paths on the network. The presence of jumbo packets on Q-LAN-shared network links, even if on a separate VLAN, will introduce additional network latencies making a single switch hop produce the same delay as 6 switch hops with standard framing. Jumbo packets will only be present on a network if network equipment is configured to pass them and end stations are configured to generate them. Fortunately, managed switches typically ship with jumbo-packet support disabled by default. End stations such as routers and servers also generally ship with jumbo packets disabled. A concerted and systematic configuration effort is required to enable jumbo packets on a network. Flow Control Low-level flow-control protocols (principally 802.3x) are used to prevent ingress buffer overflows. Modern switches have adequate internal bandwidth such that input buffer overflow is not a concern and 802.3x flow control is considered by many vendors to be a relic. Switches with internal bandwidth meeting or exceeding wire speed are not expected to initiate flow control. Being a latency-critical application, Q-LAN cannot tolerate the delivery delays created when flow control is invoked. Flow control must therefore be disabled or not given a chance to be invoked through the network paths used by Q-LAN. Managed vs. Unmanaged Switches A managed switch contains an intelligent entity which can be communicated with for the purposes of configuration and monitoring. Many of the advanced features found in current-generation network equipment require configuration. Examples of these features include: STP, Link aggregation, DiffServ, Broadcast storm suppression, IGMP, SNMP, HTTP, Telnet, VLANs, IP routing. Since Q-LAN uses DiffServ, managed switches are required. Most network managers will find multiple features on the above list which they are unwilling to forgo. With 100 Mb fast Ethernet networks, unmanaged switches were often an attractive and cost-effective option. With the new generation of gigabit Ethernet switches, unmanged switches are less common and there is little price difference between the managed and unmanaged ones. Switch Testing QSC has tested a number of switches whose specifications meet these Q-LAN requirements. Without exception equipment meeting specification have operated without issue. One could use network equipment for Q-LAN with confidence based solely on published specifications were it not for the fact that not all relevant specifications are published by all manufacturers. Specifically, details on buffer 9

242 sizes and QoS selection strategy are often missing from published specifications. QSC therefore publishes a list of network equipment which has been tested to Q-LAN specifications. An updated list can be found in the Q-Sys Designer help system. Conclusion Integrated within QSC s Q-Sys integrated system platform, a new networked digital audio distribution system has arrived. Compared with previous-generation systems and competing current-generation offerings of both the shipping and gestating variety, Q-LAN offers lower latency, higher fidelity, higher capacity and more comprehensive fault tolerance capabilities. Q-LAN operates on a cost-effective commodity gigabit Ethernet local area network. Since it uses some of the same protocols used on the Internet, Q-LAN has the ability to extend beyond the confines of the local area network. Q-LAN s integration within Q-Sys makes for a point-and-click networked audio distribution experience. Glossary ADC Analog to Digital Converter. ADCs are found at the inputs of digital signal processors. AES3 Audio Engineering Society digital audio interconnect standard (3rd AES standard). Also known as AES/EBU and technically similar to SPDIF consumer digital audio interconnect standard. AMX Systems technology provider and control and automation platform. ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange specifies mapping of text characters to numerical values for use in communication and human-computer interface. AVB Audio Video Bridging is an initiative under development by the IEEE s layer-2 net-working authority, the working group. AVB promises interoperable audio and video interconnect (similar to FireWire s offerings) on layer-2 Ethernet networks. Core (network architecture) A core switch is the central routing point in certain network designs. The core switch is a high-capacity hardware configurable (typically with slide-in interface cards) usually the size of a small refrigerator. Core switches are commonly set up in redundant pairs to eliminate a single point of failure for the network. Core (Q-Sys ) The Core is Q-Sys central processing unit. The Core is where audio signals for the system are processed and combined. Cores may be set up in redundant pairs to eliminate a single point of failure for the system. Crestron Systems technology provider and control and automation platform. DAC Digital to Analog Converter. DACs are found at the outputs of digital signal processors. DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is used by IP network devices when first connecting to a network to receive an IP address assignment and other network configuration information. DiffServ Differentiated Services is an IETF standard for classifying network traffic by using the DSCP field in the IP header. DNS The Domain Name System is the service and protocol suite that converts domain names (e.g. used by humans to the IP addresses (e.g ) used by computers on an IP network. DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point is the field in the header of IP packets used in classifying network traffic under the DiffServ standard. Ethernet One of several variants of wired and wireless physical network interconnects. All Ethernet variants share a common packet format. Fast Ethernet A 100 Mbit/second Ethernet variant. Sub variants are available for twisted pair cabling (100BASE-TX) or fiber-optic cable (100BASE-FL). Gigabit Ethernet A 1000 Mbit/second Ethernet variant. Sub variants are available for twisted pair cabling (1000BASE-T) or fiber-optic cable (1000BASE- SX/LX). Grandmaster Source of master clock in an IEEE 1588 clock distribution system. HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol is used by web browsers to retrieve content from web servers. An appliance supporting HTTP can be assumed to feature an integrated web server. I/O Device The I/O devices are the entry and exit points for audio in the Q-Sys system. I/O Frame 10

243 The I/O frame is an I/O device that supports up to a total of 16 channels in and 16 channels out through up to four modular audio I/O cards installed in the Frame. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers is a professional organization that, among other things, operates a standards body which is responsible for networking technologies such as Ethernet. IEEE 1588 A time-transfer protocol that allows precise synchronization of clocks across an Ethernet network. IEEE IEEE standards working group responsible for networking standards related to layer-2 Ethernet networking. IEEE IEEE standards working group responsible for maintenance and extension of wired Ethernet standards. IETF The Internet Engineering Task Force is responsible for development of IP networking protocols and standards. IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a protocol used in the management of multi-cast transmissions. IP Addressing An IP address is a 32-bit number that uniquely identifies an endpoint on an IP network. IP Networking A communication system that utilizes TCP/IP or UDP/IP encapsulation of data. IP Routing The process of forwarding data towards its destination based on information contained in the header of an IP packet. LAN A Local Area Network is a network scaled for the home or small office. LANs are typically layer-2 networks. LANs may be connected through a gateway to a WAN or to the Internet. Link Aggregation The use of multiple links in parallel to create a single higherbandwidth and resilient connection. Various proprietary and standardized means of designating and operating the links are available. Multicast A one-to-many addressing mode. A packet with multicast addressing will be simultaneously routed to all interested listeners. Multicast is available in IP networking and on Ethernet. OSI Reference Model The Open Systems Interconnection Reference Model is a useful tool for understanding how networks are organized. The OSI reference model is comprised of seven layers from network hardware specific at layer-1 to abstract network connectivity at the higher layers. PTP Precision Time Protocol is an alternate name for IEEE QoS Quality of Service is a data communications discipline that includes classification and prioritization of data flowing through a network. Q-Sys Q-Sys is a complete integrated system platform that encompasses everything from the audio input to the loudspeakers. Q-LAN is the networked distribution component of Q-Sys. Q-Sys Designer Q-Sys Designer is the user interface used to configure, control and monitor Q-Sys audio signal processing and network routing. Q-Sys Designer is a Windows application that runs on a computer connected to the Q-LAN network. SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers is a professional organization that, among other things, operates a standards body which is responsible for broadcast media and interconnect standards. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is used to control and monitor network equipment and end stations. STP Spanning Tree Protocol ensures a loop-free topology for Ethernet networks. STP is also used to create fault tolerant networks. Advanced variants of STP are available: Rapid STP (RSTP) recovers from failure more quickly than the original. Per-VLAN STP (PVST) takes VLAN configuration into account in its operation. Stream Q-LAN audio is transmitted in streams. A stream is an ongoing series of packets containing one or more channels of real-time audio data. mdns Multicast Domain Name System is a scaled down variant of DNS which uses multicast messaging rather than a network of servers to distribute resource information. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol over Internet Protocol is the workhorse protocol suite of the Internet. The protocol suite creates reliable connections between application over a network. The TCP protocol handles error correction and connection management. 11

244 UDP, UDP/IP User Datagram Protocol is a stripped-down protocol suite typically used for non-critical applications or real-time data. UDP is known as a connectionless and unreliable protocol meaning that it does not include the connection management and error recovery functionality found in TCP applications are expected to provide these pieces if required. Unicast A one-to-one addressing mode. A packet with unicast addressing will be routed to a single destination as indicated by the IP address in the header of the packet. VLAN A Virtual Local Area Network is a logically segmented interconnected set of network ports or end stations. VLANs allow different services or user groups to be isolated from one another without requiring dedicated network hardware for each. VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol is a telecommunications protocol suite which allows conventional telephone calls to be carried over data networks such as Ethernet or the Internet. WAN A Wide Area Network is a network with scope larger than a LAN and smaller than the Internet. A WAN is typically a layer-3 network. WiFi Trade name associated with wireless Ethernet networking based on the IEEE family of networking standards. Zeroconf Zero Configuration networking is a set of techniques and protocols that automatically creates a usable IP network without manual intervention or special configuration servers QSC Audio Products, LLC. All Rights Reserved. QSC, the QSC logo and Q-Sys are registered trademarks of QSC Audio Products, LLC in the U.S. Patent and Trademark office and other countries. Apple is a trademark of Apple Inc. Windows is a trademark of Microsoft. AMX is a trademark of AMX Corporation. CRESTON is a trademark of Creston Electronics, Inc. EtherSound is a trademark of Digigram. AES50 formerly known as SuperMAC was developed and standardized by Sony. The technology is now owned by Klark Teknik. A-Net by Aviom. Rocknet is a trademark of Media Numerics. AVB is under development by the IEEE s the working group. CobraNet is a trademark of Cirrus Logic. DANTE is a Trademark of Audinate. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Patents may apply or be pending. 12

245 Application Note Date: 01/18/2011 Revision: A Author: Scott Kalarchik Q-Sys TM Networking Overview The intention of this document is to provide network administrators an overview of the requirements needed to implement a Q-Sys Audio System on a converged network. In order to simplify this group of networking requirements for ease of communication between parties, QSC has named these requirements the Q-LAN Protocol Suite. Overview of Q-Sys Q-Sys is a system that performs complex routing, processing and management of audio in a facility. The elements of a Q-Sys system: The Core is based on an Intel server processor. It runs the system and handles the signal processing functions. I/O Frames are connected to the Core via the network and provide a means for audio signals to be brought into the Core from analog and digital sources as well as sending the processed audio to power amplifiers, powered loudspeakers or other audio devices. The I/O Frames are fitted with cards appropriate to the types of inputs and outputs they will receive or send. Peripheral devices including Page Stations and Touch Screen Controllers may also be used in a system. Q-Sys Designer software is used by the system designer to create signal flows, processing and control screens for a system. Layer-3 Networking All Q-Sys network protocols are Internet Protocol (IP) based and support advanced networks beyond the simple Layer-2 LAN. Because Q-Sys is a live system, real-time performance is required on either the LAN or the Layer-3 environments. On a Layer-3 network, routers replace some, or all, of the network switches. Therefore, routers need to have the same performance and feature requirements as the switches they replace. Q-LAN Protocol Suite Sampling Clock IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) used for synchronisation UDP on Ports 319 and packets per second 100 bytes per packet ~ registered to IEEE Address used depends on clock configuration selected in the Designer software Q-Sys Q-Sys Core Core Gigabit Switch AES Digital Audio I/O Frame I/O Frame I/O Frame Up to 16 Audio Sources QSC DataPort Amplifiers QSC Loudspeakers 1 QSC DataPort Amplifiers QSC Loudspeakers Figure A1

246 Audio Streams UDP on Ports 6511 through 6766 as needed Each packet contains 16 samples of up to 16 channels 3000 packets per second per stream 100 to 1100 bytes per packet or 1.65 ~ 3.31 Mbps per stream packet size depends on channel count Audio sampling is 32 bit floating point format Up to 128 streams in and out of each Q-Sys Core 1 Stream in and/or out for each I/O Frame or Page Station 100 acknowledgements are sent every second and contain receiver-side stats Control TCP and HTTP for Control Data and Core redundancy 1 Mbps or less dependant on connections to User Control Interfaces (UCI s) or AMX and Crestron QoS Ensures timely delivery of packets Employs DiffServ or Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) DSCP 63 normally reserved for Network Admin DSPC 46 EF (Expedited Forwarding) for PTP DSPC 34 AF (Assured Forwarding) for Audio data DSPC 0 for control data Minimum of 4 egress queues per switch port with Strict Priority Queuing other selection schemes (e.g. round robin, shaped round robin, fair queuing, guaranteed minimum bandwidth) are not recommended Each Q-Sys switch port must have 40kB of egress queue memory available Note: Don t enable bandwidth throttling on ports connected to the Cores QDP and Multicast Routing For Q-Sys to work across a Layer-3 network, you will need to configure the network to route the multicast addresses used by the PTP Clock and Discovery protocols. Q-Sys devices implement the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP). IGMP allows Q-Sys devices to register to receive specific multicast addresses. QDP Device Discovery registered to QSC Used to find Q-Sys products on the network by name regardless of IP address IEEE ~ Registered to IEEE Latency Time on 1 GB 12 micro seconds Time on 1 GB 10 micro seconds Allowed Time on Network = 243 micro seconds Option to increased buffer size for larger networks via Designer software Switch Requirements Must be a managed, non-blocking Gigabit switch with bandwidth meeting or exceeding wire speed bridging Must support DiffServ QoS Packet forwarding delay of less than 10 micro seconds No Jumbo frames on any Q-LAN paths Bandwidth Usage Bandwidth equation: Mb = (1.77 x total stream count) + (1.54 x total channel count) Dual network redundant configurations will produce the same bandwidth on both ports 2

247 Core bandwidth calculations are available on the Check Design... screen in the Designer software Core to Core redundant housekeeping data can be up to 6 Mbps when a Q-Sys System is being polled by AMX or Crestron IP Address Three methods are use to assign IP s: Manual, DHCP, or IPv4LL (Auto-IP) QSC recommends using Manual IP s End Point Device Routing This allows a device on one subnet to communicate with a device on separate subnet. There are two methods used to accomplish this task a static route or the default gateway. A static route defines a specific destination/mask pair. The default gateway is a catchall for everything which doesn t match a static route. Here s an example of a static routing configuration using the Q-Sys Configurator... screen in the Designer software: If you have any questions or need additional assistance, please contact your local QSC representative, QSC s sales department or myself. Scott Kalarchik, CCNA & CCDA Director, Engineered Systems QSC Audio Products, LLC 1665 MacArthur Blvd Costa Mesa CA Phone Cell Fax scottk@qscaudio.com Web To see if Discovery and routing are working on the Core, enter the following URL into any web browser: discovery/discovered and confirm there are files called device. ioframe.<ioframe-name> for each I/O Frame 3